Loading...
HomeMy Public PortalAboutORD14221 BILL NO. 2007-33 • SPONSORED BY COUNCILMAN Klindt ORDINANCE NO. AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI, AUTHORIZING THE MAYOR AND CITY CLERK TO EXECUTE AN AGREEMENT WITH VERSLUES CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE STREET DEPARTMENT MAINTENANCE FACILITY. WHEREAS, Verslues Construction Co., Inc. has become the apparent lowest and best bidder on the Street Department Maintenance Facility project; NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ENACTED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI, AS FOLLOWS: Section 1. The bid of Verslues Construction Co., Inc. is declared to be the lowest and best bid and is hereby accepted. Section 2.The Mayor and City Clerk are hereby authorized to execute an agreement with Verslues Construction Co., Inc.for construction of the Street Department Maintenance • Facility. Section 3. The agreement shall be substantially the same in form and content as that agreement attached hereto as Exhibit A. Section 4. This Ordinance shall be in full force and effect from and after the date of its passage and approval. Passed: Approve / '� �d -7 residing Officer Mayor ATTEST: APPROVED A TO FORM: ity Cle City lffcru,n, seIor i CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 'flit • ATAPS CITYwrisiIi:►iN�luw'� OF • § � R r� ,� r+•->< 1 tr.?t� Zfi� [+y i�f$_r ;' :`�Y'�' c�i_ S. 1 i ` Y i S t `� ':, �} •,.�� 'f �, rte i * 4�£'c � � s 1 S �'_ �} vry tj �µi � \�1�•.v E / t 1. T3 r� ,l•yy�,61. SY fi 1+- 5 } rs Z S i � Y ; 'yam` •.�} ,Y4 � y A 4 ' t "Tit g h ,r �qqe� 'Sb r� $$$ P •Y 4 {�, rr f „ x + _' Ml. •; "T a�f r '� �t• fa � " n ° " �� ;� }� Psi" 1 i 9 �, Fc:..yy.• a� .{r�'.u� ��. �Ti{�S`r '�..'}}{�f�..ff �'-tt �a`Y � a�'S kylx� ��,y '� -��� Prf if j`;l IT At ff y$ 1 v �� k� 4 t �-,P'�„y S µ�^ "'^S i 1 �•g� v'� �1 4 q i� .� tl k w"� h�'Y P .3 •tb fi , 3 "R� P' p 1 t SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PROJECT NO. 41005 !' Street Department Maintenance Facility ILI I E a n g • °a' TRI E. f 1 a•P� w ER 6 ��. ESSI it Jefferson City Department of Community Development . June 2007 • i t t STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING CITY OF JEFFERSON Hyde Park Jefferson City,-Missouri II N' DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT CITY OF JEFFERSON 320 East McCarty Street Jefferson City, Missouri 65101 I' - Prepared by: ' Architect • THE ARCHITECTS ALLIANCE, INC. 631 West Main Street Jefferson City, Missouri 65101 ' Telephone: 573.636.5000 Fax: 573.636.6133 Civil / Structural Engineer ' DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT CITY OF JEFFERSON i' 320 East McCarty Street Jefferson City, Missouri 65101 Telephone: 573.634.6410 ' Fax: 573.634.6457 Mechanical / Electrical / Plumbing Engineer I , MIDWEST ENGINEERING & DESIGN 3100 Brown Station Road, Suite D Columbia, Missouri 65202 Telephone: 573.875.0045 • Fax: 573.875.0046 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS • -Schedule of Drawings ' Advertisement for Bids • Notice to Bidders Information for--Bidders ' Bid Form • Bid Bond • Anti-Collusion Statement ' Contractor's Affidavit • Minority Business Enterprise Statement ' • Minority Business Utilization Agreement • Affidavit of Compliance with Prevailing Wage Law • Prevailing Wage Determination • Affidavit of Compliance Public Works Contracts Law • Excessive Unemployment Exception Certification • Construction Contract 1 . • Performance, Payment, and Guarantee Bond General Provisions ' Special Provisions • Building / Site Specifications Attachments l� Addendums ( If Any ) • (" INDICATES THIS ITEM INCLUDED IN BID PACKET FOR SUBMISSION OF BID) 1� T SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS • GENERAL G101 COVER SHEET/GENERAL INFORMATION ' CIVIL ' Cl GENERAL NOTE INFORMATION C2 SITE PLAN LAYOUT C3 SITE PLAN LAYOUT I, ARCHITECTURAL A101 MAIN LEVEL FLOOR PLAN ' A102 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN /MEZZANINE FLOOR PLAN/ ENLARGED RESTROOM PLANS / REFLECTED CEILING PLANS A201 BUILDING ELEVATIONS A301 BUILDING SECTIONS A302 WALL TYPES/MUD ROOM & LOCKER ROOM SECTIONS A501 DOOR SCHEDULE/DOOR,WINDOW, HEAD &JAMB DETAILS A601 CASEWORK/FINISH SCHEDULE/FINISH LEGEND A701 FIXTURE ELEVATIONS/DEVICE MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL • M101 HVAC PLAN OFFICE AREA M102 HVAC PLAN WEST BAY AREA; NORTH AND MEZZANINE AREAS M501 HVAC DETAILS AND SCHEDULES j ' ELECTRICAL E101 BAY AREA POWER/LIGHTING PLAN E102 OFFICE AREA LIGHTING PLAN E103 OFFICE AREA POWER/DATA PLAN E501 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES &SERVICE ENTRANCE DETAIL PLUMBING ' P101 DRAIN WASTE AND VENT PLAN OFFICE AREA P102 DRAIN WASTE AND VENT PLAN BAY AREAS P103 POTABLE WATER AND NATURAL GAS PLAN P501 PLUMBING DEVICE SCHEDULE AND DETAILS END OF SECTION • 'i SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 0705A SOD-1 1 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Sealed bids will be received at the office of the Purchasing Agent, 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101,until 1:30 PM,on Tuesday,June 5,2007. The bids will be opened and read aloud in the Council Chambers at 1:30 PM on that same day. The proposed work for the project entitled "Project No. 41005, Street Department Maintenance Facility"will include the furnishing of all material, labor, and equipment to construct a steel frame garage facility with accompanying office space and I' associated site work. A pre-bid conference will be held at 9:00 AM,on Tuesday, May.29,2007 in the Large i' Conference Room of City Hall, 320 E, McCarty Street, Jefferson City, MO 65101. All prospective bidders are urged to attend. Copies of the contract documents required for bidding purposes may be obtained from the Director of Community Development, 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri. A non-refundable deposit of Thirty Five($35.00)will be required for each set of plans and specifications. Individual full size sheets of the plans may be obtained for • Three Dollars ($3.00) per sheet. The contract will require compliance with the wage and labor requirements and the payment 'of minimum wages in accordance with the Schedule of Wage Rates. established by the Missouri Division of Labor Standards. ' The City eserves the right to reject an and all bids and to waive informalities therein, Y 9 J Y to determine which is the lowest and best bid and to approve the bond. CITY OF JEFFERSON Terry Stephenson Purchasing Agent Publication Date Sunday, May 20, 2007. r NOTICE TO BIDDERS Sealed bids will be received at the Office of the Purchasing Agent, City Hall, 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri, until 1:30 PM on Tuesday, June 5, 2007. The bids will be opened and read aloud in the Council Chambers at 1:30 PM on that same day. The proposed work for the project entitled "Project No. 41005, Street Department Maintenance Facility" will include the-furnishing of all material, labor, and equipment to construct a .steel frame garage facility with accompanying office space and tassociated site work. A pre-bid conference will be held at 9:00 AM, on Tuesday, May 29, 2007 in the Large Conference:Room of City Hall, 320 E. McCarty Street, Jefferson City, MO 65101. All prospective bidders are urged to attend. ' All equipment, material, and workmanship must be in accordance with the plans, specifications, and contract documents on file ..with the Director of Community Development, Jefferson City, Missouri. Co ies of the contract documents required for bidding purposes may be obtained from P q 9P P Y the Director of Community Development, 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri. A non-refundable deposit of Thirty Five($35.00)will be required for each set of plans and specifications. Individual full size sheets of the plans may be obtained for ' Three Dollars ($3.00) per sheet. A certified check on a solvent bank or a bid bond by a satisfactory surety in an amount i, equal to five (5) percent of the total amount of the bid must accompany each proposal. A one-year Performance and Guarantee Bond is required. I' The owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive informalities therein to determine which is the lowest and best bid and to approve the bond. CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI I ' Patrick E. Sullivan, PE Director of Community Development i1 I � 1 . � INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS • I13-1 SCOPE OF WORK The work to be done under this contract includes the furnishing of all technical personnel,labor, materials, and equipment required to perform the work included in the project entitled"Project No. 41005, Street Department Maintenance Facility" in accordance with the plans and specifications on file with the Department of Community Development. The proposed work for this project will include the furnishing of all material, labor, and equipment to construct a steel frame garage facility with accompanying office space and associated site work. I13-2 INSPECTION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND SITE OF WORK The bidder is required to examine carefully the site of-the proposed work, the bid, plans, specifications,supplemental specifications,special provisions,and contract documents before submitting a bid. Failure to do so will not relieve a successful bidder of the obligation to furnish all materials and labor necessary to carry out the provisions of the contract. ' I13-3 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS If the bidder has any questions which arise concerning the true meaning or intent of the Plans, Specifications or any part thereof, which affect the cost, quality, quantity, or character of the ' • project, he shall request in writing, at least five (5) days prior to the date fixed for the. bid opening, that an interpretation be made and an addendum be issued by the City, which shall ' then be delivered to all bidders to whom Plans and Specifications have been issued. All addenda issued shall become part of the contract documents. Failure to have requested an addendum covering.any questions affecting the interpretation of the Plans and Specifications ' shall not relieve the Contractor from delivering the completed project in.accordance with the intent of the Plans and Specifications to provide a workable project. ' I13-4 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The City of Jefferson may make such investigations as deemed necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work and the bidder shall furnish to the City all such ' information and data for this purpose as the City may request. The City reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by the bidder or investigation of such bidder fails to satisfy the City that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract ' and to complete the work contemplated therein. I113-5 EQUIVALENT MATERIAL Wherever definite reference is made in these Specifications to the use of any particular material or equipment, it is to be understood that any equivalent material or equipment may be used ' which will perform adequately the duties imposed by the general design,subject to the.approval of the City. • i 1 ' I113-6 BID SECURITY t • Each bid must be accompanied by a certified check or bid bond.made payable to the City of Jefferson for five percent (5%) of the amount of the bid. Bid securities will be returned after award of the contract except to the successful bidder. Should the successful bidder fail or refuse to execute the bond and the contract required within seven (7) days after he has received notice of acceptance of his bid, he shall forfeit to the City as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, the security deposited with his bid. ' IB-7 PREPARATION OF BIDS Bids must be made upon the prescribed forms attached in these Contract Documents. Only sealed bids will be considered, all bids otherwise submitted will be rejected as irregular. All blank spaces in the bid must be filled in and no change shall be made in the phraseology of the bid, or addition to the items mentioned therein. Any conditions, limitations or provisions attached to bids will render them informal and may be considered cause for their rejection. ' Extensions of quantities and unit prices shaJI be carried out to the penny. ' I13-8 PRICES The price submitted for each item of the work shall'inciude all costs of whatever nature involved in its construction, complete in place, as described in the Plans and Specifications. • Section 144.062 RSMo provides that the City's sales tax exemption may be used for the purchase of goods and materials for this project. The contract for the project will authorize and ' direct the Contractor to utilize the City's sales tax exemption in the purchase of goods and materials for the project. This provision shall apply to only those purchases totaling over$500 from an individual supplier.- ' All sales taxes on those items which do not qualify for the use of the City's sales tax exemption and for which sales tax might lawfully be assessed against the City are to be paid by the Contractor from the monies obtained in satisfaction of the Contract. It being understood by the bidder, that the bid prices submitted for those items shall include the cost of such taxes.- �- 1 B-9. APPROXIMATE QUANTITIES In cases where any part or all of the bidding is to be received on a unit price basis, the ' quantities stated in the bid will not be used in establishing final payment due the successful Contractor. The quantities stated on which unit prices are so invited are approximate only and each bidder shall make his own estimate from the plans of the quantities required on each item and calculate his unit price bid for each item.accordingly. Bids will be compared on the basis of number of units stated in the bid. Such estimated quantities, while made from the best information available, are approximate only. Payment-of the Contract will be based on actual number of units installed on the complete work. • 1 IB-10 LUMP SUM ITEMS ' • Payment for each lump sum item shall be at the lump sum bid for the item, complete in place, and shall include the costs of all labor, materials,tools and equipment to construct the item as described herein and to the limits shown on the Plans. ' 113-11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS The Bid and.the Bid Security guaranteeing the same shall be placed in a sealed envelope and ' marked "Project No. 41005, Street Department Maintenance Facility". IB-12 ALTERNATE BIDS iIn making he award, if alternate bids have been requested, the alternate bid which will in i g q the best interest of the City will be used. I , IB-13 WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS If a bidder wishes to withdraw his bid, he may do so before the time fixed for the opening, without prejudice to himself. No bidder may withdraw his bid for a period of ninety (90) days after the scheduled closing time for the receipt of bids. ' No bids received after the time set for opening for bids will be considered. ' IB-14 RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids,to waive any informality in the bids received, ' or to accept the bid or bids that in its judgement will be in the best interests of the City of Jefferson. ' I13-15 AWARD OF CONTRACT If, within seven (7) days after he has received notice of acceptance of his bid, the successful bidder or bidders shall refuse or neglect to come to the office of the Director of Community ' Development and to execute the Contract and to furnish the required Performance and Payment Bonds and Insurance,properly signed by the Contractor and the Surety and Sureties satisfactory to the City of Jefferson as hereinafter provided, the bidder or bidders shall be deemed to be in default and shall forfeit the deposit. IB-16 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND ' A Performance and Payment Bond in an amount equivalent to one hundred_percent (100%) of the Contract price, must be furnished and executed by-the successful bidder or bidders. A ' form for the bidders use is contained in these Contract Documents. The issuing Surety shall be a corporate Surety Company or companies of recognized standing 1 licensed to do business in the State of Missouri and acceptable to the City of Jefferson. • 1 IB-17 INDEMNIFICATION AND INSURANCE ' • The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the City from all claims and suits for loss of or damage to property, including loss of all judgments recovered therefore, and from all expense in defending said claims, or suits, including court costs, attorney fees and other expense caused by any act or omission of the Contractor and/or his subcontractors, their ' respective agents, servants or employees. The Contractor shall be required to provide the City of Jefferson with a Certificate of Insurance ' outlining the coverage provided. IB-18 BID SECURITY RETURNED TO SUCCESSFUL BIDDER Upon the execution of the Contract and approval of Bond, the Bid Security will be returned to the bidder unless the same shall have been presented for collection prior to such time, in which ' case the amount of the deposit will be refunded by the City. IB-19 NONDISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT ' Contracts for work under this bid will obligate the Contractor and subcontractors not to discriminate in employment practices. ' IB-20 PREVAILING WAGE LAW ' The principal contractor and all subcontractors shall pay not less than the prevailing wage • hourly rate for each craft or type of workman required to execute this contract as determined by the Department of Labor and Industrial Relations of Missouri, pursuant to Sections 290.210 ' through 290.340 inclusive of the Revised Statutes of Missouri, 1994 as amended. (See Determination included herewith.) IB-21 GUARANTEE ' The Contractor shall guarantee that the equipment, materials and workmanship furnished under this contract will be as specified and will be free from defects for a period of one year ' from the date of final acceptance. In addition,the equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in design. ' W ithin the guarantee period and upon notification of the Contractor by the City,the Contractor shall promptly make all needed adjustments, repairs or replacements arising out of defects which, in the judgment of the City become necessary during such period. The cost of all materials, parts, labor, transportation, supervision, special tools, and supplies required for replacement of parts, repair of parts or correction of abnormalities shall be paid by ' the Contractor or by his surety under the terms of the Bond. The Contractor also extends the terms of this guarantee to cover repaired parts and all replacement parts furnished under the guarantee provisions for a period of one year from the date of installation thereof. • If within ten days after the City gives the Contractor notice of defect, failure, or abnormality of • the work, the Contractor neglects to make, or undertake with due diligence to make, the ' necessary repairs or adjustments, the City is hereby authorized to make the repairs or adjustments itself or order the work to be done by a third parry,the costs of the work to be paid by the Contractor. 4 ' In the event of an emergency where, in the judgment of the City delays would cause serious loss or damage, repairs or adjustments may be made by the City or a third party chosen by the j ' City without giving notice to the Contractor, and the cost of the work shall be paid by the Contractor or by his surety under the terms of the Bond. IB-22 NOTICE TO PROCEED ' A written notice to begin construction work will be given to the Contractor by the City of Jefferson within ten (10) days after the Contract is approved by the City Council. The time for completion of the project shall begin to run on the date established in this notice. IB-23 WORK SCHEDULE ' To insure that the work will proceed continuously through the succeeding operations to its completion with the least possible interference to traffic and inconvenience to the public, the ' Contractor shall, at the request of the City, submit for approval a complete schedule of his proposed construction procedure,stating the sequence in which various operations of work are to be performed. IB-24 CONTRACT TIME • The contract time shall be Two Hundred Forty (240) Calendar Days. ' IB-25 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ' Liquidated damages shall be assessed at the rate of Three Hundred Dollars ($300.00) per calendar day until the work is complete,should the project not be completed within the contract time. ' IB-26 POWER OF ATTORNEY ' Attorneys-in-fact who sign bid bonds or contract bonds must file with each bond a certified and effectively dated copy of their power of attorney. ' IB-27 BID PACKET Each bid must be submitted on the prescribed forms and contain certain certifications and documentation. ? Each bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside the name of the ' bidder, the bidder's address, and the name of the project for which the bid is being submitted. If forwarded by mail, the sealed envelope containing the bid must be enclosed in another • envelope addressed as follows: 1 Purchasing Agent • City of Jefferson, MO ' 320 E. McCarty Street Jefferson City, MO 65101 ' For the convenience of bidding this project, a "BID PACKET" has been included with the project manual. This packet contains the necessary forms to be submitted with the bid proposal. The contents of this packet include the following: t . 1) BID FORM 2) BID BOND 3) ANTI-COLLUSION STATEMENT 4) CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT 5) MINORITY BUSINESS UTILIZATION AGREEMENT 1 END OF INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS • r p' �' • BID FORM Name of Bidder Verslues Construction Co. , Inc. 6919 Rocky Valley Rd. , Jefferson City, Mo 65101 Address of Bidder To: CITY OF JEFFERSON 320 East McCarty Street ' Jefferson City, Missouri 65101 THE UNDERSIGNED BIDDER, having examined the plans,specifications, regulations ' of the Contract, Special Conditions, other proposed contract documents and all addenda thereto; and being acquainted with and fully understanding (a)the extent and character of the work covered by this Bid; (b)the location, arrangement, and specified requirements for the proposed work; (c) the location, character, and condition of ' existing streets, roads, highways, railroads, pavements, surfacing, walks, driveways, curbs, gutters, trees, sewers, utilities, drainage courses, structures, and other installations, both surface and underground which may affect or be affected by the proposed work; (d) the nature and extent of the excavations to be made and the type, character, and general condition of materials to be excavated; (e) the necessary ' handling and rehandling of excavated materials; (f)the location and extent of necessary . or probable dewatering requirements; (g)the difficulties and hazards to the work which might be caused by stone and flood water; (h) local conditions relative to labor, transportation, hauling,and rail delivery facilities; and (i)all other factors and conditions affecting or which may be affected by the work. ' HEREBY PROPOSED to furnish all required materials,supplies, equipment,tools,and plant; to perform all necessary labor and supervision; and to construct; install, erect, and complete all work stipulated, required by, and in accordance with the proposed contract documents and the drawings, specifications, and other documents referred to I' therein (as altered, amended, or modified -by addenda) in the manner and time prescribed and that he will accept in full payment sums determined by applying to the quantities of the following items, the following unit prices and/or any lump sum payments provided, plus or minus any special payments and adjustments provided in a the specifications and he understands that the estimated quantities herein given are not i' guaranteed to be the exact or total quantities required for the completion of the work shown on the drawings and described in the specifications, and that increases or decreases may be made over or under the Contract estimated quantities to provide for I, needs that are determined during progress of the work and that prices bid shall apply 1 to such increased or decreased quantities as follows: • f, r PROPOSAL FORM BID TIME: 1:30 pm BID DATE: June 5, 2007 FROM: Verslues Construction CO. , Inc. 6919 Rocky Valley Rd. . Jefferson City. MO 65101 hereinafter called the"Bidder" j TO: CITY OF JEFFERSON 320 East McCarty Street Jefferson City, Missouri 65101 1 hereinafter called the"Owner" FOR: STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING CITY OF JEFFERSON Hyde Park Jefferson City, Missouri hereinafter called the "Work" �. 1. The undersigned, having examined and being familiar with the local conditions affecting the Work and with the contract documents including the drawings, the Notice to Contractors, Instruction to Bidders, Statement of Bidders Qualifications, General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements and the body of technical specifications, including addenda number 1 through 2 inclusive, as issued by the City of Jefferson, Department of Community Development, Jefferson City, ' Missouri, hereby propose to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, services; etc., required for the performance and completion of the aforementioned Work as follows: FOR BASE BID: '. The sum of fL ��T[LLO rh�2� ,J Q t- � e, ej T T '0,5rA.cAA `6 ��/ Dollars ' 2. PREVAILING WAGE LAW: The Contractor(s)agree top Pay not less than the current hourly rate of wages as determined by the Department of Labor and Industrial Relations, State of Missouri ' (Annual Wage Order No. 13). r . PROPOSAL FORM 0705A PF-1 1 3. ALTERNATES: (Reference Section 01230-Alternates for further description): State the amount to ' be added or deducted from the Base Bid if the Owner accepts any or all of the following Alternates. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all of the Alternates and to select alternates in any • order. ' ALTERNATE NO. 1 -CONCRETE SITE PAVING: ADD to the Contract, the sum of: Eiqhty-two thousand, eight hundred fifteen & 00/100 _ Dollars ($ 82,81 5.00 ). ALTERNATE NO. 2-STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF SYSTEM: ' ADD or DEDUCT from the Contract, the sum of: Thirty-seven thousand, thirty-two & 00/100 Dollars ($ 37 ,032.00 ). ALTERNATE NO. 3-EMERGENCY GENERATOR: ' ADD-to the Contract, the sum of: proeAf6i oa Dollars ($ ;74KI ' ALTERNATE NO.4-STRUCTURAL STEEL MEZZANINE FLOOR SYSTEM: ADD to the Contract, the sum of: Fifty-four thousand, seven hundred ' & 00/100 Dollars ($ 54, 700.00 ). h ALTERNATE NO. 5-DELETE INTERIOR STEEL BOLLARDS: • . DEDUCT from the Contract, the sum of: EigJit thousand, two hundred eighty-four ' & 001 /00 Dollars ($ 8, 284.00 ). ALTERNATE NO. 6-DELETE ONE METAL BUILDING SYSTEM BAY: ' DEDUCT to the Contract, the sum of: Fourty thousand, three hundred nineteen & 00/100 Dollars ($ 40, 31 9 0 0 ) ' ALTERNATE NO. 7-DELETE TWO METAL BUILDING SYSTEM BAYS: I ' DEDUCT to the Contract, the sum of:Eiqhty-six thousand, fifty-five & 00/100 Dollars ($ 86, 055.00 ). ' ALTERNATE NO. 8-BUILDING FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM: ADD to the Contract, the'sum of: Seventy-one thousand, six hundred & 001100 Dollars ($ 71 , 600'. 0 0 ). . 1 • 1 PROPOSAL FORM 0705A PF-2 ' 4. UNIT PRICES: (Reference Section 01230 — Unit Prices for further description): For changing • specified quantities of work from those indicated by the contract drawings and specifications, upon written instructions of the.Owner, the following Unit Prices shall prevail. The Unit Prices shall ' include ail labor, overhead and profit, materials, equipment, appliances, bailing, shoring, shoring removal, etc. to cover the finished work of the several kinds of work called for. Only a single Unit Price shall be given and it shall apply for either MORE or LESS work than that shown on the drawings and called for in the specifications or included in the Base Bid. In the event of more or less units than so indicated or included, Change Orders shall be issued for the increased or decreased amount. ' UNIT PRICE NO. 1: CONCRETE SIDEWALK: Forty—three & 00/100 Dollars($ 43.00 ) per square Yard. UNIT PRICE NO. 2: CONCRETE CURB &GUTTER: Twenty—eight &00/100 28.00 ' Dollars ($ ) per lineal foot. UNIT PRICE NO. 3: CONCRETE SITE PAVEMENT: .Thirty—three & 00/100 Dollars ($ 33.00 )per square yard. 5. BID BOND: Accompanying this Bid is a 5% Bid Bond, Certified Check or Cashier's Check, payable without condition to the City of Jefferson, in the amount of: r' Dollars ($ ) • which it is agreed shall be retained as liquidated damages for the delay and extra expense caused the Owner if the undersigned fails to execute the contract and.furnish the bond required by the Contract Documents. 1 .6. THE BIDDER HEREBY CERTIFIES: That this Proposal is genuine and is not made in the interest of or behalf of any undisclosed person, firm or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association or corporation; That he/she has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to put in a false or sham proposal; That he/she has not solicited or induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain from bidding; ' That he/she has not sought by collusion or otherwise to obtain for himself any advantage over any other Bidder or over the Owner; That he/she not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed, color or national origin in connection with the performance of work. I ' I • PROPOSAL FORM 0705A PF-3 I' t I _ T 1 7. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS: provide listing of subcontractors and suppliers I' intended for use on this project. • ' Name and Address Work to be Furnished or Performed Verslues Const. Concrete Paving Installation ' Verslues Const. Concrete Floor Slabs Behlen Building Systems -Metal Building System Manufacturer. I�I Verslues Const: Structural Steel Erector ' Columbia Glass Aluminum Windows &.Doors Associated Door Sectional Overhead Doors I Modern Interiors ' Gypsum Board and Ceilings • Owens & Holton Painting I Ty/�,/ TjQ(� �/LG��iJTiG� Mechanical (HVAC) ' Ken Sandbothe Plumbing Plumbing Electrical , ' '0 Emergency Generator Manufacturer ' I The Bidder hereby certifies that the above listed contractors, suppliers and equipment will be used ' in the performance of the Work. Dated this 12th of June 20 07 (day and date) (month) _ (year) PROPOSAL FORM 0705A PF-4 T 8. Each Bidder must complete the Proposal Form by signing in the proper signature line below and by ' supplying the required information called for in connection with the signature. The information called for is necessary in the proper preparation of the Contract and Performance Bond. IF AN INDIVIDUAL: Name of Individual Firm Name(if any) 1 Telephone Number Address for Communications Signature Address for Communications 1 ' IF A PARTNERSHIP: ' Name of Partnership Address for Communications ' Name of Partner Address for Communications Name of Partner(2) Residence Address 1 Telephone Number Residence Address Federal Tax I.D. Number Residence Address (2) ' Signature of Either Partner Residence Address 2 9 ( ) ' (State names and Residence addresses of all Partners) 1 • 1 PROPOSAL FORM 0705A PF-5 T sIF A CORPORATION: ' Verslues Construction Co. , Inc. 6919 Rocky Valley Rd. Name of Corporation Address for Communications ' 573-395-4323 Jefferson City, MO 65101 Telephone Number Address for Communications ' . 43-1714617 Missouri Federal-Tax`I-.D. Number Incorporated under the laws of the State of Edith Verslues, President 00412332 ' Name and Title of Office Corporate License Number (If a corporation organized in a state other than I ' Signature of Officer Missouri, attach Certificate of Authority to do $ Business in the State of Missouri) ' (Attest Seal) Secretary y • PROPOSAL FORM 0705A PF-6 SUBCONTRACTORS - ' If the Bidder intends to use any subcontractors in the course of the construction, he shall list them. TIME OF COMPLETION The undersigned hereby agrees to complete the project within Two Hundred Forty (240)Calendar Days, subject to the stipulations of the regulations of the Contract and ' the Special Provisions. It is understood and agreed that if this bid is accepted,the prices quoted above include ' all applicable state taxes and that said taxes shall be paid by the Contractor. The undersigned, as Bidder, hereby declares that the only persons or firms interested ' in the bid as principal or principals is or are named herein,and that no other persons or firms than._herein mentioned have any interest in this bid or in the Contract to be entered into; and this bid is made without connection with any other person, company, ' or parties making a bid; and that it is in all respects fair and in good faith, without collusion or fraud. The undersigned agrees that the accompanying bid deposit shall become the property of the Owner, should he fail or refuse to execute the Contract or furnish Bond as called for in the specifications within the time provided. ' mailed, or delivered to the If written notice of the acceptance of this bid is ma d, undersigned within sixty (60). days after the date of opening of bids, or any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days after the date of such mailing, telegraphing, or delivering of such notice, execute and deliver a Contract in the form of Contract attached. The undersigned hereby designates as his office to which such notice of acceptance may be mailed, telegraphed, or delivered: It is understood and agreed that this bid may be withdrawn at any time prior to the scheduled time for the opening of bids or any authorized postponement thereof. Attached hereto is a Bid Bond for the sum of Dollars (cashier's check), make payable to the City of Jefferson. ' Signature of Bidder: • If an individual, , doing business ' as If a partnership, ,member of firm. by ' If corporation, Verslues Construction Co. , Inc. by11� Y.P.l,1� 1 Title President ' SEAL 1 Business Address of Bidder 6919 Rocky Valley Rd. , Jefferson City, MO 651 01 If Bidder is a corporation, supply the following information: State in which incorporated Missouri Name and Address of its: 1 President Edith Verslues 6919 Rocky Valley Rd. , Jefferson City, MO 6510 1 Secretary Dennis Verslues 6919 Rocky Valley Rd. , Jefferson City, MO 6510' 1 Date 06-12-07 1 i • 1 1 E� • 81D SOND f, KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the u n d e r i g n e d, verslue Construction C ,fin_C,_._ ------as Principal, and First National Insurance Canpany of America as Surety, are hereby held and firmly ' bound unto the CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI , as owner, in the penal sum of Five Percent of the Bid A==- - - - - - - -57 a.:.—for 1he payment of which, well and ' truly to be made, we*hereby joiritly and severalty bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators,.successors,.andewigns,this S 4ay-of June 200 ' The condition of the above obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to the CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI a certain Bid, attached hereto and hereby made a part hereofto enter into a contract in writing,for the project entitled: ' "Project No.41005, Street Department'Maintenance faaffiW' NOW, THEREFORE, Ia If said Bid shall be rejected, or lathe altemate, (b). If said Bid.shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the .Form of Contract attached hereto,(properly completed in accordance with said Bid) and shall fumish a bond for his faithful performance of said contract, and for.the payment of all persons performing. labor or • furnishing materials in connection therewith, shall in all other respects perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Suretyfor any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated. The Surety,for value received,hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety:and its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by the extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid;and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such' extension. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Principal and the Surety have.hereunto set their hands and seals,and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers,the day and year first set forth above. Verslues Construction Company, Inc. PrinapaJ SEAL By. 9/ First National Insurance Canpany of America Surety By H. Williams, Attorney-irrFact T FAS A F E C a POWER FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA OF ATTORNEY PO BOX 34526 ' FIRST NATIONAL SURETY SEATTLE,WA 98124-1526 PO BOX 34526 �ATTLE,WA 98124-1526 No. 13028 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: That FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA,a Washington corporation,does hereby appoint H.WILLIAMS;TERRY A.BLICKHAN;Quincy. ,1 ' its true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact,with full authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds or undertakings and other documents of a similar character issued by the.company in the course of its business, and to bind FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA thereby as fully as if such instruments had been duly executed by its regularly elected officers at its home office. ' IN WITNESS WHEREOF,FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA has executed and attested these presents f this 22nd day of November 2004 ' L ' CHRISTINE MEAD,SECRETARY MIKE MCGAVICK,PRESIDENT CERTIFICATE ' Extract from the By-Laws of FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA: "Article V,Section 13.-FIDELITY AND SURETY BONDS...the President,any Vice President,the Secretary,and any Assistant Vice President appointed for that ' purpose by the officer in charge of surety operations, shall each have authority to appoint individuals as attorneys-in-fact or under other appropriate titles with thority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds and other documents of similar character issued by the company in the course of its iness.,.On any instrument making or evidencing such appointment,the signatures may be affixed by facsimile. On any instrument conferring such authority or any bond or undertaking of the company,the seal,or a facsimile thereof,may be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced; provided,however, that the seal shall not be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking." ' Extract from a Resolution of the Board of Directors of FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28, 1970. "On any certificate executed by the Secretary or an assistant secretary of the Company setting out, ' (i) The provisions of Article V.Section 13 of the By-Laws,and (ii) A copy of the power-of-attorney appointment,executed pursuant thereto,and (iii) Certifying that said power-of-attorney appointment is in full force and effect, the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile,and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof." ' I, Christine Mead,.Secretary of FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, do hereby certify that the foregoing extracts of the By-Laws and of a Resolution of the Board of Directors of this corporation, and of a Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct,and that both the By-Laws,the Resolution and the Power of Attorney are still in full force and effect. ' IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of said corporation this 5th day of June 2007 1 1 o'Ap CC SEAL ' isze X16 OP WA • * CHRISTINE MEAD,SECRETARY S-1049/FNEF 7198 (D A registered trademark of SAFECO Corporation ' 11/222004 PDF ' ANTI-COLLUSION STATEMENT • ' STATE OF Missouri ) ' COUNTY OF 0sac;e ) tEdith A. Verslues being first duly swom, deposes and says that he is President of TITLE OF PERSON SIGNING Verslues Construction Co. , Inc. NAME OF BIDDER that all statements made and facts set out in the bid for the above project_are true and . correct; and that the bidder (the person, firm, association, or corporation making said C bid)has not, either directly or indirectly,entered into any agreement,.participated in any collusion, or-otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding in connection with such bid of any contract which result from its acceptance. Affiant further certifies that bidder is not financially interested in, or financially affiliated • with, any other bidder for the above project. (BY) -nj� (BY) ' Swom to before me this /c�-- day of 70 IJ , 2007— .— NOTARY PUBLIC ' LEON P.LEHMEN Notary Public-Notary seal STATE OF MISSOURI County of Osage 6 _ �� my commission Expires 6/15/2009 My commission expires: g Ca mission#o5469875 • T CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT This affidavit is hereby made a part of the Bid, and an executed copy thereof shall accompany each Bid submitted. STATE OF Missouri ) ) ss i COUNTY OFosacre ) The undersigned, Edith A. Verslues I w u of lawful age, being first duly sworn states on oath that he is s s e p ' President of t Verslues Construction Co. , Inc. the contractor submitting t h e attached ach ed bi d, t hat he knows of his own knowledge and states it to be a fact that neither said bid nor the computation upon which it is based ' include any amount of monies, estimate or allowance representing wages, moneys or expenses, however designated, proposed to be paid to persons who are not required to furnish material or actually perform services upon or as a part of the proposed project. 1 AFFIANT Subscribed and sworn to before me, a Notary Public, in and for the County and State aforesaid, this day of 2:d 0 •1- -5200 -7 1 NOTARY PUBLIC LEON P.LEHMEN Notary Public-Notary Seal STATE OF MISSOURI County of Osage My Commission Expires: My Commission Expires 6115/2009 Commission#05469875 • f ' MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE STATEMENT �1 Contractors bidding on City contracts shall take the following affirmative steps to assure that small, women owned, and minority business are utilized when possible as sources of suppliers, services, and construction items. �1 1. Contractor's will submit the names and other information if any, about their MBE sub=contractors-alorrg-with their-bid submissions. ,1 2. Sufficient and reasonable efforts will be made to use qualified MBE sub- contractors when possible on City contracts. 1 3. Qualified small, women owned, and minority business will be included on solicitation lists as sub-contractors for City supplies, services, and construction. ' 4. . Qualified small, women owned, and minority business will be solicited whenever they are potential sources. 1 5. When economically feasible, Contractors will divide total requirements into smaller tasks or quantities so as to permit maximum small, women owned, and minority business participation. 1 6. Where the require m ent permits, Co ntractor will establish delivery schedules which will encourage participation by small, women owned and minority 1 businesses. 1 7. Contractor will use the services and assistance of the Small Business Administration, the Office of Minority Business Enterprise, and the Community Services Administration. 1 8. Forms for determining Minority Business Enterprise eligibility may be obtained from the Department of Public Works. 1 i � 1 1 • � 1 � 1 MINORITY BUSINESS UTILIZATION AGREEMENT ' A. The bidder agrees to attempt to expend at least two (2) % of the contract, if awarded,for Minority Business Enterprise (MBE). For purposes of this goal,the ' term "Minority Business Enterprise" shall mean a business: .1. Which is at least 51 percent owned by one or more minorities or women, ' or, in the case of a publicly owned business, at least 51 percent of the stock of which is owned by one or more minorities or women; and ' 2. Whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more such individuals. "Minority Group Member" or"Minority" means a person who is a citizen or lawful permanent resident of the United .States, and who is: 1. Black (a person having origins in any of the black racial groups of Africa); 2. Hispanic (a person of Spanish or Portuguese culture with origins in ' Mexico, South or Central America, or the Caribbean Island, regardless of race); ' 3. Asian American (a person having origins in any of the original peoples of • the Far East, Southeast Asia, the Indian sub-continent, or the Pacific Islands); 4. American Indians and Alaskan Native (a person having origins in any of ' the original peoples of North America); 5. Member of other groups, or other individuals, found to be economically and socially disadvantaged by the Small Business Administration under Section 8(a) of the Small Business Act, as amended [15 U.S.C. 637(a)]. ' 6. A female person who requests to be considered as an MBE, and who "owns" and "controls" a business as defined herein. Minority Business Enterprises maybe employed as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers. • 1 i ' B. The bidder must indicate the Minority Business Enterprise(s) proposed for utilization as part of this contract as follows: ' Name and Addresses Nature of Dollar Value of of Minority Firms Participation Participation ' Verslues Const. General Contractor 1 .V Total Bid Amount: -�.Q O Total: Z ect d 1 Percentage of Minority Enterprise Participation: t4 a % �- ' C. The bidder agrees to certify that the minority firm(s) engaged to provide materials or services in the completion of this project: (a) is a bona fide Minority Business Enterprise; and(b)has executed a binding contract to provide specific materials or services for a specific dollar amount. A roster of bona fide Minority Business Enterprise firms will be furnished bythe ' • City of Jefferson. The bidder will provide written notice to the Liaison Officer of the City of Jefferson indicating the Minority Business Enterpdse(s) it intends to use in conjunction with this contract. This written notice is due five days after ' notification to the lowest bidder. Certification that the Minority Business Enterprise(s) has executed a binding contract with the bidder for materials or services should be provided to the MBE Coordinator at the time the bidder's contract is submitted to the MBE Coordinator. 1, undersigned y D. The hereb certified that he or she has read the terms of this agreement and is authorized to bind the bidder to the agreement herein set !' forth. Edith Verslues NAME F AUTHORIZED OFFICER DATE 06-12-07 SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED OFFICER 1 • II �' �1 f !, AFFIDAVIT ' COMPLIANCE WITH PREVAILING ' WAGE LAW Before me, the undersigned Notary Public, in and for the County of , �t State of , personally came and appeared NAME POSITION of the NAME OF COMPANY (A corporation)(a partnership) (a proprietorship)and after being duly sworn did depose and say that all provisions and requirements set out in Chapter 290, Section 290.210 through and including 2.90.340, Missouri Revised Statutes, pertaining to the payment of wages to workmen employed on public works projects have been fully satisfied and there has been no exception to the full and complete compliance with said provisions ' and requirements and with Annual Wage Order No. 14, Section 026, Cole County in carrying out the contract and work in connection with Project No. 41005, Street Department Maintenance Facility located at Jefferson City in �' • Cole Count Missouri and completed on the day of , 20 - Y� � P Y SIGNATURE Subscribed and sworn to me this day of , 20 ' NOTARY PUBLIC My commission expires: STATE OF MISSOURI ) ss COUNTY OF ) f' • Missouri Division of Labor Standards �iWAGE AND HOUR SECTION V1 a Lf . l7 .oP�u s�vxcM� 0� «<Xx ' MATT BLUNT, Governor Annual Wage Order No. 14 1 � Section 026 ' COLE COUNTY In accordance with Section 290.262 RSMo 2000, within thirty (30) days after a certified copy of this 1 Annual Wage Order has been filed with the Secretary of State as indicated below, any person who may be affected by this Annual Wage Order may object by filing an objection in triplicate with the Labor and Industrial Relations Commission, P.O. Box 599, Jefferson City, MO 65102-0599. Such objections must ' set forth in writing the specific grounds of objection. Each objection shall.certify that a copy has been furnished to the Division of Labor Standards, P.O. Box 449, Jefferson City,MO 65102-0449 pursuant to 8 CSR 20-5.010(1). A certified copy of the Annual Wage Order has been filed with the Secretary of ' State of Missouri. 1 Original-Si ng ed by Allen E. Dillingham, Director Division of Labor Standards 1 This Is A True And Accurate Copy Which Was Filed With The Secretary of State: March 9,2007 ' Last Date Objections May Be Filed: April 9,2007 • Prepared by Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations 1 1 Building Construction Rates for Section 026 ' COLE County -Effective Basic Over- OCCUPATIONAL TITLE Date of Hourly Time Holiday Total Fringe Benefits Increase Rates Schedule Schedule Asbestos Worker $26.44 55 60 $13.66 Boilermaker $28.49 57 7 $18.62 ' -Bricklayers-Stone Mason $26.06 59 7 $10.71 Carpenter $22.18 60 15 $9.77 Cement Mason $21.59 9 3 $9.70 ' Electrician Inside Wireman $27.21 28 7 $10.69+ 13% Communication Technician USE ELECTRICIAN INSIDE WIREMAN RATE Elevator Constructor a $37.115 26 54 $16.23 Operating Engineer ' Group 1 $24.62 86 66 $15.40 -Group II 1 $24.62 86 66 $15.40 -Group III $23.37 86 66 $15.40 ' -Group III-A $24.62 86 1 66 $15.40 -Group IV $22.39 86 66 $15.40 Group V $25.32 86 66 $15.40 Pipe Fitter b $31.25 91 69 $18.18 ' Glazier $15.00 FED $1.42 Laborer(Building): General $18.37 110 7 $8.99 First Semi-Skilled $20.37 110 7 $8.99 ' Second Semi-Skilled $19.371 110 1 7 $8.99 Lather USE CARPENTER RATE Linoleum Layer&Cutter USE CARPENTER RATE ' Marble Mason $26.06 59 7 $10.71 • Millwright $23.18 60 15 $9.77 Iron Worker $23.57 11 8 $15.04 Painter $20.25 18 7 $7.82 ' Plasterer $20.61 94 5 $9.49 Plumber $22.00 FED $3.31 Pile Driver $23.18 60 15 $9.77 Roofer $25.25 12 4 $9.84 ' Sheet Metal Worker $25.55 40 23 $11.18 Sprinkler Fitter $16.00 FED $2.55 Terrazzo Worker $26.06 59 7 $10.71 ' Tile Setter $26.06 59 7 $10.71 Truck Driver-Teamster -Group 1 $21.15 101 5 $8.00 -Group II $21.85 101 5 $8.00 ' -Group III $21.55 101 5 $8.00 Group IV $21.85 101 5 $8.00 Traffic Control Service Driver lWelders-Acetylene&Electric ' Fringe Benefit Percentage is of the Basic Hourly Rate Attention Workers: If you are not being paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits contact the Division ' of Labor Standards at(573)751-3403. 'SEE FOOTNOTE PAGE ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14 3/07 ' 1 Building Construction Rates for Section 026 COLE County Footnotes I' Effective basic Over- OCCUPATIONAL TITLE Date of Hourly Time Holiday Total Fringe Benefits Increase Rates Schedule Schedule Welders receive rate prescribed for the occupational title performing operation to which welding is incidental. Use Building Construction Rates on Building(s)and All Immediate Attachments.Use Heavy Construction ' rates for remainder of project. For the occupational titles not listed in Heavy Construction Sheets,.use Rates shown on Building Construction Rate Sheet., a-Vacation: Employees over 5 years-8%; Employees under 5 years-6% b- All work over$3.5 Million Total Mechanical Contract-$31.25,Fringes-$18.18 I All work under$3.5 Million Total Mechanical Contract-$29.91,Fringes-$14.08 1 • ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO.14 3/07 COLE COUNTY ' OVERTIME SCHEDULE-BUILDING CONSTRUCTION • FED: Minimum requirement per Fair Labor Standards Act means time and one-half(1 %2)shall be paid for all work in excess ' of forty(40)hours per work week. NO.9: Means the regular workday starting time of 8:00 a.m.(and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.)may be moved forward to , 6:00 a.m. or delayed one hour to 9:00 a.m. All work performed in excess of the regular work day and on Saturday shall be compensated at one and one-half(1'/�) times the regular pay. In the event time is lost during the work week due to weather conditions,the Employer may schedule work on the following Saturday at straight time. All work accomplished on Sunday and holidays shall be compensated for at double the regular rate of wages. The work week shall be Monday through Friday,except for ' midweek holidays. NO. 11: Means eight(8)hours shall constitute a day's work,with the starting time to be established between 6:00 a.m.and 8:00 a.m.from Monday to Friday. Time and one-half(1%)shall be paid for first two(2)hours of overtime Monday through Friday and , the first eight(8) hours on Saturday. All other overtime hours Monday through Saturday shall be paid at double(2)time rate. Double(2)time shall be paid for all time on Sunday and recognized holidays or the days observed in lieu of these holidays. NO. 12: Means the work week shall commence on Monday at 12:01 a.m. and shall continue through the following Friday, ' inclusive of each week. All work performed by employees anywhere in excess of forty(40)hours in one(1)work week,shall be paid for at the rate of one and one-half(1%2)times the regular hourly wage scale. All work performed within the regular working hours which shall consist of a ten(10)hour work day except in emergency situations. Overtime work and Saturday work shall be ' paid at one and one-half(1%2)times the regular hourly rate. Work on recognized holidays and Sundays shall be paid at two(2) times the regular hourly rate. NO. 18: Means the regular work day shall be eight(8)hours. Working hours are from six(6)hours before Noon(12:00)to six ' (6)hours after Noon(12:00). The regular work week shall be forty(40)hours,beginning between 6:00 a.m.and 12:00 Noon on Monday and ending between 1:00 p.m. and 6:00 p.m. on Friday. Saturday will be paid at time and one-half(1%2). Sunday and Holidays shall be paid at double(2)time. Saturday can be a make-up day if the weather has forced a day off,but only in the week ' of the day being lost. Any time before six (6)hours before Noon or six(6)hours after Noon will be paid at time and one-half • (1%2). NO. 26: Means that the regular working day shall consist of eight(8)hours worked between 6:00 a.m.,and 5:00 p.m., five(5) ' days per week,Monday to Friday,inclusive.Hours of work at each jobsite shall be those established by the general contractor and worked by the majority of trades. (The above working hours may be changed by mutual agreement). Work performed on Construction Work on Saturdays, Sundays and before and after the regular working day on Monday to Friday,inclusive,shall be classified as overtime,and paid for at double(2)the rate of single time. The employer may establish hours worked on a jobsite for , a four(4)ten(10)hour day work week at straight time pay for construction work,the regular working day shall consist of ten(10) hours worked consecutively,between 6:00 a.m.and 6:00 p.m.,four(4)days per week,Monday to Thursday,inclusive. Any work performed on Friday,Saturday,Sunday and holidays,and before and after the regular working day on Monday to Thursday where ' a four(4)ten(10)hour day workweek has been established,will be paid at two times(2)the single time rate of pay. The rate of pay for all work performed on holidays shall be at two times(2)the single time rate of pay. I • ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14 ' A W 14 026 OT.doc Page 1 of 4 Pages ' COLE COUNTY OVERTIME SCHEDULE-BUILDING CONSTRUCTION • NO. 28: Means a regular workday shall consist of eight (8) hours between 7:00 a.m. and 5:30 p.m., with at least a thirty(30) minute period to be taken for lunch. Five(5)days a week,Monday through Friday inclusive,shall constitute a work week. The Employer has the option for a workday/workweek of four(4)ten(10)hour days(4-10's)provided: -The project must be for a minimum of four(4)consecutive days. -Starting time may be within one(1)hour either side of 8:00 a.m. -Work week must begin on either a Monday or Tuesday: If a holiday falls within that week it shall be a consecutive work day. (Alternate: If a holiday falls in the middle of a week, then the regular eight (8) hour schedule may be implemented). -Any time worked in excess of any ten(10)hour work day(in a 4-10 hour work week)shall be at the appropriate overtime rate. All work outside of the regular working hours as provided,Monday through Saturday,shall be paid at one&one-half(1%2)times the employee's regular rate of pay. All work performed from 12:00 a.m.Sunday through 8:00 a.m. Monday and recognized holidays shall be paid at double(2)the straight time hourly rate of pay. Should employees work in excess of twelve(12) consecutive hours they shall be paid double time(2X)for all time after twelve(12)hours. Shift work performed between the hours of 4:30 p.m.and 12:30 a.m.(second shift)shall receive eight(8)hours pay at the regular hourly rate of pay plus ten(10%) percent for seven and one-half(7%2)hours work. Shift work performed between the hours of 12:30 a.m.and 8:00 a.m.(third shift) shall receive eight(8)hours pay at the regular hourly rate of pay plus fifteen(15%)percent for seven(7)hours work. A lunch j period of thirty(30)minutes shall be allowed on each shift. All overtime work required after the completion of a regular shift shall { be paid at one and one-half(1%z)times the shift hourly rate. 110.40: Means the regular working week shall consist of five(3)consecutive(8)hour days'labor on the job beginning with Monday and ending with Friday of each week. Four(4) 10-hour days may constitute the regular work week. The regular working day shall consist of eight(8)hours labor on the job beginning as early as 7:00 a.m.and ending as late as 5:30 p.m. All full or part time labor performed during such hours shall be recognized as regular working hours and paid for at the regular hourly rate. All hours worked on Saturday and all hours worked in excess of eight(8)hours but not more than twelve(12)hours during the regular • working week shall be paid for at time and one-half(1'/�)the regular hourly rate. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays and all hours worked in excess of twelve(12)hours during the regular working day shall be paid at two(2)times the regular hourly rate. In the event of rain,snow,cold or excessively windy weather on a regular working day,Saturday may be designated as a"make-up"day. Saturday may also be designated as a"make-up"day,for an employee who has missed a day of work for personal or other reasons. Pay for"make-up"days shall be at regular rates. NO.55: Means the regular work day shall be eight(8) hours between 6:00 a.m. and 4:30 p.m. The first two(2)hours of work performed in excess of the eight(8)hour work day, Monday through Friday, and the first ten(10) hours of work on Saturday, shall be paid at one&one-half(1'/2)times the straight time rate. All work performed on Sunday,observed holidays and in excess of ten(10)hours a day,Monday through Saturday,shall be paid at double(2)the straight time rate. NO.57: Means eight(8)hours per day shall constitute a day's work and forty(40)hours per week,Monday through Friday,shall constitute a week's work. The regular starting time shall be 8:00 a.m. The above may be changed by mutual consent of authorized personnel. When circumstances warrant,the Employer may change the regular workweek to four(4)ten-hour days at ' the regular time rate of pay. It being understood that all other pertinent information must be adjusted accordingly. All time worked before and after the established workday of eight(8)hours,Monday through Friday,all time worked on Saturday,shall be paid at the rate of time and one-half(1%2) except in cases where work is part of an employee's regular Friday shift. All time worked on Sunday and recognized holidays shall be paid at the double(2)time rate of pay. I , ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14 AW 14 026 OT.doc Page 2 of 4 Pages COLE COUNTY ' OVERTIME SCHEDULE-BUILDING CONSTRUCTION NO.59: Means that except as herein provided,eight(8)hours a day shall constitute a standard work day,and forty(40)hours per • week shall constitute a week's work. All time worked outside of the standard eight(8) hour work day and on Saturday shall be classified as overtime and paid the rate of time and one-half(1'/�). All time worked on Sunday and holidays shall be classified as overtime and paid at the rate of double(2)time. The Employer has the option of working either five(5)eight hour days or four (4) ten hour days to constitute a normal forty (40) hour work week. When the four (4) ten-hour work week is in effect, the standard work day shall be consecutive ten(10)hour periods between the hours of 6:30 a.m.and 6:30 p.m. Forty(40)hours per week shall constitute a weeks work,Monday through Thursday,inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control,then Friday and/or Saturday may,at the option of the Employer,be worked as a make-up day;straight time not to exceed ten (10)hours or forty(40)hours per week. When the five day(8) hour work week is in effect,forty(40)hours per week shall constitute a week's work, Monday through Friday, inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control, then Saturday may,at the option of the Employer, be worked as a make-up day; straight time not to exceed eight(8)hours or forty(40)hours per week. The regular starting time(and resulting quitting time)may be moved to 6:00 a.m.or , delayed to 9:00 a.m. Make-up days shall not be utilized for days lost due to holidays. NO.60: Means the Employer shall have the option of working five 8-hour days or four 10-hour days Monday through Friday. If an Employer elects to work five 8-hour days during any work week,hours worked more than eight(8)per day or forty(40)per ' week shall be paid at time and one-half(1'/z)the hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits Monday through Friday. SATURDAY MAKE-UP DAY: If an Employer is prevented from working forty(40) hours, Monday through Friday, or any part thereof by reason of inclement weather(rain or mud),Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. It is agreed by the parties that the make-up day is not to be used to make up time lost due to recognized holidays. If an Employer ' elects to work four 10-how days,between the hours of 6:30 a.m.and 6:30 p.m. in any week,work performed more than ten(10) hours per day or forty (40) hours per week shall be paid at time and one half(1%) the hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits Monday through Friday. If an Employer is working 10-hour days and loses a day due to inclement weather, the Employer may work ten(10)hours on Friday at straight time. Friday must be scheduled for no more than ten(10)hours at the straight time rate, ' but all hours worked over the forty(40)hours Monday through Friday will be paid at time and one-half(1%2)the hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits. All Millwright work performed in excess of the regular work day and on Saturday shall be compensated for at time and one-half (I%z)the regular Millwright hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits. The regular work day starting of 8:00 a.m. , (and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.) may be moved forward to 6:00 a.m. or delayed one(1) hour to 9:00 a.m. All work • accomplished on Sundays and recognized holidays,or days observed as recognized holidays,shall be compensated for at double (2) the regular hourly rate of wages plus fringe benefits. NOTE: All overtime is computed on the hourly wage rate plus an amount equal to the fringe benefits. NO.86: Means the regular work week shall consist of five(5)days,Monday through Friday,beginning at 8:00 a.m.and ending at 4:30 p.m. The regular work day beginning time may be advanced one or two hours or delayed by one hour. However, the Employer may have the option to schedule his work week from Monday through Thursday at ten(10)hours per day at the straight ' time rate of pay with all hours in excess of ten (10) hours in any one day to be at the applicable overtime rate. If the Employer elects to work from Monday through Thursday and is stopped due to circumstances beyond his control, inclement weather or holiday,he shall have the option to work Friday at the straight time rate of pay to complete his forty(40)hours. If an employee , declines to work Friday as a make-up day, he shall not be penalized.All overtime work performed on Monday through Saturday shall be paid at time and one-half(1%z)of the hourly rate plus an amount equal to one-half(%z)of the hourly Total Indicated Fringe Benefits. All work performed on Sundays and recognized holidays shall be paid at double(2) the hourly rate plus an amount equal to the hourly Total Indicated Fringe Benefits. ' NO.91: Means eight(8)hours shall constitute a day's work commencing at 8:00 a.m.and ending at 4:30 p.m.,allowing one-half (%2)hour for lunch. The option exists for the Employer to use a flexible starting time between the hours of 6:00 a.m.and 9:00 a.m. The regular workweek shall consist of forty(40)hours of five(5)workdays,Monday through Friday. The workweek may consist ' of four(4)ten(10)hour days from Monday through Thursday,with Friday as a make-up day. If the make-up day is a holiday,the employee shall be paid at the double(2)time rate. The employees shall be paid time and one-half(1%z)for work performed before the regular starting time or after the regular quitting time or over eight(8)hours per work day (unless working a 10-hour work day, then time and one-half(1%2) is paid for work performed over ten(10)hours a day)or over forty(40)hours per work week. Work performed on Saturdays,Sundays and recognized holidays shall be paid at the double(2)time rate of pay. • ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO.14 AW 14 026 OT.doc Page 3 of 4 Pages 1 ' COLE COUNTY OVERTIME SCHEDULE-BUILDING CONSTRUCTION NO.94: Means eight(8)hours shall constitute a days work between the hours of 8:00 a.m.and 5:00 p.m. The regular workday ' starting time of 8:00 a.m.(and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.)may be moved forward to 6:00 a.m.or delayed one(1)hour to 9:00 a.m. All work performed in excess of the regular work day and on Saturday shall be compensated at one and one-half(1'/z) times the regular pay. In the event time is lost during the work week due to weather conditions,the Employer may schedule work on the following Saturday at straight time. All work accomplished on Sunday and holidays shall be compensated at double the regular rate of wages. NO. 101: Means that except as provided below,eight(8)hours a day shall constitute a standard work day,and forty(40)hours per ' week shall constitute a week's work,which shall begin on Monday and end on Friday. All time worked outside of the standard work day and on Saturday shall be classified as overtime and paid the rate of time and one-half(1'/z)(except as herein provided). All time worked on Sunday and recognized holidays shall be classified as overtime and paid at the rate of double (2)time. The regular starting time of 8:00 a.m.(and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.)may be moved forward to 6:00 a.m.or delayed one(1)hour to ' 9:00 a.m. The Employer has the option of working either five(5)eight-hour days or four(4)ten-hour days to constitute a normal forty(40)hour work week. When a four(4)ten-hour day work week is in effect,the standard work day shall be consecutive ten (10)hour periods between the hours of 6:30 a.m.and 6:30 p.m. Forty(40)hours per week shall constitute a week's work Monday ' through Thursday,inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control,then Friday and/or Saturday may, at the option of the Employer,be worked as a make-up day; straight time not to exceed ten(10)hours per day or forty(40) hours per week. Starting time will be designated by the employer. When the five(5)day eight(8)hour work week is in effect,forty (40)hours per week shall constitute a week's work,Monday through Friday,inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason ' beyond the Employer's control,then Saturday may,at the option of the Employer,be worked as a make-up day;straight time not to exceed eight(8)hours per day or forty(40)hours per week. Make-up days shall not be utilized for days lost due to holidays. NO. 110: Means eight(8)hours between the hours of 8:00 a.m.and 4:30 p.m.shall constitute a work day. The starting time may ' be advanced one(1)or two(2)hours. Employees shall have a lunch period of thirty(30)minutes. The Employer may provide a lunch period of one(1)hour, and in that event, the workday shall commence at 8:00 a.m. and end at 5:00 p.m. The workweek shall commence at 8:00 a.m. on Monday and shall end at 4:30 p.m. on Friday(or 5:00 p.m. on Friday if the Employer grants a t lunch period of one(1)hour), or as adjusted by starting time change as stated above. All work performed before 8:00 a.m. and • after 4:30 p.m.(or 5:00 p.m.where one(1)hour lunch is granted for lunch)or as adjusted by starting time change as stated above or on Saturday,except as herein provided,shall be compensated at one and one-half(1%z)times the regular hourly rate of pay for the work performed. All work performed on Sunday and on recognized holidays shall be compensated at double(2)the regular ' hourly rate of pay for the work performed. If an Employer is prevented from working forty(40)hours,Monday through Friday,or any part thereof by reason of inclement weather(rain and mud),Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. The Employer shall have the option of working five eight(8)hour days or four ten(10)hour days Monday through Friday. If an Employer elects to work five(5)eight(8)hour days during any work week,hours worked more than eight ' (8) per day or forty(40)hours per week shall be paid at time and one-half(1%s)the hourly rate Monday through Friday. If an Employer elects to work four(4)ten(10)hour days in any week,work performed more than ten(10)hours per day or forty(40) hours per week shall be paid at time and one-half(1'/z)the hourly rate Monday through Friday. If an Employer is working ten(10) ' hour days and loses a day due to inclement weather, they may work ten (10) hours Friday at straight time. Friday must be scheduled for at least eight(8)hours and no more than ten(10)hours at the straight time rate,but all hours worked over the forty (40)hours Monday through Friday will be paid at time and one-half(1'/z)overtime rate. 1 • ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14 AW 14 116 OT.doc Page 4 of 4 Pages 1 COLE COUNTY ' HOLIDAY SCHEDULE-BUILDING CONSTRUCTION NO.3:All work done on New Year's Day,Decoration Day,July 4th,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day and • Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. Whenever any such holidays fall on a Sunday,the following ' Monday shall be observed as a holiday. NO.4:All work done on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Thanksgiving and Christmas Day ' shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. If any of the above holidays fall on Sunday,Monday will be observed as the recognized holiday. If any of the above holidays fall on Saturday,Friday will be observed as the recognized holiday. NO.5: All work that shall be done on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Fourth of July,Labor Day,Veteran's Day, ' Thanksgiving Day,and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double(2)time rate of pay. NO.7:All work done on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. If a holiday falls on a Sunday,it shall be observed on the , following Monday. If a holiday falls on a Saturday,it shall be observed on the preceding Friday. NO.8:All work performed on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving ' Day,and Christmas Day,or the days observed in lieu of these holidays,shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. NO.15:All work accomplished on the recognized holidays of New Year's Day,Decoration Day(Memorial Day),Independence Day(Fourth of July),Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day,or days observed as these named holidays,shall be compensated for at double(2)the regular hourly rate of wages plus fringe benefits. If a holiday falls on Saturday,it shall be observed on the preceding Friday. If a holiday falls on a Sunday,it shall be observed on the following Monday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day,Christmas Day,Decoration Day or Independence Day except to preserve life or property. ' NO.23:All work done on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day and Sundays shall be recognized holidays and shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When a holiday falls on Sunday,the following Monday shall be considered a holiday. ' NO.54:All work performed on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving • Day,the Friday after Thanksgiving Day,and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double(2)time rate of pay. When a holiday ' falls on Saturday,it shall be observed on Friday. When a holiday falls on Sunday,it shall be observed on Monday. NO.60: All work performed on New Year's Day,Armistice Day(Veteran's Day),Decoration Day(Memorial Day), Independence Day(Fourth of July),Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. No ' work shall be performed on Labor Day except when triple(3)time is paid. When a holiday falls on Saturday,Friday will be observed as the holiday. When a holiday falls on Sunday,the following Monday shall be observed as the holiday. NO.66: All work performed on Sundays and the following recognized holidays,or the days observed as such,of New Year's , Day,Decoration Day,Fourth of July,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day,shall be paid at double (2)the hourly rate plus an amount equal to the hourly Total Indicated Fringe Benefits. Whenever any such holidays fall on a Sunday,the following Monday shall be observed as a holiday. NO.69: All work performed on New Year's Day,Decoration Day,July Fourth,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day ' or Christmas Day shall be compensated at double(2)their straight-time hourly rate of pay. Friday after Thanksgiving and the day before Christmas will also be holidays,but if the employer chooses to work these days,the employee will be paid at straight ' -time rate of pay. If a holiday falls on a Sunday in a particular year,the holiday will be observed on the following Monday. • ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14 ' AW014 026 BHol.doc Pagel of 1 Page Heavy Construction Rates for Section 026 COLE County *Effective Basic Over- OCCUPATIONAL TITLE Date of Hourly _ Time Holiday Total Fringe Benefits Increase Rates Schedule Schedule CARPENTER Journeymen $26.18 7 16 1 $9.49 Millwright $26.18 7 16 $9.49 Pile Driver Worker $26.18 7 16 $9.49 OPERATING ENGINEER - Group 1 $23.70 21 5 $15.31 1 Group II $23.35 21 5 $15.31 Group III $23.15 21 5 $15.31 Group IV $19.50 21 5 $15.31 1 Oiler-Driver $19.50 21 5 $15.31 LABORER tGeneral Laborer $22.52 2 4 $8.13 killed Laborer $23.12 2 4 $8.13 TRUCK DRIVER-TEAMSTER Group 1 $24.27 22 19 $8.00 Group II $24.43 22 19 $8.00 Group III $24.42 22 19 $8.00 Group IV 1 $24.54 1 22 1 19 $8.00 For the occupational titles not listed on the Heavy Construction Rate Sheet, use Rates shown on the Building Construction Rate Sheet. ® ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14 3/07 COLE COUNTY ' OVERTIME SCHEDULE—HEAVY CONSTRUCTION • NO. 2: Means a regular workweek shall be forty(40)hours and will start on Monday and end on Friday. ' The regular work day shall be either eight(8)or ten(10)hours. If a crew is prevented from working forty (40)hours Monday through Friday,or any part thereof,by reason of inclement weather, Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. Employees who are part of a regular crew on a make-up day,notwithstanding the fact that they may not have been employed the entire week,shall work Saturday at the straight time rate. A workday shift is to begin at the option of the ' Employer,between 6:00 a.m. and not later than 9:00 a.m. However,the project starting time may be advanced or delayed if required. If workmen are required to work the enumerated holidays or days ' observed as such or Sundays,they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work. NO. 7: Means the regular work week shall start on Monday and end on Friday,except where the ' Employer elects to work Monday through Thursday,ten(10)hours per day. All work over ten(10)hours in a day or forty(40)hours in a week shall be at the overtime rate of one and one-half(1'/2)times the regular hourly rate. The regular workday shall be either eight(8)or ten(10)hours. If a job can't work forty(40)hours Monday through Friday because of inclement weather or other conditions beyond the , control of the Employer,Friday or Saturday may be worked as a make-up day at straight time(if working 4-10's). Saturday may be worked as a make-up day at straight time(if working 5-8's). Make-up days shall not be utilized for days lost due to holidays. A workday is to begin at the option of the Employer ' but not later than 11:00 a.m. except when inclement weather,requirements of the owner or other conditions beyond the reasonable control of the Employer prevent work. Except as worked as a make-up day,time on Saturday shall be worked at one and one-half(1%2)times the regular rate. Work performed on Sunday shall be paid at two(2)times the regular rate. Work performed on recognized holidays or days ' observed as such,shall also be paid at the double(2)time rate of pay. NO.21: Means the regular workday for which employees shall be compensated at straight time hourly ' rate of pay shall,unless otherwise provided for,begin at 8:00 a.m. and end at 4:30 p.m. However,the • project starting time may be advanced or delayed at the discretion of the Employer. At the discretion of the Employer,when working a five(5)day eight(8)hour schedule, Saturday may be used for a make-up ' day. If an Employer is prohibited from working on a holiday,that employer may work the following Saturday at the straight time rate. However,the Employer may have the option to schedule his work from Monday through Thursday at ten(10)hours per day at the straight time rate of pay with all hours in excess of ten(10)hours in any one day to be paid at the applicable overtime rate. If the Employer elects ' to work from Monday through Thursday and is stopped due to circumstances beyond his control,he shall have the option to work Friday or Saturday at the straight time rate of pay to complete his forty(40) hours. If an Employer is prohibited from working on a holiday,that Employer may work the following t Friday or Saturday at the straight time rate. Overtime will be at one and one-half(1%2)times the regular rate. If workmen are required to work the enumerated holidays or days observed as such,or Sundays, they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work. NO.22: Means a regular work week of forty(40)hours will start on Monday and end on Friday. The t regular work day shall be either eight(8)or ten(10)hours. If a crew is prevented from working forty (40)hours Monday through Friday,or any part thereof by reason of inclement weather, Saturday or any ' part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. Employees who are part of a regular crew on a make-up day,notwithstanding the fact that they may not have been employed the entire week,shall work Saturday at the straight time rate. A workday is to begin between 6:00 a.m. and 9:00 a.m. However,the project starting time may be advanced or delayed if mutually agreed to by the ' interested parties. For all time worked on recognized holidays,or days observed as such,double(2)time shall be paid. • ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14 , AW014 026 HOT.doc Page 1 of 1 Page i ' f COLE COUNTY HOLIDAY SCHEDULE—HEAVY CONSTRUCTION NO. 4: All work performed on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,Thanksgiving ' Day, Christmas Day, or days observed as such, shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When a holiday falls on a Sunday, Monday shall be observed. NO.5: The following days are recognized as holidays: New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Fourth of July,Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday. If a holiday falls on a Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday.No work shall be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction. This rule is applied to ' protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week,Monday through Friday, it shall be counted as eight(8)hours toward a forty (40) hour week; however,no reimbursement for this eight(8) hours is ' to be paid the workman unless worked. If workmen are required to work the above recognized holidays or days observed as such,or Sundays,they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work. The above shall apply to the four 10's Monday through Thursday work week. The ten(10)hours shall be applied to the forty (40) hour work week. NO. 16: The following days are recognized as holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day,Fourth of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on Sunday, it shall be observed on the ' following Monday. If a holiday falls on Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction.This rule is applied to ' protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week,Monday.through Friday, it shall be counted as eight(8)hours toward the forty(40) hour week; however,no reimbursement for this eight(8)hours is to be paid to the worker unless worked. If workers are required to work the above recognized holidays or days observed as such,they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work. ' NO. 19: The following days are recognized as holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day,Independence Day, Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the ' following Monday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction. This rule is applied to protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week, Monday through Friday, it shall be counted as eight(8) hours toward the forty(40) hour week; however,no ' reimbursement for this eight(8)hours is to be paid the workmen unless worked. An Employer working a four (4)day, ten(10)hour schedule may use Friday as a make up day when an observed holiday occurs during the work week. Employees have the option to work that make up day. If workmen are required to work the above enumerated holidays, or days observed as such, they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work. 1 1 • AWO14 026 MoLdoc ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14 Page I of 1 Page 1 OUTSIDE ELECTRICIAN , These rates are to be used for the following counties: • Adair,Audrain,Boone,Callaway,Camden,Carter,Chariton,Clark,Cole,Cooper,Crawford,Dent,Franklin, Gasconade,Howard,Howell,Iron,Jefferson,Knox,Lewis,Lincoln,Linn,Macon,Maries,Marion,Miller,Moniteau, Monroe,Montgomery,Morgan,Oregon,Osage,Perry,Phelps,Pike,Pulaski,Putnam,Ralls,Randolph,Reynolds, , Ripley,St.Charles,St.Francois,St.Louis City,St.Louis County,Ste.Genevieve,Schuyler,Scotland,Shannon,Shelby, Sullivan,Texas,Warren,and Washington COMMERCIAL WORK ' Occupational Title Basic Total Hourly Fringe ' Rate Benefits Journeyman Lineman $31.36 $4.75+41.3% ' Lineman Operator $27.50 $4.75+41.30Y( Groundman $21.41 $4.75+41.3 OVERTIME RATE:Eight(8)hours shall constitute a work day between the hours of 7:00 a.m.and 4:30 p.m.Forty , (40)hours within five(5)days,Monday through Friday inclusive,shall constitute the work week.Work performed in the 9th and 10th hour,Monday through Friday,shall be paid at time and one-half(1%z)the regular straight time rate of pay. Contractor has the option to pay two(2)hours per day at the time and one-half(1%z)the regular straight time rate of pay ' between the hours of 6:00 a.m.and 5:30 p.m.,Monday through Friday.Work performed outside the regularly scheduled working hours and on Saturdays,Sundays and recognized legal holidays,or days celebrated as such,shall be paid for at the rate of double(2)time. HOLH)AY RATE:All work performed on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Fourth of July,Labor Day,Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day,Christmas Day,or days celebrated as such,shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When one of the foregoing holidays falls on Sunday,it shall be celebrated on the following Monday. ' UTILITY WORK Occupational Title Basic Total ' Hourly Fringe Rate Benefits Journeyman Lineman $31.36 $4.75 +37.3% ' Lineman Operator $27.08 $4.75 +37.3% Groundman 1 $20.94 $4.75+37.3% ' OVERTIME RATE:Eight(8)hours shall constitute a work day between the hours of 7:00 a.m.and 4:30 p.m.Forty (40)hours within five(5)days,Monday through Friday inclusive,shall constitute the work week.Work performed in the ' 9th and 10th hour,Monday through Friday,shall be paid at time and one-half(1%)the regular straight time rate of pay. Contractor has the option to pay two(2)hours per day at the time and one-half(P/2)the regular straight time rate of pay between the hours of 6:00 a.m.and 5:30 p.m.,Monday through Friday. Worked performed in the first eight(8)hours on Saturday shall be paid at the rate of one and eight tenths(1.8)the regular straight time rate. Work performed outside , these hours and on Sundays and recognized legal holidays,or days celebrated as such,shall be paid for at the rate of double(2)time. HOLIDAY RATE:All work performed on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Fourth of July,Labor Day,Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day,Christmas Day,or days celebrated as such,shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When one of • the foregoing holidays falls on Sunday,it shall be celebrated on the following Monday. ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14 3/07 OUr STL A W 14.doc I' ' AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTS LAW • I, the undersigned, , of lawful age, first i ' being duly sworn, state to the best of my information and belief as follows: ' 1. That I am employed as , by 2. That was awarded a public works contract for Project No. 41005, Street Department Maintenance Facility. 3. That I have read and am familiar with Section 290.290 RSMo.(1994 as amended)an act relating to public works contracts, which impose certain requirements upon contractors and subcontractors engaged in a public ' works construction project in the State of Missouri. 4. That has fully complied with the ' provisions and requirements of Section 290.290 RSMo (1994 as • amended) FURTHER AFFIANT SAYETH NAUGHT. AFFIANT Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 NOTARY PUBLIC 1 My Commission Expires: STATE OF MISSOURI ) ss COUNTY OF ) ' EXCESSIVE UNEMPLOYMENT EXCEPTION CERTIFICATION • ' I, the undersigned, , of lawful age, first being duly sworn, state to the best of my information and belief as follows: ' 1. That I am employed as by 2. That was awarded a public works contract for Project No.41005, Street Department Maintenance I Facility. ' 3. That I have read and am familiar with Section 290.290 RSMo (1994 as amended)an act relating to public works contracts, which impose certain requirements upon contractors and subcontractors engaged in a public works construction project in the State of Missouri. 4. Although there is a period of excessive unemployment in the State of Missouri, which requires the employment of only Missouri laborers and laborers from non-restrictive states on public works projects or • improvements, . an exception applies as to the hiring. of ' since no Missouri laborers or laborers from non-restrictive states are available or capable of performing i FURTHER AFFIANT SAYETH NAUGHT. I ' AFFIANT Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 ' NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: APPROVED BY: Director of Community Development, City of Jefferson, MO • f' CITY OF JEFFERSON I • CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT ' THIS CONTRACT, made and entered into this day of , 2007, by and between Verslues Construction Co., Inc. herei er ref red to as ' "Contractor", and the City of Jefferson, Missouri, a municipal corporation of the State of Missouri, hereinafter referred to as "City". ' WITNESSETH: That Whereas, the Contractor has become the lowest responsible bidder for furnishing the supervision, labor, tools, equipment, materials and supplies and for constructing the following City improvements: . Project No. 41005, Street Department Maintenance Facility. Y NOW THEREFORE, the parties to this contract agree to the following: 1. Scope of Services. ! ' Contractor agrees to provide all labor, equipment, hardware and supplies to perform the work included in the project entitled "Street Department Maintenance Facility" in accordance with the plans and specifications on file with the Department of ' Community Development. 2. Manner and time for Completion. • Contractor agrees with the City to furnish all supervision, labor, tools, equipment, materials and supplies necessary to perform said work at Contractor's own expense in ' accordance with the contract documents and any applicable City ordinances and state and federal laws, within Two Hundred Forty (240) Calendar Days from the date Contractor is ordered to. proceed, which order shall be issued by the Director of ' Community Development within ten (10) days after the date of this contract. ' 3. Prevailing Wages. To the extent that the work performed by Contractor is subject to prevailing wage law, Contractor shall pay a wage of no less than the "prevailing hourly rate of wages" for ' work of a similar character in this locality, as established by Department of Labor and Industrial Relations of the State of Missouri, and as established by the Federal Employment Standards of the Department of Labor. Contractor acknowledges that ' Contractor knows the prevailing hourly rate of wages for this project because Contractor has obtained the prevailing hourly rate of wages from the contents of the current Annual Wage Order No. 14, Section 026, Cole County rates as set forth. The Contractor further agrees that Contractor will keep an accurate record showing the names and occupations of all workmen employed in connection with the work to be performed under the terms of this contract. The record shall show the actual wages ' paid to the workmen in connection with the work to be performed under the terms of • this contract. A copy of the record shall be delivered to the Purchasing Agent of the Jefferson City Finance Department each week. In accordance with Section 290.250 ' RSMo, Contractor shall forfeit to the City Ten Dollars ($10.00) for each workman employed, for each calendar day or portion thereof that the workman is paid less than the stipulated rates for any work done under this contract, by the Contractor or any subcontractor under the Contractor. I' 4. Insurance. Contractor shall procure and maintain at its own expense during the life of this contract: ' (a) Workmen's Compensation Insurance for all of its employees to be engaged in work under this contract. ' (b) Contractor's Public Liability Insurance in an amount not less than $2,000,000 for all claims arising out of a single occurrence and $300,000 for any one ' person in a single accident or occurrence, except for those claims governed by the provisions of the Missouri Workmen's Compensation Law, Chapter"287, RSMo., and Contractor's Property Damage Insurance in an amount not less than $2,000,000 for all claims arising out of a single accident or occurrence and $300,000 for any one person in a single accident or occurrence. (c) Automobile Liability Insurance in an amount not less than $2,000,000 for all claims arising out of a single accident or occurrence and $300,000 for any one ' person in a single accident or occurrence. (d) Owner's Protective Liability Insurance - The Contractor shall also obtain ' at its own expense and deliver to the City an Owner's Protective Liability Insurance Policy naming the City of Jefferson as the insured, in an amount not less than $2,000,000 for all claims arising out of a single accident or occurrence and $500,000 ' for any one person in a single accident or occurrence,except forthose claims governed by the provisions of the Missouri Workmen's Compensation Law, Chapter 287, RSMo. No policy will be accepted which excludes liability for damage to underground ' structures or by reason of blasting, explosion or collapse. (e) Subcontracts-In case any or all of this work is sublet,the Contractor shall ' require the Subcontractor to procure and maintain all insurance required in Subparagraphs (a), (b), and (c) hereof and in like amounts. ' (f) Scope of Insurance and Special Hazard. The insurance required under Sub-paragraphs(b)and (c)hereof shall provide adequate protection for the Contractor and its subcontractors, respectively, against damage claims which may arise from ' operations underthis contract,whether such operations be by the insured or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by it, and also against any special hazards which may be encountered in the performance of this contract. NOTE: Paragraph(f)is construed to require the procurement of Contractor's protective insurance (or contingent public liability and contingent property damage policies) by a ' general contractor whose subcontractor has employees working on the project, unless the general public liability and property damage policy(or rider attached thereto)of the general contractor provides adequate protection against claims arising from operations ' by anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Contractor. i 5. Contractor's Responsibility for Subcontractors. • It is further agreed that Contractor shall be as fully responsible to the City for the acts i and omissions of its subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, as Contractor is for the acts and omissions of persons it directly employs. Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all i subcontracts relating to this work, to bind all subcontractors to Contractor by all the terms herein set forth, insofar as applicable to the work of subcontractors and to give Contractor the same power regarding termination of any subcontract as the City may i exercise over Contractor under any provisions of this contract. Nothing contained in this contract shall create any contractual relations between any subcontractor and the City or between any subcontractors. � 16. Liquidated Damages. The City may deduct Three Hundred Dollars ($300.00) from any amount otherwise idue under this contract for every day the Contractor fails or refuses to prosecute the work, or any separable part thereof, with such diligence as will insure the completion by the time above specified, or any extension thereof, or fails to complete the work by isuch time, as long as the City does not terminate the right of Contractor to proceed. It is further provided that Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages ' because of delays in the completion of the work due to unforeseeable causes beyond Contractor's control and without fault or negligence on Contractor's part or the part of its agents. ' • 7. Termination. The City reserves the right to terminate this contract by giving at least five(5)days prior written notice to Contractor,without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the City should Contractor be adjudged a bankrupt, or if Contractor should make a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed for Contractor or for any of its property, or if Contractor should persistently or repeatedly refuse or fail to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper material, or if Contractor should refuse or fail to make prompt payment to any person supplying labor or materials for the work under the contract, or persistently disregard instructions of the City or fail to observe or perform any provisions of the contract. i 8. City's Right to Proceed. In the event this contract is terminated pursuant to Paragraph 7, then the City may take over the work and prosecute the same to completion, by contract or otherwise, and i Contractor and its sureties shall be liable to the City for any costs over the amount of this contract thereby occasioned by the City. In any such case the City may take possession of, and utilize in completing the work, such materials, appliances and structures as may be on the work site and are necessary for completion of the work. The foregoing provisions are in addition to, and not in limitation of, the rights of the City under any other provisions of the contract, city ordinances, and state and federal laws. i9. Indemnity. • To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless ' the City, its elected and appointed officials, employees, and agents from and against any and all claims,damages, losses, and expenses including attorneys'fees arising out 1 of or resulting from the performance of the work, provided that any such claim,damage, • loss or expense (1) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property(other than the Work itself)including the loss of use resulting therefrom and (2) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of contractor,any subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by any ' of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a_party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or otherwise reduce any other right or obligation of i ' indemnity which would otherwise exist as to any party or person described in this Paragraph. t10. Payment for Labor and Materials. The Contractor agrees and binds itself to pay for all labor done, and for all the materials used in the construction of the work to be completed pursuant to this contract. ' Contractor shall furnish to the City a bond to insure the payment of all materials and labor used in the performance of this contract. ' 11. Supplies. The Contractor is hereby authorized and directed to utilize the City's sales tax ' exemption in the purchase of goods and materials for the project as set out in Section 144.062 RSMo 1994 as amended. Contractor shall keep and maintain records and invoices of all such purchases which shall be submitted to the City. ' 12. Payment. The City hereby agrees to pay the Contractor for the work done pursuant to this ' contract according to the payment schedule set forth in the Contract Documents upon acceptance of said work by the Director of Community Development and in accordance with the rates and/or amounts stated in the bid of Contractor dated June 12, 2007 ' which are by reference made a part hereof. No partial payment to the Contractor shall operate as approval or acceptance of work done or materials fu*rnished hereunder. The total amount of this contract shall not exceed One Million Three Hundred Fifty One ' Thousand Seven Hundred Forty Eight Dollars and Zero Cents ($1,351,748.00). 13. Performance and Materialman's Bonds Required. Contractor shall provide a bond to the City before work is commenced, and no later ' than ten (10) days after the execution of this contract, guaranteeing the Contractor's performance of the work bid for, the payment of amounts due to all suppliers of labor ' and materials, the payment of insurance premiums for workers compensation insurance and all other insurance called for under this contract, and the payment of the prevailing wage rate to all workmen as required by this contract, said bond to be in a ' form approved by the City, and to be given by such company or companies as may be acceptable to the City in its sole and absolute discretion. The amount of the bond shall be equal to the Contractor's bid. ' 14. Knowledge of Local Conditions. • Contractor hereby warrants that it has examined the location of the proposed work and ' the attached specifications and has fully considered such local conditions in making its bid herein. 1 1 15. Severability. 1 If any section, subsection, sentence, or clause of this Contract shall be adjudged illegal, invalid, or unenforceable, such illegality, invalidity, or unenforceability shall not affect ' the legality, validity, or enforceability of the contract as a whole, or of any section, subsection, sentence, clause, or attachment not so adjudged. 16. Governing Law. The contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Missouri. The courts of the State of Missouri shall have jurisdiction over any dispute which arises under this ' contract, and each of the parties shall submit and hereby consents to such courts exercise of jurisdiction. In any successful action by the City to enforce this contract,the City shall be entitled to recover its attorney's fees and expenses incurred in such action. ' 17. Contract Documents. The contract documents shall consist of the following: ' a. This Contract f. General Provisions b. Addenda g. Special Provisions c. Information for Bidders h. Technical Specifications d. Notice to Bidders I. Drawing and/or Sketches e. Signed Copy of Bid ' • This contract and the other documents enumerated in this paragraph,form the Contract between the parties. These documents are as fully a part of the contract as if attached ' hereto or repeated herein. 18. Complete Understanding, Merger. ' Parties agree that this document including those documents described in the section entitled "Contract Documents"represent the full and complete understanding of the parties. This contact includes only those goods and services specifically set out. This ' contract supersedes all prior contracts and understandings between the Contractor and the City. ' 19. Authorship and Enforcement. Parties agree that the production of this document was the joint effort of both parties and that the contract should not be construed as having been drafted by either party. 1 In the event that either party shall seek to enforce the terms of this contract through litigation, the prevailing party in such action shall be entitled to receive, in addition to any other relief, its reasonable attorneys fees, expenses and costs. 20. Amendments. This contract may not be modified, changed or altered by any oral promise or statement ' by whomsoever made; nor shall any modification of it be binding upon the City until such written modification shall have been approved in writing by an authorized officer • of the City. Contractor acknowledges that the City may not be responsible for paying for changes or modifications that were not properly authorized. 1 ' 21. Waiver of Breech . • Failure to Exercise Rights and Waiver: Failure to insist upon strict compliance with any of the terms covenants or conditions herein shall not be deemed a waiver of any such terms, covenants or conditions, nor shall any failure at one or more times be deemed a waiver or relinquishment at any other time or times by any right under the terms, ' covenants or conditions herein. 22. Assignment. ' Neither party may sell or assign its rights or responsibilities under the terms of this agreement without the express consent of the remaining party. 23. Nondiscrimination. Contractor agrees in the performance of this contract not to discriminate on the ground or because of race, creed, color, national origin or ancestry, sex, religion, handicap, age, or political opinion or affiliation, against any employee of Contractor or applicant for employment and shall include a similar provision in all subcontracts let or awarded ' hereunder. 24. Notices. ' All notices required to be in writing may be given by first class mail addressed to City of Jefferson, Department of Community Development, 320 East McCarty, Jefferson City, Missouri, 65101, and Contractor at 6919 Rocky Valley Rd., Jefferson City, MO ' 65101 . The date of delivery of any notice shall be the second full day after the day of • its mailing. • T I' IN WIT S W EREOF,the parties hereto have set their hands and seals this • day of , 2007. ' CITY OF JEFFERSON CONTRACTOR I I ay r Title: I' ATTEST: ATTEST: ClAxlje�V—' ' y Clerk U Title: APPR D S O FORM. 1 City Counselor • 1 BOND NO. 6284244 I PERFORMANCE,PA ENT AN D GUARANTEE SQND • 1 KNOW All MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned VERSLUES CONSTRUCTION COMPANY,INC.,6919 ROCKY VALLEY ROAD,JEFFERSON CITY,MO 65101 hereinafter, referred to as "Contractor` and FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA a Corporation organized under the laws of the State of WASHINGTON and authorized to transact business In the State of MISSOURI as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF JEFFERSON,MISSOURI hereinafter referred to as'Owner' SUM of N ONE MILLIO THREE HUNDRED FIFTY ONE THOUSAND SEVEN HUNDRED FORTY EIGHT DOLLARS AND ZERO CENbO In the penal LARS ' ($ 1,351,748.00 ), lawful money of the United States of America for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves and our heirs, • executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally by these Presents. THE CONDITION OF THE FOREGOING OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT; WHEREAS, the above bounded Contractor has on the 16TH day of JULY ,2027--,entered into a written contract with the aforesaid Owner for furnishing all materials,equipment,tools,superintendence,labor,and otherfaeiiities and accessories,for the construction of certain improvements as designated, defined and described in the said Contract and the Conditions thereof, and in accordance with the specifications and plans therefore; a copy of said Contract being attached hereto and made a part hereof; NOW THEREFORE,if the said Contractorshall and will,in all particulars,well,duly and • faithfully observe, perform and abide by each and every covenant,condition, and part of the said Contact, and the Conditions, Specifications, Plans, Prevailing Wage Law 1 ' and other Contract Documents thereto attached orb reference made s part thereof, • Y !7 ' according to the true intent and meaning In each case, and if said contractor shall replace all defective parts, material and workmanship for a period of one year after ' acceptance by the Owner, then this obligation shall be and become null and void; otherwise It shall remain In full force and effect. ' PROVIDED FURTHER, that if the said Contractor fails to duly pay for any labor, ' materials, sustenances, provisions, provender, gasoline, lubricating ails, fuel oils, greases,csai repairs, equipment and tools consumed or used in said work,groceries ' and foodstuffs, and all insurance•premiums, compensation iiebility, and otherwise, or any other supplies or materials used or consumed by such Contractor or his,their, or its subcontractors in'performance of the work contracted to be done,the Surety will pay the same in any amount not exceeding the amount of this Obligation, together with ' interest as provided by law: PROVIDED FURTHER,that the said S uretyjor value received, hereby stipulates and ' • agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the contract,or the work to be performed thereunder,or the speclfirations accompanying ' the same, shall in any wise affect its obligation on this bond and it does hereby waive notice of any change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the ' contract, or to the work, or to the specifications: ' PROVIDED RURTHER,that if the said Contractorfails to pay the prevailing hourly rate of wages, as shown in the attached schedule, to any workman engaged in the construction of the improvements as designated, defined and described in the said contract, specifications and oonditions thereof,the Surety will pay the deficiency and ' any penalty provided for by law which the contractor incurs by reason of an act or omission, In any amount not exceeding the amount of this obligation together with Interest as provided by law: ' IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the said Contractor has hereunto set his hand, and the • said Surety has caused these presents to be executed in Its name, and its corporate 1 I ' 1 • seal to be hereunto affixed,by it attorney-in-fact duly authorized thereunto so to do,at ' ST. LOUIS COUNTY, MISSOURI an this the i ' 16TH JULY 07 day of , 20 FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF VERSLUES CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, t SURETY COMPANY CONTRACTOR ' B {SEAL.) BY (SEAL) DENNIS VERSLUES 6919 ROCKY VALLEY ROAD JEFFERSON CITY,MO 65101 5Y _ _ — (SEALr) BY_(SEAL) ' Attorney jn faCtJAMES P.CITTADINO (Stets Representative) CHARLES L.CRANE AGENCY CO. 400 CHESTERFIELD CENTER SUITE 320 CHESTERFIELD,MO 63017 ' (Accompany this band with Attomey-in-fact's authority from the Surety Company certified to include the date of the bond.) r I S A F E C O® POWER � FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA OF ATTORNEY PO BOX 34526 FIRST NATIONAL SURETY SEATTLE,WA 98124-1526 F BOX ,WA ATTLE,WA 98124-1526 No. 7489 ' KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: That FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA,a Washington corporation,does hereby appoint *******GREGORY L.STANLEY;MICHAEL T.REEDY;THERESA A.HUNZIKER;JAMES CITTADINO;DONNA J.THONE;CHRIS LAYTON;St.Louis,Missouri******* ' its true and lawful attomey(s)-in-fact,with full authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds or undertakings and other documents of a similar character issued by the company in the course of its business,and to bind FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA thereby as fully as if such ' instruments had been duly executed by its regularly elected officers at its home office. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA has executed and attested these presents this Ilth day of July 2002 CHRISTINE MEAD,SECRETARY MIKE MCGAVICK,PRESIDENT CERTIFICATE ' Extract from the By-Laws of FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA: "Article V, Section 13.-FIDELITY AND SURETY BONDS ...the President,any Vice President,the Secretary,and any Assistant Vice President appointed for that ' purpose by the officer in charge of surety operations,shall each have authority to appoint individuals as attomeys-in-fact or under other appropriate titles with authority to �xecute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds and other documents of similar character issued by the company in the course of its business...On any strument making or evidencing such appointment, the signatures may be affixed by facsimile. On any instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or undertaking of the company,the seal,or a facsimile thereof,may be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced;provided,however,that the seal shall not ' be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking." Extract from a Resolution of the Board of Directors of FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28,1970. "On any certificate executed by the Secretary or an assistant secretary of the Company setting out, ' (i) The provisions of Article V,Section 13 of the By-Laws,and (ii) A copy of the power-of-attomey appointment,executed pursuant thereto,and (iii) Certifying that said power-of-attomey appointment is in full force and effect, the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile,and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof." ' I, Christine Mead, Secretary of FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA,do hereby certify that the foregoing extracts of the By-Laws and of a Resolution of the Board of Directors of this corporation, and of a Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct, and that both the By-Laws, the Resolution and the Power of Attorney are still in full force and effect. ' IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of said corporation ' this 4:6 th day of Jill =�w. `owPOq-4r�` ° SEAL Y ,IS 2 8 .01 + e CHRISTINE MEAD,SECRETARY S-1049/FNEF 7198 ®A registered trademark of SAFECO Corporation ' 07/1112002 PDF ' ACORD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE OP ID DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) VERSL-2 07/17/07 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE Charles L. Crane Agcy-W.County HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND,EXTEND OR t 400 Chesterfield Ctr-Suite 320 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. C 4terfield MO 63017 e: 636-537-5000 Fax:636-537-5009 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# t INSURED INSURER A: Missouri Employers Mutual Ins. 10191 INSURER B: Selective Insurance Group Verslues Construction Co. Inc. INSURER C: ' 6919 Rocky Valley Road INSURER D: Jefferson City MO 65101 INSURER E: COVERAGES ' THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED.NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS LTR NSR TYPE OF INSURANCE DATE MM/DD/YY DATE MM/DD/YY GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1000000 B X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY S1817259 06/04/07 06/04/08 PREMISES(Ea occurence) $ 100000 CLAIMS MADE X❑ OCCUR MED EXP(Any one person) $ 10000 X JECT OCP PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 1000000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2000000 GEN'LAGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG $ 1000000 POLICY }{ PRO LOC AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ 1000000 B X ANY AUTO 51817259 06/04/07 06/04/08 (Ea accident) ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) $ X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ X NON-OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) INSURANCE REVIEWED (Peer accident)AMAGE $ GARAGE LIABILITY �/ AUTO ONLY-EA ACCIDENT $ ; 7 ANY AUTO B 7• OTHER THAN EA ACC $ AUTO ONLY: AGG $ EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY Date: EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5000000 B X OCCUR EI CLAIMSMADE 51817259 06/04/07 06/04/08 AGGREGATE $ 5000000 DEDUCTIBLE $ X RETENTION $10000 $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND X TORY LIMITS I ER EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY A ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE 7041656 06/04/07 06/04/08 E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ lOOOOOO OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ 1000000 If yes,describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ 1000000 OTHER B Leased and Rented 51817259 06/04/07 06/04/08 Limit $100,000 B Installation Float S1817259 06/04/07 06/04/08 Limit 500,000.00 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS ' Re: Street Department Maintenance Facility Project No. 41005. City of Jefferson City Additional insured as respects to this project only. Waiver of Subrogation applies as law permits. 1 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION ' CITYJEF SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF,THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN • City of Jefferson City NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL Depart of Community Developmen IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER,ITS AGENTS OR ' 320 East McCarthy Street - Jefferson City MO 65101 REPRESENTATIVES. TH RIZ REPUE ENT IVOeE__'' <!0 TKO w ' ACORD 25(2001/08) ©ACORD CORPORATION 1988 OP ID DATE(MM/DD/Y ACORD YYY)CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE VERSL-2 07/17/07 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE ' Charles L. Crane Agcy-W.County HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND,EXTEND OR 400 Chesterfield Ctr-Suite 320 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. sterfield MO 63017 ne: 636-537-5000 Fax:636-537-5009 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURED INSURER A: Selective Insurance Group INSURER B: City of Jefferson City INSURER C: Depart of Community Developmen ' 32D East McCarthy Street INSURER D: Jefferson City MO 65101 INSURER E: COVERAGES ' THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED.NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTI E POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS LTR NSR TYPE OF INSURANCE DATE MM/DD/YY DATE MMIDD/YY t GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1000000 A X X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY TO BE DETERMINED 07/12/07 07/12/0 8 PREMISES(Ea ocourence) $ CLAIMS MADE rx I OCCUR MED EXP(Any one person) $ ' X Owner/Cont Prot. PERSONAL BADVINJURY $ 1000000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $2000000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $ 2000000 X POLICY PRO- LOC ' JECT AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ X ANY AUTO (Ea accident) ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ ' SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ NON-OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) ' PROPERTY DAMAGE $ (Per accident) GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY-EA ACCIDENT $ ANY AUTO EA ACC $ ' OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: AGG $ EXCESSIUMBRELLA LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ OCCUR ❑ CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $ ' $ DEDUCTIBLE $ RETENTION $ $ ' - WORKERS COMPENSATION AND _TORY LIMITS ER EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ If yes,describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ ' OTHER ' DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION ' SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF,THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER,ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. TH RIZ REPUE ENT IVE ee4 ' ACORD 25(2001108) ©ACORD CORPORATION 1988 tPERFORMANCE. PAYMENT AND GUARANTEE BOND • KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned hereinafter, referred to as "Contractor" and 1 a Corporation organized under the laws of the State of and authorized to transact business in the State of as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the hereinafter referred to as"Owner" in the penal sum of DOLLARS ($ ), lawful money of the United States of America for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves and our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally by these ' presents. ' N F THE FOREGOING OBLIGATION IS SUCH THE CONDITION O THAT; D O , WHEREAS, the above bounded Contractor has on the day of ,20 ,entered into a written contract with the aforesaid Owner forfurnishing all materials,equipment,tools,superintendence, labor,and otherfacilities and accessories, for the construction of certain improvements as designated, defined and described in the said Contract and the Conditions thereof, and in accordance with ' the specifications and plans therefore; a copy of said Contract being attached hereto and made a part hereof: ' NOW THEREFORE, if the said Contractor shall and will in all particulars,well, duly and faithfully observe, perform and abide by each and every covenant, condition, and part ' of the said Contract, and the Conditions, Specifications, Plans, Prevailing Wage Law and other Contract Documents thereto attached or, by reference, made a part thereof, • according to the true intent and meaning in each case,.and if said contractor shall I' replace all defective parts, material and workmanship for a period. of one year after acceptance by the Owner, then this obligation shall be and become null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED FURTHER, that if the said Contractor fails to duly pay for any labor, materials, sustenances, provisions, provender, gasoline, lubricating oils, fuel oils, ' greases, coafrepairs, equipment and tools consumed or used in said work, groceries and foodstuffs, and all insurance premiums, compensation liability, and otherwise, or ' any other supplies or materials used or consumed by such Contractor or his, their, or its subcontractors in'performance of the work contracted to be done,the Surety will pay the same in any amount not exceeding the amount of this Obligation, together with interest as provided by law: ' PROVIDED FURTHER, that the said Surety,.for value received, hereby stipulates and • agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the contract, or the work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications accompanying the same, shall in any wise affect its obligation on this bond and it does hereby waive i ! ' notice of any change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work, or to the specifications: PROVIDED FURTHER, that if the said Contractor fails to pay the prevailing hourly rate of wages, as shown in the attached schedule, to any workman engaged in the construction of the improvements as designated, defined and described in the said ' contract, specifications and conditions thereof,the Surety will pay the deficiency and any penalty provided for by law which the contractor incurs by reason of an act or ' omission, in any amount not exceeding the amount of this obligation together with interest as provided by law: IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the said Contractor has hereunto set his hand, and the ' said Surety has caused these presents to be executed in its name, and its corporate i, seal to be hereunto affixed, by it attorney-in-fact duly authorized thereunto so to do, at i • on this the day of 20 ff ` SURETY COMPANY CONTRACTOR I' BY (SEAL) BY (SEAL) ' BY (SEAL) BY SEAL ' Attorney-in-fact (State Representative) ' • (Accompany this bond with Attorney-in-fact's authority from the Surety Company certified to include the date of the bond.) • t GENERAL PROVISIONS FORWARD The following Articles GP-1 through GP-49 are"General Provisions of the Contract",modified asset forth in the Special Provisions. GP-1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ' It is expressly understood and agreed that the Contract Documents comprise the Notice to Bidders, Instruction to Bidders,General Provisions,Special Provisions,Bid,Contract, Performance and One Year Guarantee Bond, Specifications, other documents listed in-the Table of Contents and bound in this Volume. Plans,all Addenda thereto issued prior to the time of opening bids for the work,all of which.are hereto attached,and other drawings,specifications,and engineering data which may be furnished bythe. Contractor and approved by the Owner, together with such additional drawings which may be furnished by the Engineer from time to time as are necessary to make clear and to define in greater detail the intent . of the specifications and drawings, are each and all component parts to the agreement governing the work to be done and the materials equipment to be furnished. All of these documents are hereby defined as the Contract Documents. ' The several parts of the Contract Documents are complementary,and what is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all. The intention of the Documents is to include the furnishing of all materials,labor,tools,equipment and supplies necessary for constructing complete and readyto usethe work specified. Materials or work described in words which so applied have a well known technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards. The Contract shall be executed in the State and County where the Owner is located. Three (3) copies ' of the contract documents shall be prepared by the Contractor, each containing an exact copy of the. Contractor's bid as submitted,the Performance Bond properly executed,a Statutory Bond where required, and the contract agreement signed by both parties thereto. These executed contract documents shall be filed as follows: One.(1) with the City Clerk of the City of Jefferson One (1) with the Jefferson City Director of Community Development One (1)with the Contractor ' GP-2 DEFINITIONS Wherever any work or expression defined in this article, or pronoun used in its stead, occurs in these contract documents, it shall have and is mutually understood to have the meaning herein given: 1. "Contract"or"Contract Documents"shall include all of the documents enumerated in the previous ' article. 2. "Owner", "City", or words "Party of the First Part", shall mean the party entering into contract to secure performance of the work covered by this Contract and his or its duly authorized officers ' or-agents. Generally this will be the "City of Jefferson". 3. "Contractor"or the words "Party of the Second Part"shall mean the party entering into contract ' for the performance of the work covered by this contract and his duly authorized agents or legal representatives. 4. "Subcontractors"shall mean and refer to a corporation,partnership,or individual having a direct ' contract with the Contractor, for performing work at the job site. • 5. "Engineer"shall mean the authorized representative of the Director of Community Development, ' (i.e., the Engineering Division Director). 1 6. "Construction Representative"shall mean the engineering or technical assistant duly authorized ' bythe Engineer limited to the particular duties entrusted to him or them as subsequently set forth herein. 7. Date of Award of Contract or words equivalent thereto, shall mean the date upon which the , successful bidder's proposal is accepted by the City. 8. "Day" or"days", unless herein otherwise expressly defined, shall mean a calendar day or days of twenty-four hours each. _9. "The work" shall mean the work to be done and the equipment, supplies and materials to be ' furnished under this contract, unless some other meaning is indicated by the context. 10. "Plans"or"drawings"shall mean and include all drawings which may have been prepared by the ' Engineer as a basis for proposals, all drawings submitted by the successful bidder with his proposal and by the Contractor to the City, if and when approved by the Engineer, and all drawings submitted by the City to the Contractor during the progress of the work,as provided for herein. ' 11. Whenever in these contract documents the words"as directed","as required","as permitted","as allowed", or words or phrases of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, ' requirement, permission, or allowance of the City and Engineer is intended. 12. Similarly the words "approved", "reasonable", "suitable", "acceptable", "properly", "satisfactory", or words of like effect and import, unless otherwise particularly specified herein, shall mean ' approved,reasonable,suitable,acceptable,proper or satisfactory in the judgment of the City and Engineer. 13. Whenever any statement is made in these Contract Documents containing the expression "it is understood and agreed"or any expression of the like import,such expression means the mutual understanding and agreement of the Contractor and the City. 14. "Missouri Highway Specifications" shall mean the latest edition of the "Missouri Standard i Specifications for Highway Construction"prepared by the Missouri Highway and Transportation Commission and published before the date of this contract. ' 15. "Consultant" shall mean the firm, company, individual, or its/his/her duly authorized representative(s) under separate agreement with the City of Jefferson that prepared the plans, specifications, and other such documents for the work covered by this contract. GP-3 THE CONTRACTOR It is understood and agreed that the Contractor, has by careful examination satisfied himself as to the ' nature and location of the work,the conformation of the ground,the character,quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of the equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general local conditions, and all other matters which can in any , way affect the work under this Contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the City,either before or after the execution of this contract,shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. The relation of the Contractor to the City shall be that of an independent contractor. , GP-4 THE ENGINEER ' The Engineer shall be the City's representative during the construction period and he shall observe the • work in process on behalf of the City by a series of periodic visits to the job site. He shall have authority to act on behalf of the City. , 1 I' ' The Engineer assumes no direction of employees of the Contractor or subcontractors and no supervision • of the construction activities or responsibility for their safety. The Engineer's sole responsibility during construction is to the City to endeavor to protect defects and deficiencies in the work. ' Any plan or method of work suggested by the Engineer, or.other representative of the City, to the Contractor, but not specified or required,if adopted or followed by the Contractor in whole or in part,shall be used at the risk and responsibility of the Contractor; and the Engineer and the City will assume no '. responsibility therefore. GP-5 BOND ' Coincident with the execution of the Contract,the Contractor shall furnish a good and sufficient surety bond in the full amount of the contract sum. This surety bond, executed by the Contractor to the City, ' shall be a guarantee: (a) for the faithful performance and completion of the work in strict accordance with the terms and intent of the contract documents; (b) the payment of all bills and obligations arising from this contract which might in any manner become a claim against the City; (c) for the payment to the City of all sums due or which may become due by the terms of the contract, as well as by reason of any ' violation thereof by the Contractor; and for a period of one year from and immediately following the acceptance of the completed project by the City,the payment to the City of all damage loss and expense which may occur to the City by reason of defective materials used, or by reason of defective or improper ' workmanship-done, in the furnishing of materials, labor, and equipment in the performance of the said contract. All provisions of the bond shall be complete and in fUll accordance with statutory requirements. The bond I ' shall be executed with the property sureties through a company licensed and qualified to operate in the state and approved by the City. Bond shall be signed by an agent resident in the state and date of bond shall be the date of execution of the contract. If at any time during the continuance of the contract the surety on the Contractor's bond becomes • irresponsible,the City shall have the right to require additional and suff icient sureties which the Contractor shall furnish to the satisfaction of the City within ten(10)days after notice to do so. In default thereof,the ' contract may be suspended, all payments or money due the Contractor withheld, and the contract completed as hereinafter.provided. ' GP-6 INSURANCE GP-6.1 GENERAL: ' The Contractor shall secure,pay for and maintain during the life of the Contract,insurance of such types and amounts as necessary to protect himself, and the City, against all hazards enumerated herein. All policies shall be in the amounts, form and companies satisfactory to the City. ' The insuring company shall deliver to the City certificates of all insurance required, signed by an authorized representative and stating that all provisions of the following specified requirements are complied with. All certificates of insurance required herein shall state that ten(10)days written notice will be given to the City before the policy is canceled or changed. All certifications of insurance shall be delivered to the City ' prior to the time that any operations under this contract are started. All of said Contractor's certificates of insurance shall be written in an insurance company authorized to do business in the State of Missouri. ' GP-6.2 BODILY INJURY LIABILITY& PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY INSURANCE • (1) Bodily Injury Liability insurance coverage providing limits for bodily injuries,including death,of not less ' than $2,000,000 per person and $300;000 per occurrence. 1 - 1 (2) Property Damage Liability insurance coverage for limits of not less than $2,000,000 per one ' occurrence nor less than $2,000,000 aggregate to limit for the policy year. • GP-6.3 CONTRACTOR'S PROTECTIVE BODILY INJURY LIABILITY & PROTECTIVE PROPERTY ' DAMAGE LIABILITY INSURANCE: (COVERING OPERATIONS OF SUBCONTRACTORS) (1) Contractors contingent policy providing limits of at least$300,000 per person and $2,000,000 per , occurrence for bodily injury or death. (2) Property Damage Liability providing limits of at least $2,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000 ' aggregate. GP-6.4 CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY Property Damage coverage with $2,000,000 aggregate limit. 1 GP-6.5 OWNER'S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE INSURANCE ' The Contractor shall purchase and maintain Owner's Protective Liability and Property Damage insurance issued in the name of the Owner and the Engineer as will protect both against any and all claims that might arise as a result of the operations of the Contractor or his subcontractors in fulfilling this contract. ' The minimum amount of such insurance shall be the same as required for Bodily Injury Liability and Property Damage Liability Insurance. This policy shall be filed with the Owner and a copy filed with the ' Engineer. GP-6.6 EXCLUSIONS The above requirements GP-6.2,6.3, 6.5 for property damage liability shall contain no exclusion relative ' to: • (1) Blasting or explosion. (Consult Technical Specifications Part I for possible deletion of this ' requirement on subject project.) (2) Injury or destruction of property below the surface of the ground, such as wires, conduits, pipes, ' mains, sewers, etc., caused by the Contractor's operations. (3) The collapse of,or structural injury to, any building or structure on or adjacent to the City's premises, ' or injury to or destruction of property resulting therefrom, caused by the removal of other buildings, structures, or supports, or by excavations below the surface of the ground. GP-6.7 AUTOMOBILE BODILY INJURY LIABILITY & AUTOMOBILE PROPERTY DAMAGE ' LIABILITY INSURANCE Contractor shall carry in his name, additional assured clauses protecting City, Liability Insurance with ' Bodily Injury or Death Limits of not less than$300,000 per person and $2,000,000 per occurrence, and property damage limits of not less than $300,000 with hired car and non-owned vehicle coverage or separate policy carrying similar limits. The above is to cover the use of automobiles and trucks on and off the site of the project. ' GP-6.8 EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY AND WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION Employer's and Workmen's Compensation Insurance as will protect him against any and all claims resulting from injuries to and death of workmen engaged in work under this contract, and in addition the • Contractor shall carry occupational disease coverage with statutory limits, and Employer's Liability with t a limit of$300,000 per person. The "All State" endorsement shall be included. T In case any class of employees is not protected under the Workmen's Compensation Statute, the • Contractor shall provide and cause such contractor to provide adequate employer's liability coverage as will protect him against any claims resulting from injuries to and death of workmen engaged in work under this contract. GP-6.9 INSTALLATION FLOATER INSURANCE This insurance shall insure and protect the Contractor and the City from all insurable risks of physical loss or damage to materials and equipment, not otherwise covered under Builder's Risk Insurance, when in ' warehouses or storage areas, during installation, during testing and until the work is accepted. It shall be of the"All Risks"type,with coverage designed for the circumstances which may occur in the particular work included in this contract. The coverage-shall be for an-amount not less than the value of the-work at completion,less the value of the material and equipment insured under Builder's Risk Insurance. The ' value shall include the aggregate value of the City-furnished equipment and materials to be erected or installed by the Contractor not otherwise insured under Builder's Risk Insurance. Installation Floater Insurance shall also provide for losses, if.any,to be adjusted with and made payable ' to the Contractor and the City as their interests may appear. If the aggregate value of the City-furnished and Contractor-furnished equipment is less than$10,000 such ' equipment may be covered under Builder's Risk Insurance, and if so covered, this Installation Floater Insurance may be omitted. GP-6.10 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR OTHER LOSSES For the considerations in this agreement heretofore stated, in addition to Contractor's other obligations, the Contractor assumes full responsibility for all loss or damage from any cause whatsoever to any tools ' owned by the mechanics, any tool machinery, equipment, or motor vehicles owned or rented by the • Contractor's, his agents, sub-contractors, material men or his or their employees; to sheds or other temporary structures, scaffolding and staging, protective fences, bridges and sidewalk hooks. The Contractor shall also assume responsibility for all loss or damage caused by,arising out of or incident to ' larceny,theft,or any cause whatsoever(except as hereinbefore provided)to the structure on which the work of this contract and any modifications, alterations, enlargements thereto, is to be done, and to materials and labor connected or to be used as a part of the permanent materials,and supplies necessary, to the work. GP-6.11 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY ON DAMAGES&CLAIMS INDEMNIFYING CITY ' The Contractor shall.indemnify and save harmless the City and Engineer and their officers and agents, of and from all losses, damages,costs, expenses,judgments,or decrees whatever arising out of action or suit that may be brought against the City or Engineer or any officer or agent of either of them,for or on ' account of the failure,omission,or neglect of the Contractor to do and perform any of the covenants,acts, matters,or things by this contract undertaken to be done or performed,or for the injury,death or damage caused by the negligence or alleged negligence of the Contractor or his subcontractors or his or their agents, or in connection with any claim or claims based on the lawful demands of subcontractors, ' workmen,material men,or suppliers of machinery and parts thereof,equipment,power tools and supplies incurred in the fulfillment of this contract. ' GP-6.12 NOTIFICATION IN EVENT OF LIABILITY OR DAMAGE Upon the occurrence of any event, the liability for which is herein assumed, the Contractor agrees to forthwith notify the City, in writing such happening, which notice shall forthwith give the details as to the ' happening,the cause as far as can be ascertained,the estimate of loss or damage done;the names of witnesses, if any, and stating-the amount of any claim. GP-7 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ' The Contractor shall not assign or transfer this contract nor sublet it as a whole, without the written • consent of the City and of the Surety on the Contractor's bond. Such consent of Surety, together with ' copy of assignment, shall be filed with the City. No assignment, transfer or subletting, even though consented to, shall relieve the Contractor of his liabilities under this contract. Should any assignee fail to perform the work undertaken by him in a satisfactory manner, the City may at his option annul and terminate Assignee's contract. GP-8 SUBCONTRACTS, PRINCIPAL MATERIALS& EQUIPMENT , Prior to the award of the contract, the Contractor shall submit for approval of the City a list of subcontractors and the sources of the principal items of materials and equipment which he proposes to use in the construction of the project. ' The Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible to the City for the acts and omissions of his subcontractors and of person either directly or indirectly employed by them as he is for the acts and ' omissions or persons directly employed by him. Any notices to the Contractor shall be considered as notice to any affected subcontractors. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between any ' subcontractor and the City. No officer, agent or employee of the City, including the Engineer, shall have any power or authority whatsoever to bind the City or incur any obligation in its behalf to any subcontractor, material supplier or ' other person in any manner whatsoever. GP-9 OTHER CONTRACTS ' The City reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with this work. The Contractor shall afford • other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their work, and shall properly connect and coordinate his work with theirs. , If any part of the Contractor's work depends for proper execution or results on the work of any other contractor,the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Engineer any defect in such work that ' renders it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. His failure so to inspect and report all constitute an acceptance of the other contractor's work as fit and proper for the reception of his work,except as to defects which may develop in the other contractor's work ' after the execution of his work. Wherever work being done by the City's forces or by other contractors is contiguous to work covered by ' this Contract,the respective rights of the various interests involved shall be established by the Engineer, in order to secure the completion of the various portions of the work in general harmony. GP-10 LEGAL RESTRICTIONS, PERMITS AND REGULATIONS , The Contractor shall procure at his own expense all necessary licenses and permits of a temporary nature and shall give due and adequate notice to those in control of all properties which may be affected by his , operations. Rights-of-way and easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities shall be provided by the City unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work as drawn or specified. ' GP-11 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS • It is agreed that all royalties for patents or patent claims, infringement whether such patents are for ' processes or devices,that might be involved in the construction or use of the work, shall be included in the contract amount and the Contractor shall satisfy all demands that may be made at any time for such • and shall be liable for any damages or claims for patent infringements,and the Contractor shall at his own ' expense, defend any and all suits or proceedings that may be instituted at any time against the City for infringement or alleged infringement of any patent or patents involved in the work,and in case of an award of damages,the said Contractor shall pay such award;final payment to the Contractor by the City will not be made while any such suits or claims remain unsettled. ' GP-12 SCOPE AND INTENT OF SPECIFICATIONS AND PLANS GP-12.1 GENERAL These Specifications and Project Plans are intended to supplement, but not necessarily duplicate each other, and together constitute one complete set of Specifications and Plans so that any work exhibited ' in the one and not in the other, shall be executed just as if it has been set forth in both, in-order that the work shall be completed according to the complete design of the Engineer. Should anything be omitted from the Specifications and Plans which is necessaryto a clear understanding ' of the work,or should it appear various instructions are in conflict,then the Contractor shall secure written instructions from the Engineer before proceeding with the construction affected by such omissions or discrepancies. It is understood and agreed that the work shall be performed and completed according ' to the true spirit, meaning and intent of the contract, specifications and plans. GP-12.2 FIGURED DIMENSIONS TO GOVERN ' Dimensions"and elevations shown on the plans shall be accurately followed even though they differ from scaled measurements. No work shown on the plans,the dimensions of which are not indicated shall be executed until the required dimensions have been obtained from the Engineer. ' GP-12.3 CONTRACTOR TO CHECK PLANS AND SCHEDULES • The Contractor shall check all dimensions,elevations and quantities shown on the plans,-and schedules given to him by the Engineer,and shall notify the Engineer of any discrepancy between the plans and the conditions on the ground, or any error or omission in plans,or in the layout as given by stakes, points,or instructions,which he may discover in the course of the work. The Contractor will not be allowed to take ' advantage of any error or omission in the plans or contract documents,as full instructions will be furnished by the Engineer should such error or omission be discovered, and the Contractor shall carry out such instructions as if originally specified. . ' The apparent silence of the Plans and Specifications as to any detail or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any point, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practices, as accepted by the particular trades or industries involved, shall be used. GP-12.4 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS Reference to standard specifications of any technical society,organization or association,or to codes of ' local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative specification. adopted and published at the date of taking bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. GP-13 CONSTRUCTION REPRESENTATIVE AT PROJECT The City may appoint or employ such "Construction Representative" as the City may deem proper, to observe the work performed under this Contract,to the end that said work is performed, in substantial ' accordance with the plans and specifications therefor. • The Project Representative assumes no direction of employees of the Contractor or Subcontractors and ' no supervision of the construction activities or responsibility for their safety. The sold duty of the Project Representative during the construction is to the City to endeavor to protect against defects and deficiencies in the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of the Construction Representative ' so appointed, when the same are consistent with the obligations of this contract and the specifications therefor, provided, however, that should the Contractor object to any order given by the Construction ' Representative,the Contractor may make written appeal to the Engineer for his decision. The Construction Representative and other properly authorized representatives of the City shall be free at all times to perform their duties, an intimidation or attempted intimidation of any one of them by the ' Contractor or by any of his employees shall be sufficient reason, if the City so decides, to annul the contract. Such construction representation shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform said work 1 strictly in accordance with the plans and specifications or any modifications thereof as herein provided, and work not so constructed shall be removed and made good by the Contractor at his own expense,and free of all expense to the City, whenever so ordered by the Engineer, without reference to any previous , oversight in observation of work. Any defective material or workmanship may be rejected bythe Engineer at any time before the final acceptance of the work, even though the same may have been previously overlooked and estimated for payment. The Construction Representative shall have no authority to permit any deviation from the plans and 1 specifications except on written order from the Engineer,and the Contractor will be liable for any deviation except on such written order. ' All condemned work shall be promptly taken out and replaced by satisfactory work, and all condemned materials shall be promptly removed from the vicinity of the work. Should the Contractor fail or refuse to comply with instructions in this respect the City may,upon certification by the Engineer,withhold payment ' or proceed to terminate contracts as herein provided. Reexamination of questioned work may be ordered by the Engineer, and if so ordered the work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work be done in accordance with the Contract Documents,the City , shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If such work be found not in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall pay such cost,unless he shall show that defect in the work was caused by another contractor of the City and in that event the City shall pay such cost. ' The Contractor shall furnish samples of testing purposes of any material required by the Engineer, and shall furnish any information required concerning the nature or source of any material which he proposes ' to use. GP-14 LINES AND GRADES The Department of Community Development will set construction stakes establishing lines,scopes, and ' continuous profile grade in road work, and center-line and bench marks for culvert work, and appurtenances as may be deemed necessary, and will furnish the Contractor, with all necessary ' information relating to lines, slopes, and grades, to lay out the work correctly. The Contractor shall maintain these lines, grades, and bench marks and use them to lay out the work he is to perform under this contract. The Contractor shall notify the Department of Community Development not less than 48 hours before ' stakes are required. No claims shall be made because of delays if the contractors fail to give such notice. The Contractor shall carefully preserve stakes and bench marks. If such stakes and bench mark become ' damaged,lost,displaced,or removed by the Contractor,they shall be reset at his expense and deducted from the payment for the work. Any work done without being properly located and established by base lines,offset stakes,bench marks, ' or other basic reference points checked bythe Construction Representative maybe ordered removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. • i I ' GP-15 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MATERIALS • The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of all materials furnished by him, and he shall replace at his own cost and expense any and all such material found to be defective in design or manufacture,or which has been damaged after delivery. This includes the furnishing of all materials and labor required for replacement of any installed materials which is found to be defective at any time prior to the expiration of one year from the date of final payment. The manufacturer of pipe for use on this project shall certify in writing to the City that all materials furnished for use in this project do conform to these specifications. Whenever standard tests are conducted, he shall forward a copy of the test results to the City. II ' GP-16 WATER All water required for and in connection with the work to be performed shall be provided by the Contractor at his sole cost and expense. GP-17 POWER ' All power for lighting, operation of the Contractor's plant or equipment or for any other use by the Contractor, shall be provided by the Contractor at his sole cost and expense. GP-18 SUPERINTENDENCE AND WORKMANSHIP The Contractor shall keep on his work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any . necessary assistants. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be as binding as if given to.the Contractor. II ' The Contractor shall provide prope r to ols an d equipment and the services of all workmen mechanics tradesmen,and other employees necessary in the construction and execution'of the work contemplated and outlined herein. The employees of the Contractor shall be competent and willing to perform satisfactorily the work required of them. Any employee who is disorderly, intemperate or incompetent • or who neglects or refuses to perform his work in a satisfactorily manner, shall be promptly discharged. l j , It is called particularly to the Contractor's attention that only first class workmanship will be acceptable. 'i GP-19 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC Whenever any street is closed,the Police Department, Fire Department, and Ambulance Services shall ' be notified prior to the closing. When a portion of the project is closed to through traffic,the Contractor shall provide proper barricades and shall mark a detour route around the section of the project if applicable. The route of all detours shall be approved by the Director of Community Development. All detour signing shall conform to the latest edition of the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices". i I Throughout the project, wherever homes are served directly from a street or portion of a street which is to be reconstructed under this project,the Contractor shall make every effort to provide access to each home every night. This work shall be subsidiary to the construction and no direct payment will be made for it. GP-20 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS All streets,roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares which are closed to traffic shall be protected by means of effective barricades on which shall be placed acceptable warning signs. Barricades shall be located at the nearest intersecting public highway or street on each side of the blocked section. All open trenches and other excavations shall be provided with suitable barriers, signs, and lights to the extent that adequate protection is provided to the public. Obstructions, such as material piles and equipment, shall be provided with similar warning signs and lights. ' All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated by means of warning lights at night. All lights used • for this purpose shall be kept burning from sunset to sunrise. Materials stored upon or alongside public ' streets and highways shall be so placed,and the work at all times shall be so conducted,as to cause the minimum obstruction and inconvenience to the traveling public. 1 All barricades, signs, lights and other protective devices shall be installed and maintained in conformity with applicable statutory requirements, and in conformance with the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control • Devices. All necessary barricades, signs, lights and other protective devices will be furnished, installed ' and maintained by the Contractor. This work shall be subsidiary to the construction and no direct payment will be made for it. GP-21 EXISTING UNDERGROUND INSTALLATIONS AND STRUCTURES ' Pipe lines and other existing underground installations and structures in the vicinity of the work to be done hereunder are indicated on the plans according to the best information available to the City. The City ' does not guarantee the accuracy of such information. The Contractor shall make every effort to locate all underground pipe lines,conduits and structures by contacting owners of underground utilities and by prospecting in advance of the excavation. Any delays to the Contractor caused by pipe lines or other underground structures or obstructions not shown by the plans, or found in locations different than those indicated, shall not constitute a claim for extra work, additional payment or damages. , No payment.will be made to the Contractor for locating and protecting utilities and cooperating with their owners,and any damages caused to the utilities by the Contractor's negligence shall be repaired entirely at the Contractor's expense. ' Utilities, other than sanitary sewers and water mains, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, must be moved will be moved by the utility company at no cost to the Contractor. Sanitary sewers which must be ' moved shall be re-laid by the Contractor and paid for at the prices bid. Only sewers which must be moved because of direct conflict with the storm sewer conduit will be paid for in this manner. Sewers damaged by excavation but not in direct conflict with the storm sewer will be repaired at the Contractor's expense. GP-22 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY ' • The Contractor shall be accountable for any damages resulting from his operations. He shall be fully ' responsible for the protection of all persons including members of the public, employees of the City and employees of other contractors or subcontractors and all public and private property including structures, sewers and utilities above and below ground, along, beneath, above, across or near the site or sites of the work, or other persons or property which are in any manner affected by the prosecution of the work. ' The Contractor shall furnish and maintain all necessary safety equipment such as barriers,signs,warning lights and guards as required to provide adequate protection or persons and property. ' The Contractor shall give reasonable notice to the owner or owners of public or private property and utilities when such property is liable to injury or damage through the performance of the work, and shall make all necessary arrangements with such owner or owners relative to the removal and replacement ' or protection of such property or utilities. In an emergency affecting the safety of life or of the work or of adjoining property,the Contractor,without special instruction or authorization,is hereby permitted to act at his discretion to prevent such threatened ' loss or injury,and he shall so act. Any compensation,claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work, shall be determined by agreement or arbitration. The Contractor agrees to hold the City harmless from any and all loss or damages arising out of ' jurisdictional labor disputes or other labor troubles of any kind that may occur during the construction or performance of this contract. GP-23 GUARANTEE OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ' The Contractor hereby guarantees the work in connection with this contract against faulty materials or • poor workmanship during the period of one (1) year after the date of completion of the contract. ' i " 1 GP-24 NO WAIVER OF RIGHTS • Neither observation of work by the City or any of their officials, employees, or agents, nor any order by ' the City for payment of money, or any payment for, or acceptance of,the whole or any part of the work by the City, nor any extension of time, nor any possession taken by the City or its employees, shall operate as a waiver of any provision of this contract, or of any power herein reserved to the City, or any ' right to damages herein provided, nor shall any waiver of any breach in this contract be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. ' GP-25 USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS If-desired by the City,portions of the work may be placed in service when completed or partially completed and the Contractor shall give proper access to the work for this purpose;but such use and operation shall ' not constitute an acceptance of the work, and the Contractor shall be liable for defects due to faulty construction until the entire work under this Contract is finally accepted and for the guarantee period thereafter. ' GP-26 ADDITIONAL, OMITTED, OR CHANGED WORK The Owner,without invalidating the Contract,may order additional work to be done in connection with the ' Contract or may alter or deduct from the work,the Contract sum to be adjusted accordingly. All such work shall be executed to the same standards of workmanship and performance as though therein included. The Engineer shall have authority to make minor changes in the work, not involving cost, and not ' inconsistent with the purposes of the work. Except for adjustments of estimated quantities for unit price work or materials to conform to actual pay quantities therefor as may be provided for in the Special Conditions, all changes and alterations in the • terms or scope of the Contract shall be made under the authority of duly executed change orders issued and signed by the Owner and accepted and signed by the Contractor. All work increasing the cost shall be done as authorized by the Owner and ordered in writing by the Engineer, which order shall state the ' location,character,amount,and method of compensation. No additional or changed work shall be made unless in pursuance of such written order by the Engineer, and no claim for an addition to the Contract sum shall be valid unless so ordered. If the modification or alteration increases the amount of work to be done,and the added work or any part thereof is of a type and character which can be properly and fairly classified under one or more unit price items of the Proposal, then such added work or part thereof shall be paid for according to the amount ' actually done and at the applicable unit price or prices therefor. Otherwise, such work shall be paid for as "Extra Work" as hereinafter provided in this Article GP-26. If the modification or alteration decreases the amount of work to be done, such decrease shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages or anticipated profits on work affected by such decrease. Where the value of omitted work is not covered by applicable unit prices, the Engineer shall determine on an equitable basis the amount of: ' 1. Credit due the Owner for Contract work not done as a result of an authorized change. 2. Allowance to the Contractor for any actual loss incurred in connection with the purchase,delivery ' and subsequent disposal of materials or equipment required for use on the work planned and which could not be used in any part of the work as actually built. ' 3. Any other adjustment of the Contract amount where the method to be used in making such adjustments is not clearly defined in the contract documents. Statements for extra work shall be rendered by the Contractor not later than fifteen (15) days after the ' completion of each assignment of extra work and if found correct will be approved by the Engineer and submitted for payment with the next regular monthly estimate. II The Owner reserves the right to contract with any person or firm other than the Contractor for any or all ' extra work. The Contractor's attention is especially called to the fact that he shall be entitled to no claim • for damages or anticipated profits on any portion of the work that may be omitted. ' Extra Work: (a) The term "Extra Work" shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required to ' accomplish any change or alteration in or addition to the work shown by the Plans or reasonably implied by the Specifications and not covered by the Contract proposal items and which is not otherwise provided under this Article GP-26. (b) The Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Engineer when authorized by the Owner. The compensation to be paid the Contractor for performing extra work shall be determined by one or more of the following methods: ' 1. Method A: By agreed unit price 2. Method B: By agreed lump sum ' 3. Method C: If neither Method A or B can be agreed upon before the work is started,then the work shall be by force account as per Section 109, Measurement and Payment, of the Missouri Standard Specification for Highway Construction,as published bythe Missouri State Highwayand ' Transportation Commission. GP-27 SUSPENSION OF WORK ' The Owner may at any time suspend the work, or any part thereof by giving ten (10) days notice to the Contractor in writing. The work shall be resumed by the Contractor within ten (10) days after the date , fixed in the written notice from the Owner to the Contractor to do so. • But if the work, or any part thereof, shall be stopped by the notice in writing aforesaid, and if the Owner does not give notice in writing to the Contractor to resume within a reasonable period of time, then the , Contractor may abandon that portion of the work so suspended and he will be entitled to the estimates and payments for all work done on the portions abandoned, if any. GP-28 OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK ' If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any provision of this contract, the Owner, after ten (10) days written notice to the Contractor, may, without prejudice to any ' other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor. GP-29 OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT ' If the Contractor should be adjudged a bankrupt, or if he should make a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed on account of his insolvency, or if he should ' persistently or repeatedly refuse or should fail, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials, or if he should fail to make prompt payment to subcontractors or for material or labor, or persistently disregard laws, ordinances or the instructions of the Engineer, or otherwise be guilty of a substantial violation of any provision of the , Contract, then the Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the Contractor five(5)days written notice,terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the premises and of all materials, tools, and appliances thereon and finish the work by whatever ' method he may deem expedient. In such case, no further payment will be made the Contractor until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the contract price shall exceed the expense of finishing the work, including compensation for ' additional managerial and administrative services,such expenses shall be paid to the Contractor. If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. f GP-30 CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT If the work should be stopped under an order of any court, or other public authority,for a period of three months,through no act or fault of the Contractor or of anyone employed by him,then the Contractor may, upon five(5)days written notice to the Owner and the Engineer,stop work or terminate his contract and recover from the Owner payment for all work executed and any loss sustained upon any plant or materials ' and reasonable profit and damages. GP-31 LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES All loss or damage arising out of the nature of the work to be done,of from the action of the elements,or from floods or overflows,or from ground water,or from any unusual obstruction of difficulty, or any other natural or existing circumstances either known or unforeseen, which may be encountered in the ' prosecution of the said work,shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. GP-32 SUNDAY, HOLIDAY AND NIGHT WORK ' No work shall be done between the hours of 6:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m., nor on Sundays or legal holidays, without the written approval of the City. However, work necessary in case of emergencies or for the protection of equipment or finished work may be done without the City s approval. iNight work may be established by the Contractor as a regular procedure with the written permission of the City; such permission however, may be revoked at any time by the City if the Contractor fails to maintain adequate equipment and supervision for the proper prosecution and control of the work at night. GP-33 UNFAVORABLE CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS During unfavorable weather, wet ground, or other suitable construction conditions, the Contractor shall confine his operations to work which will not be affected adversely thereby. No portion of the work shall be constructed under conditions which would affect adversely the quality or efficiency thereof, unless special means or precautions are taken by the Contractor to perform the work in a proper and satisfactory manner. GP-34 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT iUnless specifically provided otherwise in each case,all materials and equipment furnished for permanent installation in the work shall be new, unused, and undamaged when installed or otherwise incorporation in the work. No such material or equipment shall be used by the Contractor for any purpose other than that intended or specified, unless such use is specifically authorized by the Engineer in each case. GP-35 DEFENSE OF SUITS In case any action at law or suit in equity is brought against the City or any officer or agent of them for or on account of the failure,omission,or neglect of the Contractor to do and perform any of the covenants, acts, matters, or things by this contract undertaken to be done or performed, or for the injury or damage caused by the negligence or alleged negligence of the Contractor or his subcontractors or his or their agents, or in connection with any claim or claims based on the lawful demands of subcontractors, workmen, material men, or suppliers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies incurred in the fulfillment of this contract,the Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the City and their officers and agents, of and from all losses, damages, costs, expenses, judgments, or decrees whatever arising out of such action or suit that may be brought as aforesaid. GP-36 CHANGE ORDER Any changes or additions to the scope of work shall be through a written order from the Engineer to the Contractor directing such changes in the work as made necessary or desirable by unforeseen conditions ' or events discovered or occurring during the progress of the work. 1 GP-37 CONTRACT TIME ' The time for the completion of the work is specified and it is an essential part of the contract. The Contractor will not be entitled to any extension of contract time because of unsuitable weather condition ' unless suspension of the work for such conditions was authorized in writing by the Engineer. If the time for the completion of the work is based upon working days, this time will be specified in the contract. A working day is defined as any day when, in the judgment of the Engineer, soil and weather conditions are such as would permit any then major operation of the project for six (6) hours or over unless other unavoidable conditions prevent the Contractor's operation. If conditions are such as to stop ' work in less than six (6) hours, the day will not be counted as a working day. No working days will be counted from December 15 to March 15, both dates inclusive. Saturdays, Sundays, and City holidays will not be counted as working days any time during the year. ' GP-38 CONTRACT TIME EXTENSION The Engineer may make allowance for time lost due to causes which he deems justification for extension ' of contract time. If the Contractor claims an extension of contract time on the grounds that he is unable to work due to causes beyond his control, he shall state his reasons in writing,furnish proof to establish his claim and state the approximate number of days he estimates he will be delayed. Notice of intention to claim an extension of contract time on the above grounds shall be filed with the Engineer at the time the cause or causes occur and the claim shall be filed in writing within 30 days after the claimed cause for the delay has ceased to exist. GP-39 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Time is an essential element of the contract and it is therefore important that the work be pressed ' vigorously to completion. Should the Contractor or in case of default the surety fail to complete the work within the time specified in the contract, or within such extra time as may be allowed in the manner set out in the preceding sections, a deduction of an amount as set out in the contract will be made for each day and every calendar day that such contract remains uncompleted after the time allowed for the ' completion. The said amount set out in the proposal is hereby agreed upon, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages for loss to the City and the public, after the expiration of the time stipulated in the contract,and will be deducted from any money due the Contractor under the contract,and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for any and all liquidated damages. Permitting the Contractor to continue and finish the work or any part of it after the expiration of the specified time, or after any extension of the time, shall in no way operate as a waiver on the part of the City or any of its rights under the contract. GP-40 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT i (a) BASIS FOR PAYMENT Contractor will be paid for quantities actually constructed or performed as determined by field measurement (except as may be hereinafter provided) at the unit price bid for the items listed in the schedule of the Bid or for such extra work as may be authorized and approved by the Engineer. The cost of incidental work not listed in the schedule of the Bid but necessary for the completion of the project shall be included in bid items. (b) DEDUCTIONS FOR UNCORRECTED WORK , If the Engineer deems it expedient not to correct work that has been damaged or that was not done in accordance with the Contract, an equitable deduction from the Contract price shall be made therefore. ' (c) LUMP SUM ITEMS Payment for each lump sum item shall be at the lump sum bid for the item, complete in place,and shall ' include the costs of all labor, materials, tools, and equipment to construct the item as described herein and to the limits shown on the plans. ' (d) PARTIAL PAYMENT • Partial payment will be made on a monthly basis. The payment shall be based on the work that has been found generally acceptable under the contract by the Engineer or inspector. A retainer equal to 10%of the amount of work completed to date shall be withheld. ' (e) ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance,the Engineer will promptly make such inspection, and when he finds the work acceptable under the Contract and the Contract fully performed he will promptly issue a final certificate, over his own signature, stating that the work required by this contract has been completed and is acceptable_by him under the terms and conditions thereof, and the entire balance found to be due the Contractor, including the retained ' percentage, shall be paid to the Contractor by the City of Jefferson within thirty(30) days after the date of said final certificate. (f) AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE ' Monies due to the Contractor will not be delivered to the Contractor without presentation to the Department of Community Development an Affidavit of Compliance with Prevailing Wage Law on ' prescribed form attached to the back of these contract documents. GP-41 RELEASE OF LIABILITY The acceptance by the Contractor of the last payment shall operate as and shall be a release to the Owner and every officer and agent thereof,from all claims and liability to the Contractor for anything done or furnished for, or relating to the work, or for any act or neglect of the Owner or of any person relating ' to or affecting the work. • GP-42 CERTIFICATIONS t 1 GP-42.1 All suppliers of materials such as drainage pipe or handrail and all suppliers of asphaltic concrete or portland cement concrete mixtures shall certify in writing that the product as supplied conforms fully with these specifications. Such certification shall be delivered ' in triplicate to the Department of Community Development at least 24 hours before the product is to be used on the project. GP-42.2 The City, at its option, may perform or have performed such tests as may be deemed ' necessary to further assure that only specified materials are incorporated into the work. GP-43 LOCAL PREFERENCE ' In making purchases or in letting contracts for the performance of any job or service,the purchasing agent shall give preference to all firms,corporations or individuals which maintain offices or places of business within the corporate limits of the City of Jefferson, when the quality of the commodity or performance ' promised is equal or better and the price quote*l is the same or less. GP-44 PREFERENCE FOR U.S. MANUFACTURED GOODS ' On purchases in excess of$5,000,the Ci"hall select products manufactured,assembled or.produced in the United States, if quantity,quality,and price are equal. Every contract for public works construction or maintenance in excess of$5,000 shall contain a provision requesting the contractor to use American ' products in the performance of the contract. GP-45 AWARD OF CONTRACT-REJECTION OF BIDS ' All bidders are required to submit with bid Minority Business Enterprise Eligibility Forms for all subcontractors and suppliers who the contractor intends to use on the project. Compliance with this requirement and the Minority Business Enterprise Program shall be a consideration for award of this ' contract. The contract will be awarded to the lowest and best responsible bidder on the base bid proposal, ' complying with the conditions of the Advertisement for bids and Specifications, providing the bid is reasonable and it is in the interest of the City of Jefferson, Missouri to accept same. The bidder to whom an award is made will be notified at the earliest possible date. The City of Jefferson, however, reserves ' the right to reject any and all bids and to waive all informalities in bids received whenever such rejection or waiver is in their interest. GP-46 AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE WITH PUBLIC WORKS' CONTRACTS LAW ' Upon completion of project and prior to final payment,each contractor and subcontractor hereunder shall file with the City of Jefferson, Missouri, Department of Community Development, an affidavit stating that ' the contractor or subcontractor has fully complied with the provisions and requirements of Section 290.290,RSMo(1994 as amended),an act relating to public works contracts. The City of Jefferson shall not issue a final payment until such affidavit is filed. GP-47 MISSOURI LABORER REQUIREMENT ' Whenever there is a period of excessive unemployment in Missouri, which is defined as any month ' immediately following two consecutive calendar months during which the level of unemployment in the State has exceeded five percent(5%)as measured by the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics in its monthly publication of employment and unemployment figures, only Missouri laborers or laborers from non- restrictive states may be hired by the contractor or subcontractors to work on this Public Works'contract. ' An exception shall exist when Missouri laborers or laborers from non-restrictive states are not available or are incapable or performing the particular type of work involved, if so certified by the contractor or subcontractor hereunder and approved by the Director of Community Development of the City of , Jefferson, Missouri. Nor does this provision apply to regularly employed non-resident executive, • supervisory or technical personnel or projects where federal aid funds are being utilized in the act and this provision would conflict with any federal statute, rule or regulation. Laborers from non-restrictive states means persons who are residents of a state which has not enacted ' state laws restricting Missouri laborers from working on public works projects in that state,as determined by the Missouri Labor and Industrial Relations Commission. A Missouri laborer means any person who ' has resided in Missouri for at least thirty(30)days and intends to become or remain a Missouri resident. GP-48 LIABILITY FOR COMPLIANCE WITH PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTS LAW AND MISSOURI LABORER REQUIREMENT ' In the event a contractor or subcontractor hereunder files with the City of Jefferson an affidavit stating that the contractor or subcontractor has fully complied with the provisions and requirements of Section ' 290.290, RSMo (1994 as amended), when in fact the contractor or subcontractor has not complied, to the extent that any liability is assessed against the City of Jefferson,Missouri,or any additional expenses are incurred by the City of Jefferson, Missouri, any contractor making the false statement, or whose subcontractor makes a false statement, shall hold harmless and indemnify the City for any liability ' assessed against it or any additional expenses incurred. Any contractor who fails to comply with the requirements of hiring only Missouri laborers or laborers from ' non-restrictive states,absent statutory exceptions,whenever there is a period of excessive unemployment in Missouri,agrees to hold harmless and indemnifythe City of Jefferson,Missouri,for any liabilitythat may be assessed against it or any additional expenses incurred by the City of Jefferson, Missouri, because of the contractor or subcontractor's failure to comply. ' • END OF GENERAL PROVISIONS ' ' SPECIAL PROVISIONS ' • FORWARD: The provisions of this section take precedence over any other provisions in these specifications. SP-1 PARTIAL ACCEPTANCE OF BID ' The City eserves the right to accept an art or the entire bid for the roject. tY 9 P Y P project. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Prior to starting work, a pre-construction conference will be held to discuss the project, its ' scheduling and its coordination with the work of others. It is expected that this conference will be attended by representatives of the Owner, the Engineer, the Contractor and his Subcontractors, and the Utilities, as well as representatives of any ' other affected agencies which the Owner may wish to invite. The work schedule specified in Section IB-23 of the Information for Bidders will be ' submitted at the conference. SP-3 PREVAILING WAGE LAW ' Bidders are hereby advised that compliance with the Prevailing Wage Law, Section 290.210 through 290.340 inclusive of the Revised Statutes of Missouri, is a requirement of this contract. (Reference Section I13-20) • Section 290.265 requires that a clearly legible statement of all prevailing hourly wage rates should be kept posted in a prominent and easily accessible place at the site by each contractor and subcontractor engaged in public works projects, and.that such notice shall remain posted during the full time. SP-4 PROOF OF INSURANCE All certificates of insurance provided for this project shall be insured directly from the company affording coverage. Certification from a local agent in not acceptable without the necessary paperwork empowering and authorizing the agent to sign the surety's name. ' In addition, when an aggregate amount is included, a statement of the amount of that aggregate available to date shall also be attached. SP-5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS All construction details included with the plans, in the Specification and Contract Documents, in the Jefferson City,Technical Specifications, and/or the City of Jefferson Standard Drawings Revised Edition 1/2006 shall be used in constructing this project. ' The City's Technical Specifications can be found on the City's website at www.ieffcitymo.org and'are available upon request from the Department of Community Development. • 1 SP-6 SOIL IN AREAS TO BE SEEDED • The top six(6) inches of all areas of the project to be vegetated shall be free of rocks, ' stones and clods prior to seeding. This may require the contractor to utilize a mechanical rock rake, hand picking of stones, and/or placement of six(6) inches of clean topsoil in ' those areas to be vegetated. All areas to be vegetated shall be inspected prior to seeding, and any deficiency shall be corrected prior to the seed application. 1 • 1 1 1 1 1 1 • � Building Site � Specifications 1 1 1 1 1 � 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 � 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS ' DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary 3 Pages ' 01230 Alternates 3 Pages 01250 Contract Modification Procedures 3 Pages 01270 Unit Prices 2 Pages ' 01290 Payment Procedures 4 Pages 01310 Project Management and Coordination 4 Pages 01330 Submittal Procedures 8 Pages ' 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 6 Pages 01700 Execution Requirements 5 Pages 01770 Closeout Procedures 4 Pages 01781 _ Project Record Documents 3 Pages , 01782 Operation and Maintenance Data 7 Pages DIVISION 2—SITE CONSTRUCTION 02300 Earthwork 9 Pages ' 02751 Cement Concrete Pavement 8 Pages 02764 Pavement Joint-Sealants 4 Pages ' DIVISION 3- CONCRETE 03300 Cast-ln-Place Concrete 14 Pages ' DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 14 Pages ' • DIVISION 5 - METALS , 05500 Metal Fabrications 6 Pages 05521 Pipe and Tube Railings 6 Pages DIVISION 6 -WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 10 Pages ' 06160 Sheathing 5 Pages 06176 Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses 6 Pages 06402• Interior Architectural Woodwork 7 Pages DIVISION 7 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION ' 07210 Building Insulation 5 Pages ' 07920 Joint Sealants 8 Pages DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 9 Pages , 08211 Flush Wood Doors 5 Pages 08361 Sectional Overhead Doors 9 Pages , 08411 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 10 Pages 08520 Aluminum Windows 8 Pages • 08710 Door Hardware 13 Pages 08800 Glazing 8 Pages ' DIVISION 9 - FINISHES TABLE OF CONTENTS 0705A TOC - 1 ' ' 09250 Gypsum Board 6 Pages 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 5 Pages .' 09653 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 4 Pages 09910 Painting 11 Pages • DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES ' 10155 Toilet Compartments 4 Pages 10520 Fire Protection Specialties 6 Pages ' 10801 Toilet and Bath Accessories 4 Pages DIVISION 11 —EQUIPMENT - Not Applicable DIVISION 12—FURNISHINGS—Not Applicable DIVISION 13—SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13125 Metal Building Systems 26 Pages ' DIVISION 15— MECHANICAL ' 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 7 Pages DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16050 Basic Electrical Materials And Methods 7 Pages 16231 Electrical Emergency/Standby Power Systems Generator Set 14 Pages 16415 Electrical Emergency/Standby Power Systems Transfer Switch 5 Pages TABLE OF CONTENTS 0705A TOC -2 SECTION 01100 -SUMMARY • 1 PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. ' 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Work restrictions. 4. Specification formats and conventions. , B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS , A. Project Identification: STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING. t 1. Project Location: HYDE PARK, Jefferson City, Missouri. B. Owner: CITY OF JEFFERSON. ' 1. Owner's address: 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101 C. Work Description: ' 1. The work consist of construction of a new Street Maintenance Building for the City of ' Jefferson. The building will be a metal building system with concrete footings, foundations and floor slabs. The building will include garage bays with sectional overhead doors, office spaces of wood framed & gypsum board construction, mezzanine space over office areas, and a vehicle wash bay with partial height concrete masonry units (CMU). Interior ' finishes include sealed concrete floors, resilient base, stair treads and risers, painted gypsum board, and acoustical suspended ceiling systems. Other building elements include metal doors and frames, flush wood doors, casework, aluminum windows, toilet ' compartments, fire protection specialties and toilet accessories. Exterior construction includes concrete walks, curb &gutters, and pavements. 2. The facility will include HVAC systems, plumbing, fire protection systems, and electrical ' power and lighting systems. SUMMARY 0705A 01100- 1 ' ' 3. A building pad for the new facility has been prepared by the Owner. The Contractor will • assume responsibility for the pad upon commencement of the Project. This includes maintaining the pad during footing and under-slab rough-in excavations and adding base ' rock, as necessary to maintain the proper elevation of the sub-grade, prior to concrete slab placement. ' 1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 USE OF PREMISES ' A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits. B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. ' 1. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use,these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. • 1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than one week in advance of proposed utility interruptions. ' 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. B. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes. 1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's"MasterFormat" numbering system. ' 1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross- referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers ' are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. • 2. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. SUMMARY 0705A 01100-2 B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. • These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract , Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words , shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. ' Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. , a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION Not Used)' END OF SECTION 01100 ' 1 • SUMMARY 0705A 01100- 3 1 !" SECTION 01230-ALTERNATES , PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if ' Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract • Sum to incorporate alternate .into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES ' A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. ' 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. ' C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Scheduler A Schedule of Alternates is included under Part 3 of this Section. ' PART 2—PRODUCTS (Not Used) 1 ' ALTERNATES 0705A 01230- 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION t 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Alternates and to select Alternates in ' any order. B. Alternate No. 1 — CONCRETE SITE PAVING: State amount to ADD to the project Base Bid ' for all materials, labor, installation, overhead and profit as shown in the drawings and specifications to provide 6-inch thick (4,000 psi) concrete paving at the site, as shown on the ' Civil drawing and per specifications. C. Alternate No. 2 — STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF SYSTEM: State amount to ADD to the project Base Bid for all materials, labor, installation, overhead and profit as shown in the drawings and specifications to provide trapezoidal-rib, standing-seam metal roof panel system using concealed clips in lieu of lap-seam metal roof system with exposed fasteners, as specified in Section 13125-Metal Building Systems. ' D. Alternate No. 3— EMERGENCY GENERATOR: State amount to ADD to the project Base Bid -for all materials, labor, installation, overhead and profit as shown in the drawings and specifications to provide emergency generator, including emergency generator equipment, unit ' connections, accessories, etc. for a complete functional and operating system as specified in Division 16000 specificationS. Electrical conduit, wiring, transfer switch, and all other equipment inside the building and conduit&wiring to generator pad as shown on drawings shall ' be involved in the base bid. E. Alternate No.4 — STRUCTURAL STEEL MEZZANINE FLOOR SYSTEM: State amount to ADD to the project Base Bid for all materials, labor, installation, overhead and profit as shown in • ' the drawings and specifications to provide a structural steel and concrete designed mezzanine floor system, in lieu of wood joist & truss joist floor system bearing on wood wall framing; including structural design by registered structural engineer, reinforced concrete footings, steel ' columns located in shown partition walls, steel beams, steel joists, metal deck, 3-inch minimum thick concrete floor slab on deck with wire mesh reinforcing, and all other required bolts, plates, angles, welding, etc. for a complete structural designed floor system to support 125 Ibs per square foot live load. ' F. Alternate No. 5 — DELETE INTERIOR STEEL BOLLARDS: State amount to DEDUCT from the project Base Bid for all materials, labor, installation, overhead and profit to delete all the ' interior steel bollards on each side of each overhead garage door, including steel pipe, concrete footing, concrete fill, and painting as shown in drawing and specifications. All exterior steel bollards, concrete footings, fill and painting shall remain in the base bid. G. Alternate No. 6 — DELETE ONE METAL BUILDING SYSTEM BAY: State amount to ' DEDUCT from the project Base Bid for all materials, labor, installation, overhead and profit to delete one middle (interior) 32 feet by 60 feet metal building system bay on the North wing of ' the building, reducing length of North wing by 32 feet; including structural framing system, concrete foundation /footing, concrete floor slab, bollards, metal roof and wall panels, overhead doors (4), trench drain plumbing, mechanical heating, electrical, etc. as shown in drawing and specifications. Alternate includes keeping the end wash bay and moving it south 32 feet and ' adding an expandable end wall rigid structural frame system on the North end of the building, to allow for future expansion of North wing to the North. H. Alternate No. 7 — DELETE TWO METAL BUILDING SYSTEM BAYS: State amount to , DEDUCT from the project Base Bid for all materials, labor, installation, overhead and profit to • delete two middle (interior) 32 feet by 60 feet metal building system bays on the North wing of the building, reducing length of North wing by 64 feet; including structural framing system, ' concrete foundations / footing, concrete floor slab, bollards, metal roof and wall panels, overhead doors (8), trench drain plumbing, mechanical heating, electrical, etc. as shown in ALTERNATES 0705A 01230-2 ' ' drawing and specifications. Alternate includes keeping the end wash bay and moving it south 32 feet and adding an expandable end wall rigid structural frame system on the North end of the • building, to allow for future expansion of North wing to the North. ' I. Alternate No. 8-BUILDING FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM: State amount to ADD to the project Base Bid for all materials, labor, _installation, overhead and profit to design and provide a complete building automatic fire sprinkler system; including design of the system by a qualified ' and registered professional engineer to conform to NFPA 13 and IBC 2003, submittal of design & plans to City of Jefferson for review, inspected and approved prior to occupancy by a qualified inspector, and furnishing all materials & labor for a complete functional operating system per NFPA 13. The work shall include enlarging the water service entrance shown on the drawings to accommodate the system, enlargement of Janitor Room #111 into Women's Locker to accommodate the-appropriate piping, valves, etc., providing all piping, valves, controls, back- flow preventers, etc., installation of fire alarm panel for monitoring the system and notifying ' proper authorities and all other additions, changes, etc. to accommodate the complete systems, as approved by Owner. END OF SECTION 01230 1 1 1 1 1 • ' ALTERNATES 0705A 01230- 3 SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS , A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modificatigns. ' ..y 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK ' A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." ' 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS ' A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Owner / Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and ' Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Owner/Architect are for information only. Do not consider ' them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. , a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey , data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. ' d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an t extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Owner Architect. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 0705A 01250 - 1 ' 1 ' I. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and-the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the ' proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. ' 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed . change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Overhead and Profit on Change Orders, Work Authorizations and Construction Change Directives shall be applied as follows: 1. The overhead and profit charge by the Contractor and all subcontractors shall" be ' considered to include, but is not limited to: performance/payment bond, job site office expense, incidental job burdens, truck expense including mileage, small hand tools, project supervision including field supervision, company benefits and general office overhead. 2. The percentages for overhead and profit charged on Change Orders shall be negotiated and may vary according to the nature, extent and complexity of the work involved. ' HOWEVER, THE OVERHEAD AND PROFIT FOR THE CONTRACTOR OR SUBCONTRACTOR ACTUALLY PERFORMING THE WORK SHALL NOT EXCEED 12%. WHEN ONE OR MORE TIERS OF SUBCONTRACTORS ARE USED, IN NO ' EVENT SHALL ANY CONTRACTOR OR SUBCONTRACTOR RECEIVE AS OVERHEAD AND PROFIT MORE .THAN 6% OF THE COST OF THE WORK PERFORMED BY ANY OF HIS SUBCONTRACTORS. IN NO CASE SHALL THE TOTAL OVERHEAD AND PROFIT PAID BY THE OWNER ON ANY CHANGE ORDER ' EXCEED TWENTY FIVE PERCENT (25%) OF THE COST OF MATERIALS, LABOR AND EQUIPMENT NECESSARY TO PUT THE CHANGE ORDER WORK IN PLACE. 3. On proposals covering both increases and decreases in the amount of this contract, the ' application of overhead and profit shall be on the net change in the cost of the work. 4. The percentages for overhead and profit credit to the Owner on Change Orders that are ' SOLELY decreases in the quantity of work or materials shall be negotiated, and may vary according to the nature, extent and complexity of the work involved, but in no case shall be less than a total of TEN PERCENT (10%). ' D. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. ' 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Owner / Architect will issue a Change Order for ' signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. ' CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 0705A 01250-2 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Owner / Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a ' change in the Work,for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It ' also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the ' [Construction] [Work] Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary , to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) ' PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) , END OF SECTION 01250 I 1 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 0705A 01250-3 , • SECTION 01270- UNIT PRICES ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. ' B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and ' handling Change Orders. ' 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by ' • appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires ' establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use ' of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. ' D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. • ' UNIT PRICES 0705A 01270 - 1 PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) • PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES , A. Unit Price No. 1 —CONCRETE SIDEWALK: 1. Description: More or Less 6-inch thick concrete sidewalk, including materials, labor, 1 installation, overhead and profit; from quantities shown on Civil drawings and included in the Base Bid. 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Yard. ' B. Unit Price o. 2—CONCRETE CURB ce E &GUTTER: 1. Description: More or Less City standard concrete curb & gutter, including materials, labor, , installation, overhead and profit; from quantities shown on drawings and included in the Base Bid. 2. Unit of Measurement: Lineal Foot. ' C. Unit Price No. 3—CONCRETE SITE PAVEMENT: 1. Description: More or Less 6-inch thick concrete site paving, including materials, labor, ' installation, overhead and profit; from quantities shown on drawings and included in the Alternate Bid. 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Yard. • ' END OF SECTION 01270 ' • 1 UNIT PRICES 0705A 01270-2 ' • SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES tPART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures".for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. ' 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's • Applications for Payment. ' 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES ' A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms ' and schedules, including the following: a. . Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than ten (10)days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. ' B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 0705A 01290- 1 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the ' following for each item listed: • a. Related Specification Section or Division. ' b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers)that affect value. g. Dollar value. ' 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, , where appropriate. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated , and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, ' include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. 6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. ' 7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine ' quantities. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual , work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. ' 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. ' 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT ' A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Owner/Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement ' between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application • for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 0705A 01290-2 C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation • Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. ' 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. ' 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit(3) signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to ' Owner/Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate ' information about application. F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's ' liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. ' 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit • waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. ' G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: ' 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule(preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of preconstruction conference. 12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 13. Performance and payment bonds. ' 14. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. • 1 ' PAYMENT PROCEDURES 0705A 01290- 3 H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. ' 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued ' previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting ' documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. ' 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. ' 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. ' 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. ' 9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) ' • PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) ' END OF SECTION 01290 1 • PAYMENT PROCEDURES 0705A 01290 -4 , • SECTION 01310- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on ' Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Conservation, 3. Coordination Drawings. 4. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 5. Project meetings. ' B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor. ' C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: • 1. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general ' installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of bench marks and control points. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures"for coordinating Contract closeout. i1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures • required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. ' PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0705A 01310- 1 C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts • and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not , limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. ' 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. , 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities. ' D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. ' 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability ' necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base • Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: , a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicate required installation sequences. ' C. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Owner / Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. ' 3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Owner / Architect will return one copy. a. Submit five copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and ' maintenance manuals. Owner / Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone • numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned , to Project. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0705A 01310 - 2 , C . 1. Post copies of list in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list • current at all times. 1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS ' A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise coordinated or approved by Owner/Architect. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. _ Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. ' 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. ' B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 10 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. ' Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: • a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. ' C. Critical work sequencing. d. Designation of responsible personnel. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for requests for interpretations (RFIs). II 1 g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. i ' j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of Record Documents. I. Use of the premises and existing building. ' M. Work restrictions. n. Owner's occupancy requirements. ' o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p. Construction waste management. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. S. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. First aid. ' U. Security. V. Progress cleaning. W. Working hours. 3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. • C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals. Coordinate dates of ' meetings with preparation of payment requests. �' PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0705A 01310 -3 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, • subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as , appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. , Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that ' current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: • 1) Interface requirements. , 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. ' 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. ' 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. ' 15) Requests for interpretations (RFIs). 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Owner/Architect will record and distribute to Contractor the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Contractor shall distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of , progress since the previous meeting and report. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Construction Schedule after each progress meeting ' where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) , PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01310 ' • PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0705A 01310-4 ' 1 • SECTION 01330 -SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop ' Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures"for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination"for submitting and distributing ' meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures"for submitting warranties. 4. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 5. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. . 6. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Owner/Architect's approval. ' Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. ' 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. ' B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. `E ' SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0705A 01330- 1 a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination 1 with other submittals until related submittals are received. • C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as ' follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if ' processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. ' 2. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Owner / Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. a. Mechanical equipment. ' b. Electrical Equipment. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for processing each resubmittal. ' 4. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. ' D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. ' 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: ' a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. , d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. ' g. Name of manufacturer. h. Unique identifier, including revision number. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. t k. Other necessary identification. E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on , submittals. Provide written explanation of reasons for deviations on or with submittal. F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Owner/ Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal ' may serve as final submittal. G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and ' handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Owner / Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant ' information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents. • SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0705A 01330-2 ' ' including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the • related submittal. ' 2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: ' a. Project name. b. Date. C. Destination (To:). ' d. Source(From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. ' h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. i. Remarks. j. Signature of transmitter. tH. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers,- subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. ' I. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Owner / Architect in connection with construction. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS i ' A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit at least eight (8) copies of each submittal, unless otherwise required. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. ' B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. ' 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. ' 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. ' f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. ' i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. • k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. I. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. ' SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0705A 01330-3 M. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. • C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base ' Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: ' a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. ' d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. ' f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. ' i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. I. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. ' 2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop ' Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 4. Number of Copies: Submit at least eight(8) prints where prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain three prints; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned print as a Project Record Drawing • ' D. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." , E. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: 1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements"for mockups. ' 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 3. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared ' from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or ' containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. ' 4. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. ' b. Product name or name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. ' 5. Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's • letterhead, provide the following: 1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0705A 01330-4 ' ' 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. ' 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. ' 1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. ' 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. ' 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 1 "Construction Progress Documentation." C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of ' firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. ' D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel ' comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and • Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. ' F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project. ' G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. ' H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements. ' I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance'with requirements. J. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with ' requirements. K. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." • ' SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0705A 01330-6 L. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents , manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a • product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of , manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. ' 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. ' 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. M. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: ' 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. ' 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. ' 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. ' 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. N. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of ' coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. • PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW ' A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with ' General Contractor's approval stamp before submitting to Architect. 1. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of ' reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 OWNER/ARCHITECT'S ACTION ' A. General: Owner / Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval ' stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Owner / Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate ' corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: • SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0705A 01330-7 ' 1. Final Unrestricted Release: When the Owner / Architect marks a submittal "Approved," • the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When the Owner / Architect marks a submittal "Approved as Noted,' the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations.or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. ' Final payment depends on that compliance. 3. Returned for Resubmittal: When the Owner/Architect marks a submittal " Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including ' purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action-mark. 1 a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit' at the Project site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 4. Other Action: Where a submittal is for information or record purposes or special processing or other activity, the Owner/Architect will return the submittal marked "Action Not Required." ' C. Informational Submittals: Owner / Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. ' END OF SECTION 01330 1 1 • SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0705A 01330-8 SECTION 01500 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and ' protection facilities. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work t restrictions. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of ' implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning requirements. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. ' • 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. ' 1.4 USE CHARGES ' A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and ' authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water Service: Water from nearby water system (City water line) is available for use without ' metering and without payment of use charges. Contractor responsible for providing connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service: Electric power from nearby electric system (Ameren UE) is available for ' use. Contractor shall be responsible for providing connections, extensions and payment of services, as required for construction operations. 1 • TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0705A 01500 - 1 ' t1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' • A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each ' temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. ' 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails. ' B. Portable Fencing: Orange plastic security fencing; minimum 4 feet high; anchored at 15 feet, maximum intervals. ' 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature ' controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: ' 1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. ' 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack board. ' 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F. 5. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. ' C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. • TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0705A 01500-2 2.3 EQUIPMENT • A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by , locations and classes of fire exposures. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL , A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the ' Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION , A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be 1 interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. • ' C. Water Service: Water from nearby water system (City water line) is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Contractor responsible for providing 1 connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of , construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities ' for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Electric power from nearby electric system (Ameren UE) is available for ' use. Contractor shall be responsible for providing connections, extensions and payment of services, as required for construction operations. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for ' construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. • TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0705A 01500 - 3 ' ' 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. ' I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line for each field office. ' 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in ' each field office. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. ' g. Principal subcontractors'field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: • 1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and . sheds located within ' construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use ' permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. ' 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. ' C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary.facilities. ' 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. E. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs as indicated on Drawings. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. • 1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. ' TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0705A 01500-4 F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle ' P q • waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning requirements. ' G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and , equipment and not temporary facilities. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct ' construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and ' discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during ' construction until permanent vegetation has been established. C. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around ' excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line , of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure ' fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. ' 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations and as indicated on Drawings. F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially ' completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. , G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. H. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in , progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate ' temporary enclosures. • TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0705A 01500- 5 ' 1 ' I. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with 1 NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar 1 sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be ' followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 1 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. 1 B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. i 1 C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. 1 D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, 1 clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. 1 Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." 1 END OF SECTION 01500 1 1 1 i r 1 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0705A 01500 -6 1 SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary t Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: ' 1. Construction layout. 2. General installation of products. 3. Progress cleaning. ' 4. Starting and adjusting. 5. Protection of installed construction. 6. Correction of the Work. ' B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures"for submitting surveys. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other ' construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services, including invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer. B. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. ' 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. , EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 0705A 01700 - 1 t 1 ' 3.2 PREPARATION • A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck ' measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. _Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction-progress to avoid delaying the t Work. B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown . diagrammatically on Drawings. ' C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a Request for Information (RFI) to Architect. ' Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. ' 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on ' Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly-., ' B. General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of ' construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. • 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. ' 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. ' C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. ' D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor level, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level ' foundations from two or more locations. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING ' A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control ' points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written ' approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to • Architect before proceeding. 1 ' EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 0705A 01700-2 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base ' replacements on the original survey control points. • B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two (2) permanent benchmarks on Project ' site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record ' Documents. 3.5 INSTALLATION ' A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and ' elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. ' 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 9 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling. ' B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. , C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or ' loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. ' F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that ' adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component ' securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at ' heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and ' directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, , arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered ' hazardous. • EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 0705A 01700-3 , ' 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING • A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate ' progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. ' 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the ' temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. ' B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 4. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the ' entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written ' instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. • F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through ' the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. ' J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. • ' EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 0705A 01700-4 B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper ' operation. • C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. ' Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to ' inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION ' A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or ' deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. ' .3-9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and , finishes. 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up ' with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired • without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01700 ' t 1 1 • EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 0705A 01700 - 5 t SECTION 01770- CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: t1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. ' B. Related Sections include the following: ' 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning of Project site. ' 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. • . 4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance - manual requirements. 5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. ' 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial ' Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. ' 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. ' 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. ' 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. • 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0705A 01770 - 1 1 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, ' construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and ' maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. ' B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Owner / Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled ' requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Owner/ Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as ' incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. ' 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final ' Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment ' Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Owner / Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of ' items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The • certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance ' requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. ' B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Owner / Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled ' requirements. Owner / Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS PUNCH LIST) , ' A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and ' area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. ' 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, • individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. ' 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0705A 01770-2 t ' a. Project name. • b. Date. C. Name of Architect. ' d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. ' 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time:- Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the ' Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of ' designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the ' Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark ' tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title"WARRANTIES," ' • Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS ' A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. ' PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply ' with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. ' B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and • maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0705A 01770 - 3 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification ' of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: • a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, ' including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other ' foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural , weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, ' plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. ' j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. ' Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. I. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or • ' that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and ' electrical nameplates. M. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign ' substances. n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains ' resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during ' construction. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. S. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or ' excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of ' lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770 • CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0705A 01770-4 , 1 tSECTION 01781 - PROJECT• RECORD DOCUMENTS ' PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 1 Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record ' Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. ' 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Sections include the following: ' 1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures"for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: ' 1. Number of Copies: Submit one (1)set of marked-up Record Prints. ' B. Record Specifications: Submit one (1) copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one(1) of each Product Data submittal. ' 1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record ' Product Data. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue-or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. ' PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 0705A 01781 - 1 1 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies ' from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the ' marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. ' b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. ' 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. , b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. C. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. ' e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. ' i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. ' I. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. M. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. ' 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. ' 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS t A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation ' varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that , cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to ' provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. ' 5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data and Record Drawings where applicable. 1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 0705A 01781 -2 , ' 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA • A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation ' varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that ' cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where ' applicable. ' 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification.Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file ' miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE ' A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as 10 they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in ' the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 1 END OF SECTION 01,781 1 • PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 0705A 01781 -3 i ' 1 SECTION 01782 -OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA • PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: ' 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. , 4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes, systems and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: , 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for ' operation and maintenance manuals. • 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for ' operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular ' interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. , 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. Final Submittal: Submit three (3) copies of each manual in final form at least fifteen (15) days before final inspection. Owner/Architect will return copy with comments within fifteen (15) days ' after final inspection. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Owner / Architect's comments. Submit three (3) copies of each corrected manual within fifteen (15) days of receipt of Architect's ' comments. • OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 0705A 01782 - 1 ' 1 t1.5 COORDINATION • A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. ' 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, • identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the ' Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." ' 2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL ' A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for.each piece of-equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: ' 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. ' B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. ' 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. • 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. ' OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 0705A 01782-2 i C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project • Manual. , 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. ' D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, ' equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on , spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize ' data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross- reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. Label binders as 1 of 2, 2 of 2, etc. , b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. ' 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification ' Section number and title of Project Manual. • 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. ' 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and ' use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in ' manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS ' A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: , 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. ' B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: ' 1. Fire. 2. Flood. • OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 0705A 01782- 3 , 1 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. 1 C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the.following,as applicable: ' 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. ' 2.4 OPERATION MANUALS "A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in ' individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. ' 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. ' 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions.: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. ' 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. ' C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. ' 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 0705A 01782-4 6. Normal shutdown instructions. ' 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. ' 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. ' E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. ' 2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. ' Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. ' B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference ' Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: , 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. ' 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: ' 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. ' 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. ' E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and , conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. ' 2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL ' A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, ' maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 0705A 01782- 5 , 1 ' B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, • identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation ' including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts-and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. ' D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: '. 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. ' 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. ' 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, • quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. ' 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with ' parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and ' conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. ' PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION ' A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. • ' OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 0705A 01782-6 B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures ' for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies • indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care ' and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance ' data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. ' 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an , instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each ' product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and ' where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment ' or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence ' and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings • to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance ' manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents." , G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures"for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. ' END OF SECTION 01782 1 • OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 0705A 01782- 7 , 1 SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK • PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and -Supplementary tConditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. New building pad prepared by the Owner. 2. Excavating and backfilling for building foundations and structures. 3. Base course for concrete walks and pavements. 4. Granular drainage course over vapor barrier and beneath slabs-on-grade. 5. Excavating and backfilling for sanitary sewer and storm drainage systems. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and support facilities. ' 2. Divisions 2, 15, and 16 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical • utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures. ' 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Course placed between the subgrade and cement concrete paving. ' C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation • and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. EARTHWORK 0705A 02300- 1 2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated ' lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as • remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. , G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposifs, and boulders , of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586. ' I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. , J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below base or drainage course, or topsoil materials. ' K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results ' for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material ' proposed for fill and backfill. • 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. ' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Employ an independent testing agency qualified 1 according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. , PROJECT P CONDITIONS 1.6 ROJ COND O S A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1. Notify Architect, Owner and Utility Company not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. ' 3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. • EARTHWORK 0705A 02300-2 , PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SM, SW, SP, SC and CL, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. CH material may-be used subject-to approval--of geotechnical engineer, but shall not be placed a minimum of 12 inches below soil subgrade elevation. ' C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups, MH, OH, OL and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within —2 to +4 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. ' D. Base-Courser As indicated on drawings, or aggregate base similar to MSSHC Section 1007 Type 1 or 5, as approved by the Architect. E. Engineered Fill: Fine grain soil, CL, GM, GC, SM, or SC compacted to 95 percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor), at a moisture content between -1 and +5 percent of optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D 698; or naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed ' sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 • percent passing a No. 200 sieve. F. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. ' G. Drainage Course or Fill: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve, and similar to MSSHC Type 4, as ' approved by the Architect. H. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1- ' inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. I. Sand: ASTM C 33;fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand. ' J. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. EARTHWORK 0705A 02300- 3 PART 3- EXECUTION 1 3.1 PREPARATION , A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork ' operations. B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 2 Section "Site Clearing,"during earthwork operations. C. Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. ' 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared ' subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water ' accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to ' accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system, specified in Division 2 Section "Dewatering," to keep ' subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until • dewatering is no longer required. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. ' 3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL , A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include miscellaneous soil materials, and obstructions. ' 1. Note: Rock is not anticipated. 2. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials, , replace with satisfactory soil materials. 3. If Architect authorizes additional excavation beyond indicated subgrades, excavation and replacement with engineered fill will be paid for according to Contract provisions for Unit Prices. 4. Existing floor slab site pad will be prepared by the Owner, up to a level of finish grade for slab placement. This includes grade excavation and rock base. Contractor will be responsible for re-grading, and if required, replacement of rock ' for areas disturbed during construction, such as footing and other below-slab excavations. • EARTHWORK 0705A 02300-4 ' 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES • A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If ' applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. ' Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. Footings on engineered fill (if any) are to be inspected and approved by contractor's geotechnical engineer. 2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or -Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or ' minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. 1 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES ' A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. • B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: 6 inches. ' C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels ' of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple- duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to ' support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION ' A. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or • construction activities, as directed by Owner/Architect, without additional compensation. r EARTHWORK 0705A 02300-5 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION ' A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of • concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean ' concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by , Architect. 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. ' 3.11 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, ' waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. • 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. , 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.12 T N , U ILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. ' B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, , and bodies of conduits. C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in ' Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." D. Provide 4-inch- thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches ' below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase. E. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any , dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. • r EARTHWORK 0705A 02300-6 I. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both • sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. ! F. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing. ' G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation. 3.13 SOIL FILL ! A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. ' 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. ' 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL ' A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before • compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. ' 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and ' uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698: !. 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. ' 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. • 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. EARTHWORK 0705A 02300-7 4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 ' percent. 3.16 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply ' with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. , 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish ' subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. ' 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with.a 10- ' foot straightedge. 3.17 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES ' A. Place aggregate base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place 4" aggregate base course under cement concrete pavements and ' walks. • 1. Compact aggregate base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, ' cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 1 3.18 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. ' B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs- on-grade as follows: , 1. Install 10. mil polyethylene vapor barrier on prepared subgrade, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 3. Compact drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering , testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. • EARTHWORK 0705A 02300-8 1 B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with • subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. 1 C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one.test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing ' subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ' ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: ' 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 5000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 ' feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests. 3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests. ' E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.20 PROTECTION ' A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. ' B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. ' 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. ' C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. ' 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. ' 3.21 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. ' Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect. 1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally ' dispose of it off Owner's property. • END OF SECTION 02300 ' EARTHWORK 0705A 02300-9 SECTION 02751 -CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT PART 1 -GENERAL , 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: 1. Curbs and gutters. ' 2. Sidewalks (Walkways). 3. Vehicular pavement and driveways (Alternate). B. Related Sections include the following: 1 1. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for sidewalks, curb & gutter, and concrete pavement unit ' prices. 2. Division 2 Section "Earthwork"for grading and subgrade preparation. 3. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete"for general building applications of concrete. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when ' characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. B. Field quality-control test reports. ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 , and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2.1 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials ' to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. • CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 0705A 02751 - 1 ' 1 ' 1. Use flexible or curved forms for cures with a radius 100 feet or less. B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, ' stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. ' 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into ' flat sheets. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length ' with ends square and free of burrs. C. Reinforcement Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete. ' 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS ' A. Cementitious Material: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same manufacturer throughout the Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Il. ' a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. • ' B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4M. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. ' C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 1 2.4 CURING MATERIALS ' A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. ' B. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 1. Available Products: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound#2 DR WB. b. Burke by Edoko; Aqua Resin Cure. C. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. ' d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.;W.B. Resin Cure. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure(J-11-W). • f. Euclid Chemical Company(The); Kurez DR VOX. g. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 0705A 02751 -2 1 1 h. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear. ' • 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS ' A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. 2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to AC1301, for each type and strength of ' normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience. B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: , 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45. ' 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows: ' 1. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size 1 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery , time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION , A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for , dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances. B. Proof-roll prepared subgrade surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired ' equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. 1. Subgrade with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch require correction according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." ' C. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. ' CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 0705A 02751 - 3 1 ' 3.2 PREPARATION • A. Remove loose material from compacted subgrade surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION ' A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines,_grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. ' B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials. C. Install welded wire reinforcement mats in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces ' at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. D. Support all reinforcement on approved reinforcement support chairs. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. ' 1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.. ' B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. ' 1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. ' 2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. 3. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. ' C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. ' 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 30 feet unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 0705A 02751 -4 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if ' joint sealant is indicated. • 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. ' 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. 6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on ' both sides of joint. D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas, ' maximum 12-foot by 12 foot spacing or as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof ' abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks. ' E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 3/8-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. , 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT ' A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. ' B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. ' C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. ' D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. ' F. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing. G. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push , or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. H. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented ' by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices. ' I. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. • CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 0705A 02751 -5 ' ' J. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform • surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments. 1 K. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. ' Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete. ' L. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85.percent.of its 28-day compressive strength. ' M. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. ' 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. ' 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. ' N. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist: ' 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using ' liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. ' 3.7 CONCRETE FINISHING A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. ' B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture. 2. Coordinate selection of curing compounds with pigmented mineral dry-shake hardener for compatibility and, if required, revise list of manufacturers in Part 2 accordingly. ' Special curing compounds may be ' CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 0705A 02751 -6 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING ' A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot • temperatures. ' B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection. C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete , surface. D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a ' combination of these as follows: 1. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing:' Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover ' for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 2. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller ' according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. ' 3.9 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES ' A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: 1. Elevation: 1/4 inch. , 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot-long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch. 4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. ' 5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage an Owner approved and qualified independent testing ' and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to , ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 100 cu.Yd or 5000 sq. ' ft. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests , for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, ' but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional • tests when concrete consistency appears to change. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 0705A 02751 -7 ' ' 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not • less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. . 5. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test 1 specimen at 7 days and 2 specimens at 28 days. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from 2 specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days. ' C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive- strength_tests-equals or-exceeds.specified-compressive-strength and-no-compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. ' D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and ' inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. ' F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other-requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. ' G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with • specified requirements. H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. ' 3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks ' or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement.- When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. ' END OF SECTION 02751 • CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 0705A 02751 -8 SECTION 02764- PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS , • PART 1 -GENERAL , 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes the following: 1. Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavements. ' B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for constructing joints in concrete pavement. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing nontraffic and traffic joints in locations not ' specified in this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. • 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single , manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating , manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their ' deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: ' 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- • sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. ' PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 0705A 02764- 1 ' 2. When joint substrates are wet or covered with frost. • 3. 'Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. ' 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide point sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and ' application, as -demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. ' B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS ' • A. Jet-Fuel-Resistant Elastomeric Sealant for Concrete: Single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 3569. ' 1. Available Products: a. Crafco Inc.; Superseal 444/777. ' b. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Poly-Jet 3569. 2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated_ ' by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 3; of diameter and density to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant. PART 3- EXECUTION . 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with • requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 0705A 02764-2 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. t • 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. , B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining ' surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products ' and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. ' C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint , widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. , 3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time , backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. ' 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. , E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of ' sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. ' 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions, ' unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide recessed joint .configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations ' indicated. • PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 0705A 02764-3 t ' 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by ' methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. ' 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances ' and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage-at.time of.-Substantial Completion. If, despite-such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately ' and replace with joint sealant so installations With repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. END OF SECTION 02764 1 • 1 1 • 1 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 0705A 02764-4 SECTION 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE • PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS , A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete ma- terials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following. ' 1. Reinforced concrete footings and foundations for metal building structure — structural de- sign shall be by a registered professional engineer, furnished by the Contractor. ' 2. Slabs-on-grade — 6 inches thick, with heavy welded wire fabric (flat sheets) reinforcing, unless noted and approved otherwise. 3. Sonotube formed concrete columns — structural design shall be by a registered profes- sional engineer, furnished by Contractor. t 4. Reinforced concrete curb/base, 6-inches high A.F.F., around perimeter of building to raise and support metal building structure and exterior walls — structural design shall be by a registered professional engineer, furnished by the Contractor. ' 5. Reinforced concrete floor slab at Mezzanine (Alternate) -- structural design shall be by a • registered professional engineer, furnished by the Contractor. 6. Reinforced concrete footings/foundation, under all interior bearing, masonry walls, bollard footings (& fill), mechanical & electrical pads, etc. — structural design shall be by a regis- tered professional engineer, furnished by the Contractor. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section Earthwork for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. ' 2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement'for concrete pavement and walks. 3. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems"for design loads and other requirements for t design and construction of the buildings foundations and footings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica ' fume. 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. General: Submit each item in the Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Divi- sion 1 Specification Sections. ' B. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. • CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0705A 03300 - 1 , 1 tC. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of • materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. t 1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. 2. Indicate where each mix will be used. ' D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of con- ' Crete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. E. Concrete Foundation Drawings: Show layout, sizes, thicknesses, reinforcing, anchor bolts, etc. 1. Comply with Metal Building System and other structural system design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer ' responsible for their preparation. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer. ' B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in Missouri and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of concrete ' structures that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. • C. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in ' material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete prod- ucts complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having ' jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indi- cated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301-99, "Standard Specification for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 117, "Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materi- als." E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. All field testing shall be performed by a certi- fied ACI technician. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0705A 03300-2 I. Store reinforcement above ground sufficient distance to prevent soil coming into contact t with reinforcement. 2. Reinforcement damaged during shipping, storing or handling will be rejected. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and , smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. ' Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch. , D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of con- crete surfaces. ' 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic , form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of the ex- • ' posed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in ' concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive waterproofing. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT ' A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. ' B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. C. Heavy Duty Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES , A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fasten- ' ing reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber- reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete. 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, ' use CRSI Class 1 plastic protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless steel bar supports. • 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0705A 03300-3 ' 1 ' B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends • square and full of burrs. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. ' C. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows: 1. Type: Limestone ' 2. Class: Severe weathering region, but not less than 3S. 3. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Siie: 3/4 inch. ' D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. 2.5 ADMIXTURES ' A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water- soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admix- tures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. ' B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. ' • C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. D. High Range,Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 1 2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated or monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm) long. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Fibrillated Fibers: a. Fibrasol F; Axim Concrete Technologies. b. Fibermesh; Fibermesh, Div. of Synthetic Industries. C. Forta; Forta Corporation. ' d. Grace Fibers;W. R. Grace &Co., Construction Products Div. 2.7 VAPOR BARRIERS • A. Vapor Barrier: 10 mil thick reinforced polyethylene vapor barrier with a maximum water vapor ' permeance of 0.3 perms. ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0705A 03300-4 B. Drainage Course: Reference Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for aggregate drainage course , over vapor barrier beneath slab-on-grade. • 2.8 CURING AND SEALING MATERIALS ' A. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, ' Type 1, Class A. 1. Available Products: ' a. Burke by Edoco; Cureseal 1315. b. ChemMasters; Spray-Cure&Seal Plus. C. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; ' Sealcure 1315. d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Cure and Seal (J-22UV). e. Euclid Chemical Company(The); Super Diamond Clear. , f. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal Plus. g. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; CS-309/30. h. Metalcrete Industries; Seal N Kure 0. i. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Kure-N-Seal 5. ' j. Tamms Industries, Inc.; LusterSeal 300. 2.9 RELATED MATERIALS ' A. Expansion-or Isolaton-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadi- ene. C. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing ' and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Type II, non-load bearing,for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. ' 2. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hard- ened concrete. 2.1 0 CONCRETE NCRETE MIXES ' A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. ' B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. , C. Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): , a. Footings: 3500 psi. • b. Interior Slabs-on-grade: 4000 psi. ' C. Foundation walls: 4000 psi. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0705A 03300 - 5 ' ' d. All other concrete: 4000 psi. 2. Maximum Slump: a. Slabs-on-grade and footings: 1 to 3 inches. b. Foundation walls: 2 to 4 inches. C. Other concrete: 2 to 4 inches. 3. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: 8 inches after admixture is added to concrete with 2 to 4 inch site verified slump. D. -Maximum-Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45, unless noted otherwise. ' E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage by weight of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1 1. Fly Ash: If used, not less than 15 percent or more than 25 percent. F. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus 1 or minus 1.5 percent, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Air Content: 5 percent for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. G. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floors and suspended slabs. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent. 1 H. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.10 percent by weight of ce- ment. I. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. ' 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete and concrete with a water- , cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT 1 A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice." 2.12 CONCRETE MIXING ' A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from ' 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. • PART 3- EXECUTION ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0705A 03300 -6 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete ' structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, eleva- tion, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. gradual, as follows: C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or g ' 1. Class A, 1/8 inch, where surface is permanently exposed to view. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch, where surface is not permanently exposed to view. ' D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Pro- ' vide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for form- ing keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. ' 1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required eleva- tions and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork ' is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to pre- vent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. ' I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads ' required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. , K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. ' L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written in- structions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work ' that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required. ' 2. Install weld plates accurately located horizontally and vertically, plumb, and flush with surface. ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0705A 03300-7 , ' 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS • A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be dam- aged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. ' B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, slabs, columns, and other structural elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following: ' 1. At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Determine compressive strength-of in-place concrete-by testing representative-field- or laboratory-cured test specimens according to ACI 301. ' 3. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or oth- erwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete sur- faces unless approved by Architect. ' 3.4 VAPOR BARRIERS ' A. Vapor Barriers: Place, protect, and repair vapor-barrier sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and • manufacturer's written instructions. ' 3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. ' 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor barrier. Repair damage and reseal vapor barrier before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, concrete splatter, ice, and other foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and sup- port reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least two mesh spacing. Offset laps of ad- joining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. ' 3.6 JOINTS • A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0705A 03300-8 B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at loca- tions indicated or as approved by Architect. . 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across con- ' struction joints, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 3. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hard- ' ened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning P J 9 con- crete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- , fourth of concrete thickness, as indicated or required. 1. Locate joints to form as square sections as possible and approved by Owner&Architect. ' 2. Locate joints at Garage Areas in-line with all Columns and Bays (16 feet on-center) and at equal spacing across building, perpendicular to Bays (approx. 19-20 feet on- center). ' D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade; After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junc- tions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated or required. , 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished con- crete surface, unless otherwise indicated. ' 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below fin- ished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Seal- ants,"are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is ' required, lace or clip sections together. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT ' A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. , B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limita- tions of ACI 301 and approved design mixes. ' 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mix. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed ' on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. ' D. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. ' 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R. ' 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vi- • brator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preced- ing layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose , plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0705A 03300 -9 , concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without • causing mix constituents to segregate. ' E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 1 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin-initial floating-using bull floats-or-darbies-to-form a uniform and open=textured sur- face plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat ' water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing. antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. G. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations.in ACI 305R and as • follows, when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liq- uid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 1 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface ir- regularities. C. Related'Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent • formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0705A 03300 - 10 1 D. Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub ' with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not • apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. ' 3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1 R for screeding, restraightening, and fin- ' ishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Re- peat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular tex- ture. ' 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo. C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of ' trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view ' or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpets, ceramic tile, paint, or another thin film- finish coating system, including thin-set epoxy terrazzo. 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unlev- eled freestanding 10-foot- long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed any- • where on the surface, does not exceed the following: a. 1/8 inch. , D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and else- where as indicated. ' 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fi- ber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with ' Architect before application. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS ' A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in- ' place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to com- plete Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green ' and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and termina- tions slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as ' shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, com- • plying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0705A 03300- 11 ! 3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot tem- peratures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing. ' B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. -Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If re- ! moving forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the follow- ing methods: D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed sur- faces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a com- bination of the following methods: ' 1. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller ac- cording to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair dam- ' age during curing period. 2. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a con- tinuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instruc- tions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. ' 3.12 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until con- struction traffic has permanently ceased. ! B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. ' 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS ' A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling . and placing. ' C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and • stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0705A 03300- 12 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than , 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges • of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat ' holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bond- ing agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and stan- dard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before pro- ceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than sur- rounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and struc- tural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and ' verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that pene- trate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, ' and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing op- ' erations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired ar- eas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, ' square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without , coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 5. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and , loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and ' patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's ap- proval. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage an Owner approved and qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during con- crete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Ar- ticle. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0705A 03300- 13 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete • mix exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 150 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 1 a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly se- lected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests 1 when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: AST-M-C 231, pressure method, -for normakweight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sam- ple, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test 1 for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each con- crete mix. 6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; cast and laboratory cure one set of three ' standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. - 7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days, two at 28 days, and one specimen will be retained in reserve for later testing if re- quired. 1 C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compres- sive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. • D. Test results shall be reported in writing to General Contractor, Architect, Structural Engineer, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive- ' strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 1 F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. 1 END OF SECTION 03300 i 1 • 1 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0705A 03300- 14 SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES • PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Face brick(King size). , 2. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) — with reinforcing designed by structural engineering furnished by Contractor. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Masonry joint reinforcement. 5. Reinforcing steel. 6. Ties and anchors. ' 7. Embedded flashing. 8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. B. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following: 1. Division 5, Section"Metal Fabrications"for steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry • 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ' A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following net-area compressive strengths (fm) at 28 days. Determine compressive strength of masonry from net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. ' 1.5 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: 1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. ' Comply with AC1315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls. • UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0705A 04810- 1 ' C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following: • 1. Unit masonry Samples in small-scale form showing the full range of colors and textures ' available for each different exposed masonry unit required. 2. Grout Samples showing full range of colors and textures for selection by Architect. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of ' the following for compliance with requirements indicated: t 1. Each type of masonry unit required. a. Include size variation data for brick, verifying that actual range of-sizes falls within specified tolerances. ' b. Include test results, measurements, and calculations establishing net-area compressive strength of masonry units. 2. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270. ' 3. Grout mixes complying with compressive strength requirements of ASTM C 476. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients. E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: 1. Each type of masonry unit required. i ' a. Include size-variation data for brick, verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. ' 2. Each cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer, • brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery. 3. Each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type. Include statement of net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 61TMS 602. 4. _Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars. 5. Each type and size of joint reinforcement. 6. Each type and size of anchor, tie, and metal accessory. F. Masonry Reinforcing Drawings: Show layout, sizes, thicknesses, reinforcing, anchor bolts, etc. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer. ' B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in Missouri and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for design of masonry ' reinforcing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. C. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and ' color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. • ' UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0705A 04810-2 D. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, , including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component • and from one source or producer for each aggregate. ' E. Sample Panels: Before installing unit masonry, build sample panels (as directed by Architect), using materials indicated for the completed Work, to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Build sample panels for each type of exposed ' unit masonry assembly in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness. 1. Locate panels in the locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. ' 2. Clean exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated. 3. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 4. Maintain sample panels during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for ' judging the completed Work. 5. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels, unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 6. Demolish and remove sample panels when directed. 1 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING , A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an • enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If , units become wet, do not install until they are dry. 1. Protect Type I concrete masonry units from moisture absorption so that, at the time of installation, the moisture content is not more than the maximum allowed at the time of delivery. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not , use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. ' D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with , waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. ' 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. • 1 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0705A 04810- 3 1 ' 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. 1 B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. ' C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such . masonry. ' 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. ' 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes,from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall.on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice ' or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and.replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. ' 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. ' E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity M conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout.. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. 1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set ' masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BRICK ' A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of brick required: 1. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills ' and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces. ' B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive ' strength of 3000 psi. 2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 20 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. • UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0705A 04810-4 1 3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated , "not effloresced." • 4. Size: Manufactured to size matching adjacent buildings. ' 5. Color and Texture: Match adjacent buildings on City complex; approved by Owner/Architect ' 2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce _mortar color indicated. ' B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. ' E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. ' F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. G. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ' ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. H. Water: Potable. i I. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: ' 1. Mortar Pigments: a. True Tone Mortar Colors; Davis Colors. , b. Centurion Pigments; Lafarge Corporation. C. SGS Mortar Colors; Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc. 2. Cold-Weather Admixture: a. Accelguard 80; Euclid Chemical.Co.. ' b. Morseled; W.R. Grace&Co., Construction Products Division. C. Trimix-NCA; Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. 2.3 REINFORCING STEEL A. Low-Alloy Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 706 for welded reinforcing. ' B. For single-wythe masonry, provide either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods and cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0705A 04810 - 5 ' 2.4 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from materials that ' comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated. B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating. 1 C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, commercial-quality, steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines before fabrication. ' D. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. ' 2.5 BENT WIRE TIES A. General: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches long may be used for masonry constructed from solid units or hollow units laid with cells horizontal. 1. Where coursing between wythes does not align, use adjustable ties composed of 2 parts; ' 1 with pintles, the other with eyes; with maximum misalignment of 1-1/4 inches. 2. Where wythes are of different materials, use adjustable ties composed of 2 parts; 1 with pintles, the other with eyes; with maximum misalignment of 1-1/4 inches. ' B. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. ' 2.6 ADJUSTABLE MASONRY-VENEER ANCHORS • A. General: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist ' tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: ' 1. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. ' a. Provide anchor manufacturer's standard, self-adhering, modified bituminous gaskets manufactured to fit behind anchor plate and to prevent moisture from penetrating sheathing at pronged legs and screw holes. 2. Anchor Section: Zinc-alloy barrel section with flanged head with eye and corrosion- resistant, self-drilling screw. Eye designed to receive tie section and to serve as head for drilling fastener.into framing. Barrel length to suit sheathing thickness, allowing screw to ' seat directly against framing with flanged head covering hole in sheathing. 3. Wire Tie Section: Triangular shaped wire tie sized to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. ' 4. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.0781-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheet . ' B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,' products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: • 1. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: ' UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0705A 04810-6 a. D/A 213; Dur-O-WaI, Inc. ' b. D/A 210 with D/A 700-708; Dur-O-WaI, Inc. • C. 315-D with 316; Heckman Building Products, Inc. d. Pos-I-Tie; Heckman Building Products, Inc. ' e. DW-10; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. f. DW-1 OHS; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. g. DW-10-X; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. ' h. 1004, Type III; Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America. i. RJ-711; Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America. 2. Slip-in, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: ' a. AA308; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 3. Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: t a. D/A 213S; Dur-O-WaI, Inc. , b. DW-10-X-Seismiclip; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. C. RJ-711 with Wire-Bond clip; Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America. 4. Organic-Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws: , a. Dril-Flex; Elco Industries, Inc. b. Traxx; ITW-Buildex. ' 5. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: a. Stainless Steel SX Fastener; Dur-O-WaI, Inc. ' • 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS , A. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations: ' 1. Headed bolts. 2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS , A. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Manufacturer's standard composite flashing product consisting of , a pliable and highly adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross- laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of 0.040 inch. B. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard ' products or products recommended by the flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be , incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: ' a. Dur-O-Barrier; Dur-O-WaI, Inc. • 1 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0705A 04810 - 7 , ' b. Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing; W. R. Grace&Co., Construction.Products Division. • C. Textroflash; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. d. Poly-Barrier Self-Adhering Wall Flashing; Polytite Manufacturing Corp. e. Polyguard 300; Polyguard Products, Inc. f. Everlastic MF-40;Williams Products, Inc. ' 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; ' compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane or-PVC. ' B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 1. Styrene-Butadiene-Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805. 2. PVC: ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406. C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, ' Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. Plastic Weep Hole/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, designed to fill head joint with outside face held back 118 inch from exterior face of masonry, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. E. Cavity Drainage Material: 3/4-inch- thick, free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands ' and shaped to avoid being clogged by mortar droppings. • 2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS ' A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. ' 2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, ' retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. ' 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. 1. Extended-Life Mortar for Unit Masonry: Mortar complying with ASTM C 1142 may be used instead of mortar specified above, at Contractor's option. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime. ' 3. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, and where indicated, use Type M. 4. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use Type M or S. • 5. For exterior, above-grade, non-load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0705A 04810-8 C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. , 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will • comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and ' pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143. 3. Grout compressive strength, f =2500psi. , D. Submit full range of available manufacturer's colors for selection by Architect. PART 3- EXECUTION , 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation ' tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 2. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. , 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping ' connections. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL , A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full • thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units of ' widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this Section and in other Sections of the Specifications. , C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening. , D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible, use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, ' unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. 'Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and ' textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. ' F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not ' wet at the time of laying. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0705A 04810-9 ' 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES • A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following: B. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch ' maximum. C. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. D. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such-as-exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. ' E. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. -. . F. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. ' 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. • B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. ' 1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. ' C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for one-half -running bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed ' surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING • A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0705A 04810 - 10 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. ' 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, • and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. ' 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. B. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. 1. At cavity walls, bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. ' As work progresses, trowel mortar fins protruding into cavity flat against the cavity face of the brick. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint ' thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Grout and Tool single-score masonry units, exposed to view, to match joints. ' D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. ' 3.6 CAVITIES ' A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. 1. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work ' progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity. • 3.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT , A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 ' inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and ' extending 24 inches beyond openings. a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. ' B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. ' Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to ' comply with the following: • UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0705A 04810- 11 ' 1. Provide an open_ space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural ® member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches ' o.c. horizontally.. 3.9 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers -to-concrete and masonry backup with seismic masonry:veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten anchors to concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. 2. - Embed tie sections, connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. ' 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq.ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter. 3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS 1 A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related ® items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement. B. Form control points in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows: 1 1. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Keep joint free and clear of mortar. 3.11 LINTELS ' A.- Install steel or masonry lintels across all openings. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick-size ' units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. 1. Provide built-in-place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0705A 04810- 12 C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. ' • 3.12 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS , A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. , B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Unless otherwise indicated, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, , sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. C. Install flashing as follows: , 1. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and ' through inner wythe to within.1/2 inch of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turn flashing up approximately 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated. ' 2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through veneer, up face of sheathing at least 8 inches, and behind air-infiltration barrier or building paper. 3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at each ' end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches at ends and turn flashing up not less than 2 inches to form a pan. 4. Cut flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry ' immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: • 1. Use plastic weep hole/vents to form weep holes. ' 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing in brick sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. ' 4. In cavities, place pea gravel to a height equal to height of first course, but not less than 2 inches, immediately above top of flashing embedded in the wall, as masonry construction progresses, to splatter mortar droppings and to maintain drainage. , 5. Place cavity drainage material immediately above flashing in cavities. E. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. ' 3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise ' damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. ' B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent ' construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application. • UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0705A 04810- 13 C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove • mortar fins and smears before tooling joints: D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape_ ' hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them.with-liquid-strippable-masking-agent, polyethylene-film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by ' rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to ' type of stain on exposed surfaces. ' 3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Recycling: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken masonry units, waste mortar, and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as ' fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of ' masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. I ' END OF SECTION 04810 • UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0705A 04810- 14 SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS • PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the*Contract, including General and Supplementary , Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes the following: 1. Loose bearing and leveling plates. ' 2. Loose steel lintels. 3. Pipe bollards. 4. Miscellaneous trim and pieces required for a other work or attachments. ' B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube handrails and ' railings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include , plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. B. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE , A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. ' B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code—Steel." ' 2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, , verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on • METAL FABRICATIONS 0705A 05500- 1 ' 1 Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying • the Work. ' 1. Established .Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual . dimensions ' correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL ' A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks,rolled trade names, or roughness. 2.2 FERROUS.METALS A. Structural Steel Wide Flange Shapes: ASTM A572, Grade 50. B. Structural Steel Angles, Channel, Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed hollow structural shapes ASTM A 500, Grade B. ' D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or • required by structural loads. 2.3 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd ' primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. 2.4 FASTENERS ' A. General: Provide Type.304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. ' C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3. ' E. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME 818.22.1. • F. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1. ' METAL FABRICATIONS 0705A 05500-2 G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in • unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. , H. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed. 2.5 G ROUT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout ' complying-with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL ' A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field ' splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. ' B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form • ' bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: , 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion ' resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no , roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and ' space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, ' and similar items. G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep , holes where water may accumulate. H. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient ' and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation • on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. ' METAL FABRICATIONS 0705A 05500- 3 1 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), • material surfaces. ' I. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. ' J. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. K. Form.-exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. ' 2.7 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize plates after fabrication. 2.8 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose structural-steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. C. Size loose 11ntels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to one-twelfth of clear • span, but not less than 8 inches (200 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports indicated and as necessary to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors 1-1/4 inches wide by '/ inch thick by 8 inches long at 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. ' 2. Coordinate fabrication of framing supports for column covers with column cover supplier. 3. Coordinate countertop support brackets with casework supplier. 4. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. ' 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM • METAL FABRICATIONS 0705A 05500-4 A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of ' profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and • use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm)from each end, 6 inches (150 mm)from corners, and 24 inches (600 mm)o.c., unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim in the following locations: 1. Exterior. 2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL , A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed ' below: 1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products. ' B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with • minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and ' environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1 A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized ' finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop , painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges , and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. • METAL FABRICATIONS 0705A 05500- 5 C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. ' D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline.joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of-base-metals- 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately: 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed.welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. i - 3.2 SETTING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES ' A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. ' B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After-bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. • ' 3.3 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install column cover and other framing and supports to comply with requirements.of ' items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings, if any. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to_provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm)dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05500 • METAL FABRICATIONS 0705A 05500-6 i SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS • PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS i A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY , A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel pipe handrails at stairs. i 2. Metal tube removable guard rails and support brackets along mezzanine —design not to exceed 50 lbs. per guardrail unit. B. Related Sections include the following: ' 1. Division 9 Section"Painting"for finishes of steel railings. , 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings capable of ' withstanding the following structural loads without exceeding allowable design working stresses • of materials for handrails, railings, anchors, and connections: ' 1. Top Rail of Guards: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: a. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf(890 N) applied at any point and in any direction. ' b. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. (730 N/m) applied horizontally and concurrently with uniform load of 100 Ibf/ft. (1460 N/m) applied vertically downward. C. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. ' 2. Handrails Not Serving As Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: a. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf(890 N)applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. (730 N/m) applied in any direction. C. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill Area of Guards: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 200 Ibf (890 N) applied to 1 sq. ft. (0.09 sq. m) at any point in system, including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements composing infill area. ' a. Load above need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails in determining stress on guard. ' • PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 0705A .05521 - 1 , 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS t . A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of handrails and railings and relationships with stairs. Include plans, elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other Work. . 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Engineering -Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in Missouri and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. ' C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of handrail and railing through one source from a single, manufacturer. i 1.6 STORAGE u , A. Store handrails and railings in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place. ' 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify handrail and railing dimensions by field measurements before f fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying ' the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating handrails and railings without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION O A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for handrails and railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including metal framing. 1.9 SCHEDULING A. Schedule installation so handrails and railings are mounted only on completed walls. Do not ' support temporarily by any means that does not satisfy structural performance requirements. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.1 METALS PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 0705A 05521 -2 1 A. General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and , other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. • B. Steel and Iron: Provide steel and iron in the form indicated, complying with the following ' requirements: 1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53;finish, type, and weight class as follows: ' a. Type F, or Type S, Grade A, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. ' 2. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing, ASTM A 500, Grade A, unless another grade is required by structural loads. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. ■ 4. Iron Castings: Gray iron complying with ASTM A 48, Class 30 (ASTM A 48M, l� Class 200). C. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as ' supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WELDING MATERIALS, FASTENERS, AND ANCHORS i A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as ' recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Handrails and Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, , grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring handrails and railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. 1. For steel handrails, railings, and fittings, use plated fasteners complying with , ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Handrail and Railing Components: Use fasteners fabricated from ' same basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined. 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting handrail and railing components and for ' attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for handrails and railings indicated. 2. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise ' indicated. 2.3 PAINT ' A. Shop Primers: Provide primers to comply with applicable requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting." ' 2.4 FABRICATION ' • PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 0705A 05521 - 3 ' tA. General: Fabricate handrails and railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, • dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. ' B. Assemble handrails and railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain ' structural value of joined pieces. C. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature ' for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member throughout entire. bend -without_buckling, ..twisting, -cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components. D. Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings for connecting members by welding. Cope components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld connections continuously to comply with the following: ' 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. ' 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. E. Nonwelded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings by connecting members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members ' and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. • 1. . Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive where this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing members to other work, unless otherwise ' indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made from crush-resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall finishes to ' structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. G. Shear and punch metals,cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges. ' H. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Form. bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work. L . Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. ' J. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails;unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of railing and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm)or less. ' K. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated. • 1 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 0705A 05521 -4 PART 3- EXECUTION ' • 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL ' A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install handrails and railings. Set handrails and ' railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free from rack. ' 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrail and railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. ' 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet(2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet(5 mm in 3 m). ' C. Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated, but not less than that required by structural loads. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for ' securing handrails and railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.2 ANCHORING POSTS A. Anchor posts in concrete (Retaining Wall) by forming or core-drilling holes not less than 5 ' inches deep and 3/ inch greater than outside diameter of post. Clean holes of all loose material, • insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's , directions. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS ' A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. ' Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of handrails and railings. 3.4 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS ' A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance ' from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1. For steel-framed gypsum board partitions, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed steel reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads. • PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 0705A 05521 - 5 ' ' 3.5. CLEANING • A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section 'Painting." 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of handrails and railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at the time ' of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of ' correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the.shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. ' END OF SECTION 05521 1 1 • 1 1 1 • .1 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 0705A 05521 -6 1 SECTION 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY • PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber for load bearing and non-load bearing walls. ' 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Wood framed stairs,.treads, and risers. 4. Wood blocking and nailers. ' 5. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: ' 1. Division 6 Section "Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses." 1.3 DEFINITIONS • A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. , B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. ' C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association. ' 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. ' 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS , A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate ' type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content • of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. ' ROUGH CARPENTRY 0705A 06100- 1 ' 3. Include copies of warranties from.chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of • treatment. ' B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing. C. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit ' stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in ' effect for Project: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Engineered wood products. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. ' 6. Metal framing anchors. E. Wood Floor and Wall Framing and Fastening/Anchoring Shop Drawings: Show layout, sizes, ' thicknesses, reinforcing, fasteners, anchor, etc. ' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in Missouri and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for design of wood frame floor systems and bearing walls that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. C. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. ' 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air ' circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency ' certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. ROUGH CARPENTRY 0705A 06100 -2 1 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of ' each piece. • 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for , moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities ' having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that. show compliance with building code in effect for Project. ' 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational ' engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER , A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in ' contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no ' arsenic or chromium. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise ' adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use ' material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. ' 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: ' 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar ' members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. ' 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground or unexcavated areas. ' 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING ' A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. t ROUGH CARPENTRY 0705A 06100- 3 ' ' B. Framing Other Than Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following • species: ' 1. Southern pine; SPIB. 2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 4. Douglas fir-south;WWPA. 5.. Spruce-pine-fir.(south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. C. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of ' the following species: 1. Southern pine; SPIB. 2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 4. Douglas fir-south;WWPA. 5. Spruce-pine-fir(south); NeLMA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 2.4 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no ' urea formaldehyde. 1 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, • the following: a. Boise Cascade Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific. C. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. d. Pacific Woodtech Corporation. ' e. Weyerhaeuser Company. ' 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. ' B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 19 .percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species: ' 1. - Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir(south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. ' C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any • of the following species and grades: 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY 0705A 06100 -4 1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. , 2. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Standard or 3 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, • WCLIB, or WWPA. ' D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. ' E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. , F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 1 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D ' Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified ' in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating ' complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. • B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. ' C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. ' E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. ' F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with ' capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as ' determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, , Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. ' • ROUGH CARPENTRY 0705A 06100 -5 ' _ 1 2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS • A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. ' 2. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 3. KC Metals Products, Inc. 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 5. USP Structural Connectors. ' B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide -products with- allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be _ ' determined from empirical data 'or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated. tD. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. E. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and 1-1/4-inch- wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth. ' 1. Thickness: As indicated on drawings. • ' F. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member. 1. Strap Width: As indicated on drawings. 2. Thickness: As indicated on drawings. G. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.050 inch thick, length to suit joist size and spacing. H. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch. above base and with 2-inch- minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch thick. ' I. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports. J. Rafter Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-1/2 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick. K. Hold-Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor ' bolts or to other hold-downs with threaded rods and designed with first of two bolts placed seven bolt diameters from reinforced base. ' L. Wall Bracing: T-shaped bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 1-1/8 inches wide by 9/16 inch deep by 0.034 inch thick with hemmed edges. • ROUGH CARPENTRY 0705A 06100-6 M. Wall Bracing: Angle bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 15/16 by 15/16 by 0.040 ' inch thick with hemmed edges. • 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ' A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's , standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2- propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ' ingredient. PART 3- EXECUTION , 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set. rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with.members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. ' Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," ' unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with ' manufacturer's written instructions. D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. ' E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, ' specialty items, and trim. 1._ Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where ' framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with ' fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. ' H. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. ' 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. I. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, ' complying with the following: • ROUGH CARPENTRY 0705A 06100- 7 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. • 2. Table 2304.9.1, Fastening Schedule, in ICC s International Building Code. 3. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof ' Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's Uniform Building Code. J. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully ' penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. ' K. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with-adjacent rows staggered. 1. Comply with indicated.fastener patterns where applicable. 2. Use finishing nails, unless otherwise indicated. Do not countersink nail heads Indicate locations of other fasteners, such as wood screws, bolts, and lag screws, on Drawings. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION ' A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. ' 3.3 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION • A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal thickness.whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load- bearing partitions and for load-bearing partitions where framing members bearing on partition are located directly over studs. Fasten plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Structural Design of interior load-bearing partitions shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- or 2-by-4-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced not less than 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated or otherwise approved by Contractor's Professional Engineer's design and Owner/Architect. ' 3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at mid-height of partitions more than 96 inches high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. B. Construct corners and intersections with three-or more studs, except that two studs may be ' used for interior non-load-bearing partitions. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness ' equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. 1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4- ' inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in • width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width. i ROUGH CARPENTRY 0705A 06100-8 1 2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 60 inches and less in ' width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated. • D. Provide diagonal bracing in walls, at locations indicated by Contractor's engineering consultant, ' at 45-degree angle,full-story height, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION , A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches on masonry. Attach floor joists as ' follows: 1. Where supported on wood members, by using metal framing anchors. ' 2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if not indicated, by using metal joist hangers. B. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers ' and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches. C. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless ' nailed to header or band. D. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs for openings. E. Provide bridging of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches o.c., between joists. ' 1. Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel-cut, 1-by-3-inch nominal- size lumber, double- , crossed and nailed at both ends to joists. • 2. Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION , A. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not indicated, to ' comply with the following requirements: 1. Stringer Size: 2-by-12-inch nominal-size, minimum. 2. Stringer Material: solid lumber. ' 3. Notching: Notch stringers to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at least 3-1/2 inches of effective depth. 4. Stringer Spacing: At least 3 stringers for each 36-inch clear width of stair. ' B. Provide stair framing with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers and no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each ' flight. 3.6 PROTECTION , A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. ' Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. • ROUGH CARPENTRY 0705A 06100-9 B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, • apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA- registered label. END OF SECTION 06100 • ROUGH CARPENTRY 0705A 06100- 10 SECTION 06160 -SHEATHING ' • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wall sheathing. ' 2. Flooring. 9 3. Building wrap. B. Related Sections include the following: ' 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for plywood backing panels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and ' certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and ' certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials. 3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include ' physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content ' of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. , 6. For building wrap, include data on air-/moisture-infiltration protection based on testing according to referenced standards. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE , A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of drawings, design calculations, and other structural , data by a qualified professional engineer. SHEATHING 0705A 06160 - 1 i B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in Missouri and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind • indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for design of wood frame floor ' systems and walls that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. C. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD- 01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship": ' 1. Plywood. 1.5 DELIVERY,.STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. -Stack plywood. and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated. B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. • Q. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD ' A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C9. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ' B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and-plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2.3 WALL SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: _Exterior sheathing- 1. Span Rating: Not less than 16/0. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch. I • SHEATHING 0705A 06160-2 2.4 FLOORING ' A. Plywood Subflooring: Exterior, Structural I single-floor panels. • 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24 o.c. , 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 7/8 inch. 3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove. , 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with , ASTM A 153/A 153M or of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. ' C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. ' E. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for ' material being fastened. 2.6 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER • ' A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed ' indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be , incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Chemical Company(The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap. ' b. DuPont(E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek CommercialWrap. C. Raven Industries Inc.; Rufco-Wrap. d. Reemay, Inc.;Typar HouseWrap. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 152>g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). 3. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months. ' B. Building Wrap Tape: Pressure sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that ' is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both • adhesives and panels. SHEATHING 0705A 06160-3 1 PART 3- EXECUTION • 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to ' use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach-to substrate by fastening-as-indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. ' 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's"International Building Code." D. Use common wire.nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully ' penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. ' E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. ' F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate .sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so • sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. ' 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION i A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30S, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide,"for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Subflooring: ' a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 2. Wall and Roof Sheathing: ' a. Nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. ' C. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. ' 3.3 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING-PAPER INSTALLATION • A. General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows: 1 SHEATHING 0705A 06160-4 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- 1 or control-joint locations. • B. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1 1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. END OF SECTION 06160 1 1 1 1 1 1 • i 1 1 1 1 • 1 1 SHEATHING 0705A 06160 -5 . 1 1 ' SECTION 0617 - ME TAL-PLATE-CO NN EC TED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: ' 1. Metal.plate connected wood floor truss joists designed for 125 lbs. per.square foot live load — structural design shall be by a registered professional engineer and furnished by Contractor. ' 2. Wood truss bracing. 3. Metal truss accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for interior load bearing partitions supporting wood girder trusses. 1.3 DEFINITIONS tA. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal-plate- connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to Project site. ' B. TPI: Truss Plate Institute, Inc. ' C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. ' 3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. ' 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ' A. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1 unless more stringent requirements are specified below. 1. Design Loads: As required'by contractors engineering consultant. 2. Maximum Deflection Under Live Design Loads: 1 METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 0705A 06176- 1 a. Floor Truss Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of span. ' 1.5 SUBMITTALS , A. Product Data: For metal-plate connectors, metal truss accessories, and fasteners. B. Shop Drawings: Sealed by a qualified professional. Show fabrication and installation details for ' trusses. 1. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss ' required. 2. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber. 3. Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss ' members due to design loads. 4. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal connector plates. ' 5. Show splice details and bearing details. 6. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. ' C. Product Certificates: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses, signed by officer of truss fabricating firm. D. Qualification Data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance' Article to demonstrate ' their capabilities and experience. Include complete list of projects with project names and addresses , E. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ' ALSC Board of Review. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates. ' 1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive ' engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that ' complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third-party inspection by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. C. Source Limitations for Connector Plates: Obtain metal connector plates from a single t manufacturer. D. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications: ' 1. TPI 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction." METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 0705A 06176- 2 ' 1 2. TPI DSB, 'Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate • Connected Wood Trusses." 3. TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal ' Plate Connected Wood Trusses." E. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's "National ' Design Specifications for Wood Construction"and its "Supplement." 17 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1 A. Handle--and _store trusses to comply--with- recommendations of TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 1. Store trusses flat, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending. 2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. 3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or.other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective. 1.8 COORDINATION ' A. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying progress of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency ' is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. ' 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S. 3. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. ' B. Grade and Species: For truss chord and web members, provide dimension lumber of any species, graded visually or mechanically, and capable of supporting required loads without ' exceeding allowable design values according to AF&PA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement." C. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous ' lumber in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." ' 2.2 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES • A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 ' METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 0705A 06176-3 1 1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. ' 2. Cherokee Metal Products, Inc.; Masengill Machinery Company. • 3. CompuTrus, Inc. 4. Eagle Metal Products. ' 5. Jager Building Systems, Inc. 6. MiTek Industries, Inc.; a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Inc. 7. Robbins Engineering, Inc. ' 8. TEE-LOK Corporation; a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Inc. 9. Truswal Systems Corporation. B. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1. ' C. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength ' low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G60 (Z180)coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm)thick. 1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated. ' 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. ' 1. Where trusses are exposed to weather, in ground contact, made from pressure- preservative treated wood, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot- dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. ' B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. • C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. ' D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME 818.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); ' with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. 2.4 METAL TRUSS ACCESSORIES ' A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings or comparable products by one of the following: ' 1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 2. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. 3. KC Metals Products, Inc. ' 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by ' manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by • comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 1 METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 0705A 06176-4 ' 1 tC. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, • G60(Z180)coating designation. ' 1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated. D. Truss Tie-Downs: Per Engineer's design. ' 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. t2.6 FABRICATION A. Cut truss.members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fittingjoints. ' B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and. anchorage details required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated. ' C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. ' Position members to produce design camber indicated. 1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1. D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded • simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press. ' PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured. B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing. C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. ' D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated. E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction. 1 F._ Space trusses as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening. G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as ' applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in truss accessories according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions. • H. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses. METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 0705A 06176-5 1 1 1. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated. ' I. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are • applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams. , 1. Install bracing to comply with Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." J. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1. ' K. Do not cut or remove truss members. , L. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements. 1. Do not alter trusses in field. ' 3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION ' A. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA- registered label. , B. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. ' C. Protective Coating: Clean and prepare exposed surfaces of metal connector plates. Brush apply primer, when part of coating system, and one coat of protective coating. 1. Apply materials to provide minimum dry film thickness recommended by coating system ' manufacturer. END OF SECTION 06176 ' 1 • METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 0705A 06176-6 SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: ' 1. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 2. Plastic-laminate countertops. ' B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed t blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures faucets and other items installed in architectural woodwork.. ' C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Plastic laminates. ' 2. Thermoset decorative panels. D. Samples for Verification: INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0705A 06402 - 1 1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 6inches wide by 6 inches long, for ' each species and cut,finished on 1 side and 1 edge. 2. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 12 by 12 inches, for each ' species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified. 3. Plastic laminates, 12 by 12 inches , for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1 sample applied to core material. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to ' demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. ' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- ' service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork ' Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. ' 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in ' "Project Conditions"Article. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS , A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative ' humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress P 9 P 9 to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that*support woodwork by field ' measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field ' measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. • INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0705A 06402-2 ' ' 1.8 COORDINATION • A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related ' units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS I 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. ' B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Red oak, plain sawn or sliced. P P C. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1. ' D. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure ' decorative laminates by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International; Inc. ' F. Tempered Float Glass for Sliding Glass Counter Doors: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type.l, Class 1 clear, Quality-Q3, with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 6 mm thick, ' unless otherwise required. 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES ' A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets. ' B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9; 801602, 135 degrees of opening. ' C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter. ' E. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141. • F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, 804071; with shelf rests, B04081. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0705A 06402-3 G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. t 1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1 HD-100 and Grade 1 HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; • zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. ' 2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1 HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24 inches wide. 3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1 HD-200; for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches ' wide. H. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. I. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product ' class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ' A• Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. ' B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face ' of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior ' woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation ' areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius ' indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch. , 2. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch. D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum ' extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. , Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check ' measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. • INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0705A 06402-4 , E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing • fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE.CABINETS A. Grade: Custom. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. �. C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 3. Edges: Grade HGS. 1 D. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. E. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures • of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: w 1. As selected by Owner / Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range of colors and ' patterns. 2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Grade: Premium. B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. ' C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Owner / Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following ' categories: a. Solid colors. b. Patterns. D. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. E. Core Material: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard. • F. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0705A 06402- 5 2.7 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING ' A. Grade: Premium. • B. Shelf Material: 3/4-inch veneer-faced panel product with veneer edge banding. C. Cleats: 3/4-inch solid lumber. D. Wood Species: Red oak where indicated otherwise match species indicated for other types of transparent-finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION O A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and ' complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION ' A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. ' B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for • fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. ' C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). ' D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and , matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are ' accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a ' straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. • INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0705A 06402-6 ' G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other • supports into underside of countertop. ' 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. ' 2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. ' 4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. ' 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual ' defects;where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. ' END OF SECTION 06402 • 1 1 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0705A 06402- 7 1 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION • PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes the following: 1. Perimeter wall insulation at all exterior walls. ' 2. Concealed building insulation. 3. Vapor retarders. B. Related Sections include the following: , 1. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems" for insulation specified as part of metal building construction. , 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass • fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths)or rolls. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. ' B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units for each type of exposed insulation indicated. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation. ' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single ' manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method 1 indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. ' 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. • 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. BUILDING INSULATION 0705A 07210 - 1 ' 1 ' 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. • ' 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, ' and other sources. Store inside and in a-dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do_not.expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of -installation-and concealment. ' 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. 1 PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. ' 2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION ' A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively: ' 1. Available Manufacturers: - a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. ' C. Owens Corning. 2. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft., unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION ' A. Available Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. ' 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. • 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning. 1 - BUILDING INSULATION 0705A 07210-2 B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane ' facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. C. Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim- ' polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face. D. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated: ' 1. 3-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 11 deg F x h x sq.ft./Btu at 75 deg F. 2. 5-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq.ft./Btu at 75 deg F. ' 3. 9-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 30 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F. 2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS ' A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm. ' B. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers. 2.5 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS ' A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation ' manufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings. B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation ' securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. ' 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing ' projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 1 BUILDING INSULATION 0705A 07210- 3 ' 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL • A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application ' indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any ' time to ice, rain,and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness,indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with ' placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate ' location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses,.widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.4• INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 30 inches below exterior grade • line. ' B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. C. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection course with joints butted. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions. ' D. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying protection course with joints butted. 1 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written ' instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to ' edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units.are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm-in-winter side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. • 1 BUILDING INSULATION 0705A 07210-4 1 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ' surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. • D. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into all miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown ' and required to form a continuous thermal insulation barrier to the exterior building exposure. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu.ft. ' 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. ' Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber ' insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. ' Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c. C. Before installing vapor retarder, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including ' runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing ' members or other solid substrates. D. Firml *attac h vapor or retarders to framing g and solid substrates with vapor retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. ' E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor • retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. F. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. ' 3.7 PROTECTION ' A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction ' immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 ' 1 • t BUILDING INSULATION 0705A 07210-5 , SECTION 07920-JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by ' reference to this Section: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: ' a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints between metal wall panels. C. Joints in copings and miscellaneous sheet metal flashings and trim. ' d. Joints between different materials listed above. e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. f. Other joints as indicated. ' 2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. ' C. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry, concrete, walls, and partitions. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, ' windows, and elevator entrances. e. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. f. Other joints as indicated. ' 3. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. ' b. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: ' 1. Division 8 Section "Glazing"for glazing sealants. ' 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous ' joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. • JOINT SEALANTS 0705A 07920- 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. • B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants ' showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product ' manufacturer. D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants equal to those within this Project and whose work has resulted with a record of successful in- ' service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: ' 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- ' sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. • 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for ' applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or ' replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant ' manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Twenty years from date of Substantial Completion. , C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint ' sealants from the following: • JOINT SEALANTS 0705A 07920-2 ' ' 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant. • manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. . 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL ' A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 ' classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. D. Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant ES-1: 1. Available Products: a. . Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. C. Tremco; Spectrem 1 (Basic). d. GE Silicones; SilPruf SCS2000. e. Pecora Corporation; 864. ! f. Pecora Corporation; 890. g. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-641. h. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Omniseal. ' i. Tremco; Spectrem 3. • 2. Type and Grade: S (single component)and NS (nonsag). JOINT SEALANTS 0705A 07920-3 3. Class: 50. ' 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic). • 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. ' a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, and brick. 6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248. 7. Applications: Exterior expansion joints, joints at perimeter of windows, doors and wall ' systems and other joints indicated. E. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant ES-2: 1. Available Products: a. Pecora Corporation; 898. ' b. Tremco; Tremsil 600 White. 2. Type and Grade: S(single component)and NS (nonsag). ' 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates ' indicated, O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: Glass, anodic aluminum and ceramic tile. 6. Applications: Joints around toilet fixtures, countertops and casework. ' • F. Single-component Nonsag Urethane Sealant ES-3: ' 1. Available Products: a. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex 1a. ' b. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex-15LM. C. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Ultra. d. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP 1. ' e. Tremco; Vulkem 116. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25 or 100/50. ' 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: Galvanized metal wall panels with high-performance coatings. 6. Applications: Joints in metal wall panel systems. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant LS-1: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. • JOINT SEALANTS 0705A 07920-4 ' B. Available Products: 1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600. ' 2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 3. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. 4. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac. ' 5. Tremco; Tremflex 834. 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING tA. General: .Provide sealant--backings-of material-and--type that are nonstaining; are*compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface-skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant ' manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self- adhesive tape where applicable. ' 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ' A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. ' B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily,residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to ' promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3- EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. ' B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' JOINT SEALANTS 0705A 07920 - 5 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: ' 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and ' approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate ' capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: ' a. Concrete. b. Masonry. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. ' 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. ' Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. ' C. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant ' manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas ' of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by ' cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS ' A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products ' and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint ' sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint , widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. ' 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. .. t JOINT SEALANTS 0705A 07920-6 1 D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between • sealants and backs of joints. ' E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. ' -2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of. Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant .application.and .before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air,pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides.of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to.joints. 1 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 1 3.4, CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by • methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION ' A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage ' or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. ' 3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application JS-1: Exterior vertical construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. ' 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-1. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. ' B. Joint-Sealant Application JS-4: Exterior vertical construction joints in masonry. ' 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-1. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. • C. Joint-Sealant Application JS-7: Exterior butt joints between metal panels. JOINT SEALANTS 0705A 07920- 7 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-3. ' 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. . D. Joint-Sealant Application JS-8: Exterior vertical joints between different materials listed above. ' 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-1. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. ' E. Joint-Sealant Application JS-9: Exterior perimeter joints around frames of doors, windows, and louvers. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-1. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. F. Joint-Sealant Application JS-11: Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed interior ' surfaces of exterior walls. 1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant LS-1. ' 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. G. Joint-Sealant Application JS-12: Interior perimeter joints around doors and windows in exterior ' openings. 1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant LS-1. ' 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. H. Joint-Sealant Application JS-13: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. ' 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-2. • 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. ' I. Joint-Sealant Application JS-15: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. 1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant LS-1. ' 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. END OF SECTION 07920 ' 1 • JOINT SEALANTS 0705A 07920-8 ' SECTION 08110 -STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1:1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and 'general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. B. Related Sections ' 1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware"for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 2. Division 9 Sections"Painting"for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS. ' A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. B.. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: ' 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors,'including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type; including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages,joints, field splices, and connections. ' 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. ' C'. Other Action Submittals: 1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers 'for details and openings as those on ' Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. • STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0705A 08110- 1 D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified ' testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly. • 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. ' 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded ' to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a ' vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. ' 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. ' • 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, ' templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering , products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. ' 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. ' 5. Kewanee Corporation (The). 6. Mesker Door Inc. 7. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 8. Windsor Republic Doors. ' • STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0705A 08110-2 2.2 MATERIALS • A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for ' exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting,,or surface defects; pickled and oiled. ' C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial .Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 metallic coating. ' D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591 M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011 M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. ' E. -Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ' ASTM C 143/C 143M. G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. ' H. Glazing:. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing." ' 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with ' smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. Design: Flush panel. ' 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, pol yisocya nu rate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core. ' a. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value(R-value)of not less than 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 1) Locations: Exterior doors. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge. a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 4. " Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or ' channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors Mand'Frames." STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0705A 08110-3 B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors ' complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and • model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A(Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless). , C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying ' with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A(Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2(Seamless). ' D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. ' E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. ' B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless approved otherwise. . 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet. , C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. • 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. , 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless approved otherwise. 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet. ' D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. , 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: ' 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not ' less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long;or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. ' B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: ' 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0705A 08110-4 2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS • A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material ' as door face sheet in which they are installed. B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated. ' C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.' 2.7 FABRICATION ' A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes -and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated inANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861. ' C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal • as frames. F ' 1. . Welded Frames: Weld flush face.joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints,. fabricated from. same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to ' jambs by butt welding. 3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated: 1 4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. ' 6. Jamb Anchors-. Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of ' frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.- 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high. ' b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of • frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0705A 08110-5 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. • 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches ' or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. 7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold-or hot-rolled steel sheet. F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door ' Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861. ' 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. • 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. , 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors ' and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES , A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer , complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0705A 08110-6 1 1 PART 3- EXECUTION • 3.1 EXAMINATION 1 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with ' requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. For the record, pre_are written report,.endorsed,by Installer,_listing__conditions detrimental to 1 _ performance of the Work. 1 D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 PREPARATION 'A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling,.and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed ' faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness; alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1 - 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees 1 from jamb perpendicular to frame head. • 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist:. Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel ' lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. ' C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 1 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B: Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with 1 HMMA 840. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent 1 anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. 1 b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; • grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth,flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0705A 08110- 7 1 C. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. ' d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. • e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. ' f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. ' 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. ' a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. , 4. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to ' other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. ' 5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: - Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 ' degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. ' C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on • parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified ' below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: ' a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. ' C. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 1/2 inch. , D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not t more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c.from each corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ' A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final ' inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. • STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0705A 08110- 8 1 B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. • C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of ' prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 08110 1 1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0705A 08110-9 1 SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS ' PART 1 - GENERAL • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: ' 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section"Steel Doors and Frames"for hollow metal door frames. ' 2. Division 8 Section "Glazing"for glass vision panels in flush wood doors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, and trim for ' openings. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and , other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. ' 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors. D. Samples for Verification: ' 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished ' work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated." FLUSH WOOD DOORS 0705A 08211 - 1 1 C. Fire Rated Wood Doors: Door complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing ' and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for, fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. ' 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. 1 B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY '. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer; and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in ' materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84- inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. ' 1. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial • Completion: ' a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ' 1. Flush Wood Doors: a. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. b. GRAHAM Manufacturing Corp. C. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. d. Oshkosh Architectural Door Co: e. VT Industries Inc. f. Weyerhaeuser Company. ' 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL • A. Doors for Transparent Finish: FLUSH WOOD DOORS 0705A 08211 -2 I. Grade: Premium,with Grade A faces. ` 2. Species and Cut: Red oak, plain sliced. ' 3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. • 4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 5. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate , room or area of building. 6. Stiles: Same species as faces or a compatible species. 2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS ' A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements: ' 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. . 2. Provide doors with either glued-block or structural composite lumber cores instead of ' particleboard cores at locations where exit devices are indicated. B. Interior Veneer-Faced Doors: ' 1. Core: Particleboard. 2. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction. C. Fire-Rated Doors: t 1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or ' manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire rating indicated. 2. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw- holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated as needed to • ' eliminate through-bolting hardware. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer ' stile matching face veneer. 2.4 FABRICATION ' A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting. B. Factory machine doors for-hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply ' with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI All 15-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and ' alignment before factory machining. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING ' A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, t including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be ' omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. • B. Finish doors at factory. ' FLUSH WOOD DOORS 0705A 08211 - 3 1 1 C. Transparent Finish: ' 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI catalyzed polyurethane system. ' 3. Staining: As approved by Owner/Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Effect: Open-grain finish. 5. Sheen: Satin. PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors'and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door.Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. • 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. ' C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire- rated-doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees)at lock and hinge edges. ' 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in-2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent - permitted by labeling agency. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING ' A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. • FLUSH WOOD DOORS 0705A 08211 -4 B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of , repair or refinishing. • END OF SECTION 08211 ' t ' I 1 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 0705A 08211 -5 ' SECTION 08361 -SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS • PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes electrically operated sectional doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications"for miscellaneous steel supports. ' 2. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems" for building systems incorporating sectional overhead doors. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction • and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components. B. Delegated Design: Design sectional doors, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a ' qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Structural Performance: Exterior sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, ' and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 Ibf/sq. ft., acting inward and ' outward. D. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to ASTM E 283. ' 1. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm/sq. ft. at 15 and 25 mph . E. Operation Cycles: Provide sectional door components and operators capable of operating for ' not less than number of cycles indicated for each door. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. Include the following: SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 0705A 08361 - 1 1 . 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profile ' door sections, and finishes. • 2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. ' B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to , other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field ' connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and ' textures available for units with factory-applied finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. ' D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: ' 1. Flat Door Sections. 6 inches square. 2. Frame for Paneled Door Sections: 6 inches long of each width of stile and rail required. E. Maintenance Data: For sectional doors to include in maintenance manuals. ' F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. ' • 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional doors from single source from single manufacturer. ' 1. Obtain operators and controls from sectional door manufacturer. , C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless ' otherwise indicated. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or ' replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: , a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 0705A 08361 -2 ' b. Faulty operation of hardware. • C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use; rust through. ' d. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials. 2. Warranty Period: Five years frorii.date of Substantial Completion. ' B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS A. Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Fabricate from zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with indicated zinc coating and thickness. 1. Fabricate section faces from single sheets to provide sections not more than 24 inches high and of indicated thickness. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-groove weathertight seal, with a reinforcing flange return. ' 2. For insulated doors, provide sections with continuous thermal-break construction, separating the exterior and interior faces of door. B. Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet not less than 0.064-inch nominal coated thickness and welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed from not less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles not more ' than 48 inches apart. C. Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom-section profile. ' D. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized-steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed ' to depth and bolted or welded in place. Ensure that reinforcement does not obstruct vision lites. E. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. ' F. Foamed-in-Place Thermal Insulation: Insulate interior of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard polyurethane insulation, foamed in place to completely fill interior of section and pressure bonded to face sheets to prevent delamination under wind load, and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ' ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within steel sections that incorporate the following interior facing material, with no exposed insulation: ' 1. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with indicated thickness. SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 0705A 08361 -3 G. Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned, with tight hairline joints and ' free of warp, twist, and deformation. 2.2 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES ' A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, 1 sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown on Drawings, and complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M for minimum G60 zinc coating. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball- bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches apart for door-drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel track reinforcement and support ' members, complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 123/A 123M. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. ' C. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise indicated. D. Windows: Manufacturer's standard window units of type and size indicated and in arrangement shown. Set glazing in vinyl, rubber, or neoprene glazing channel for metal-framed doors and ' elastic glazing compound for wood doors, as required. Provide removable stops of same material as door-section frames. 2.3 HARDWARE A. General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless- ' steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type. B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges of not less than 0.079-inch- nominal coated thickness at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written t recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is not possible. Provide double-end hinges where required, for doors over 16 feet wide ' unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer. C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double ' hinges are required. Provide 3-inch- diameter roller tires for 3-inch- wide track and 2-inch- diameter roller tires for 2-inch-wide track. D. Push/Pull Handles: For emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized-steel lifting handles on ' each side of door. 2.4 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs ' fabricated from steel-spring wire complying with ASTM A 229/A 229M, mounted on torsion shaft SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 0705A 08361 -4 ' made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles • indicated. ' B. Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft. Provide one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet long and two additional brackets at one-third points to support shafts more than 16 feet long unless closer spacing is recommended by door manufacturer. ' C. Cables: Galvanized-steel lifting cables with cable safety factor of at least 5 to 1. D. Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded steel or spring-loaded bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks. E. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag. a F. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation. 2.5. ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and "operation cycles" requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories • required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. 1 Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA 1CS 6; with NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc. ' B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. C. Door-Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification. 1. Trolley: Trolley operator mounted to ceiling above and to rear of door in raised position ' and directly connected to door with drawbar. D. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 11 Section "Common Motor ' Requirements for Equipment" unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrical Characteristics: ' a. Phase: Polyphase. b. Volts: 208. c. Hertz: 60. 1 2. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch)for motor • exposure indicated. SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 0705A 08361 - 5 3. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, ' accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less • th2n 8 in/sec. and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. , 4. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. 5. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed. 6. Use adjustable motor-mounting bases for belt-driven operators. E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor ' controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. F. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety , sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction ' in door opening without contact between door and obstruction. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to ' detect damage to or disconnection of sensor device. When self-monitoring feature is activated, door closes only with sustained pressure on close button. G. Remote-Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close,"and "Stop." 1. Interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose ' NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. • H. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 Ibf. I. Radio-Control System: Consisting of the following: , 1. Three-channel universal coaxial receiver to open, close, and stop door (one door only as location indicated on drawings). 2. Remote antenna and mounting kit. 3. Commercial quality keypad remote entry system mounted on exterior jamb of door (one door only as location indicated on drawings). 2.6 DOOR ASSEMBLY A. Steel Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections. ' 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, ' the following: a. Overhead Door Corporation. b. Raynor. ' C. Wayne-Dalton Corp. • SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 0705A 08361 -6 ' B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 20,000. • C. R-Value: 12.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (R-12). ' D. Steel Sections: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet with G60 zinc coating. ' 1. Section Thickness: 2 inches. 2. Exterior-Face, Steel Sheet Thickness: 0.040-inch-(20 guage) nominal coated thickness. a. Surface: Manufacturers standard flat, grovved, ribbed or fluted. ' 3. Insulation: -Foamed-in-place. . 4. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet of 0.022-inch- (24 guage) ' nominal coated thickness. E. Track Configuration: Standard-lift track. ' F. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter of door._ G. Windows: Approximately 24 by 7 .inches , with curved corners, and spaced apart the ' approximate..distance_as indicated on Drawings; in one row at height indicated on Drawings; installed with insulated glazing of the following type: 1. Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard. H. Roller-Tire Material: Manufacturer's standard. ' I. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly. • J. Counterbalance Type: Torsion spring. ' K. Electric Door Operator: 1. Usage Classification: Heavy duty, 60 to 90 cycles per hour. ' 2. Operator Type: Trolley. 3. Motor Exposure: Interior,.clean, and dry. 4. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up type. 5. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor. 6. Remote-Control Station: Interior. 7. Other Equipment: Radio-control system —keypad remote entry system (one door only as location indicated on drawings) . ' L. Door Finish: 1. Powder-Coated Finish: Color and gloss as selected by Owner / Architect from ' manufacturer's full range. 2. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard color. 3. Finish of Interior Facing Material: Finish as selected by Owner / Architect from ' manufacturer's full range. 2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS ' A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for • recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 0705A 08361 - 7 B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. ' Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of • approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of ' prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with ' requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine locations of electrical connections. , C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION ' A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, , inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and • as specified. B. Tracks: ' 1. Fasten vertical track assembly to opening jambs and framing, spaced not more than 24 inches apart. ' 2. Hang horizontal track assembly from structural overhead framing with angles or channel hangers attached to framing by welding or bolting, or both. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door- operating equipment. , 3. Repair galvanized coating on tracks according to ASTM A 780. 3.3 STARTUP SERVICES , A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. ' 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. ' 3.4 ADJUSTING ' A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of • warp, twist, or distortion. SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 0705A 08361 -8 B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. • C. Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter. ' D. Align and adjust motors, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls according to manufacturer's written instructions. ' E. Touch-up-Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. t3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors. END OF SECTION 08361 • 1 1 1 • 1 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 0705A 08361 -9 1 SECTION 08411 -ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS ' • PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS , A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior and interior aluminum-framed entrance doors and storefront systems. ' a. Glazing is retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 2. Exterior aluminum-framed storefront window systems and units. t B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with ' aluminum-framed systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section. 2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements to the extent not specified in this ' Section. • 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS , A. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following: , 1. Structural loads. 2. Thermal movements. ' 3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 5. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. ' C. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements, to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. ' f. Sealant failure. g. Failure of operating units to function properly. B. Structural Loads: ' 1. Wind Loads: 90 mi/h wind velocity and as indicated on structural drawings. • ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0705A 08411 - 1 1 ' 2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings. • C. Deflection of Framing Members: ' 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to %2 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. D. Structural-Test _Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems- -tested _according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design .pressures, ' systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds. ' E. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed • glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 Ibf/sq.ft. G. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ' ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. 1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating systems or appearing on 1 systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not considered water leakage. ' H. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor(CRF)of not less than 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503. ' I. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having average U-factor of not more than 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503. 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual • components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated. 1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0705A 08411 -2 B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, ' and attachments to other work. • 1. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, , functions, quantities, and locations. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard ' sizes. D. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. ' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming engineering responsibility and performing work of ' this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum-framed systems including Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project and submission of reports of , tests performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies. 2. Power Assist Operator Maintenance Proximity: The installer shall maintain offices and ' repair or service facilities not more than 2 hours normal travel time from the Project site. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by ' dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they • relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction ' testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory ' data to Architect for review. C. Accessible Entrances: Comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers ' Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities(ADAAG)." D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code- ' -Aluminum." E. Door Operators: 1. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide door operators produced by a firm experienced in , manufacturing operators that are similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance. Operator units shall comply with codes ' and regulations and ADA requirements. 2. Fire-Rated and Emergency Exit Openings: Provide door operators that comply with NFPA 80 requirements for doors as emergency exits, and do not interfere with fire ' ratings. 3. UL Standard: Provide power door operators that comply with UL325. • ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0705A 08411 - 3 ' 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS iA. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed ' systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. ' 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum-framed systems without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 WARRANTY ' A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. C. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. ' e. Failure of operating components to function properly. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to.repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not.include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Operator Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the power assist door operator manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace components of the power door operator system that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. ' 1. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to: a. Faulty operation of operators and controls. ' b Deterioration of finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: 2 years after the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.1 ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT MANUFACTURERS ' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0705A 08411 -4 B. Basis-of-Design and Product: The design for some of aluminum-framed systems is based on ' Kawneer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide an equal product by one of the following: 1. Kawneer. 2. Tubelite Inc. 3. United States Aluminum. ' 4. EFCO Corporation. 2.2 ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT MATERIALS ' A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. , 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. ' 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/6 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.1OM. B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer complying with ' SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. I 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. ' 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011 M. 2.3 STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEMS ' A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard or heavy extruded-aluminum framing members of not less than 0.125-inch material thickness required and reinforced as to support imposed ' loads. 1. Thermally Broken Construction: Framing members are composite assemblies of two ' separate extruded-aluminum components permanently bonded by an elastomeric material of low thermal conductance or High-performance plastic connectors separate framing members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. 2. Provide additional frame reinforcement or minimum 0.185-inch thick material thickness at ' location of hinge and closer anchorage. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with ' nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, ' nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural ' movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0705A 08411 -5 ' D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts • complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements. ' E. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible deflection. F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS ' A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded, that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types. ' OR 2.5 DOORS ' A. Doors: Manufacturer's standard heavy wall glazed doors,for manual swing operation. 1. Heavy Wall Door Construction: 2-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.185-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with ' reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate • concealed tie rods. ' 2. Door Design: Medium or wide stile; 3-1/2-inch nominal minimum width, with 10-inch nominal bottom rail. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled or Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. 2.6 DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide extra heavy-duty units in sizes and types recommended by entrance system and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. ' 1. Opening-Force Requirements: a. Egress Doors: Not more than 30 Ibf required to set door in motion and not more than 15 Ibf required to open door to minimum required width. b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 Ibf. B. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. 1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each door leaf. ' C. Locking Devices, General: Do not require use of key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0705A 08411 -6 1. Opening-Force Requirements: ' a. Delayed-Egress Locks: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a force of • not more than 15 Ibf(67 N)for not more than 3 seconds. ' b. Latches and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 Ibf(67 N)required to release latch. D. Vertical-Rod Exit Devices: Concealed, vertical-rod exit device complying with UL 305 ' requirements, with 2-point top and bottom latching that is released by a full-width crash bar or when locked down (dogged) by lock cylinder or retracting screws beneath housing. Finish to match door finish. Standard: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. 1. Exit Device: Dor-O-Matic 1690 concealed vertical-rod, Kawneer or Equal. ' E. Pull Handles: Aluminum offset, 1 inch diameter, in finish color to match door and framing, pull ' handles equal to the following: 1. CO-9, Kawneer. ' F. Push Bar: Aluminum, 1 inch diameter, in finish color to match door and framing, at interior vestibule doors, equal to the following: 1. Style"CP II", Kawneer or equal. G. Cylinders: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." ' H. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing. I. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6. ' • J. Closers: With accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required by door size, ' exposure to weather, and anticipated high frequency of use, and adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 1. Standard: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. 2. Type: Single acting, highest quality unit available designed for heavy duty institutional and high traffic application, approved by Architect and School District. 3. Back Check: Adjustable. ' 4. Positive Dead Stop: Coordinated with hold-open angle, or at angle selected by Architect. 5. Anchored securely for heavy duty institutional and high traffic application. K. Auxiliary Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, as appropriate for door location indicated and ' approved by Architect and School District. L. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. ' 1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded PVC. 2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon- ' fabric or aluminum-strip backing. M. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed ' fasteners on mounting strip. • ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0705A 08411 - 7 f N. Thresholds: Raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height • of 1/2 inch(13 mm). 1. Standard: BHMA A156.21. 2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." B. ..Bituminous ..Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic -paint complying with SSPC-Paint 9-2 requirements except containing no asbestos,'formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 2.8 STOREFRONT FABRICATION A. .. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of ' finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. , 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. • 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops). E. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing hardware, especially hinge and closer hardware. 1. At exterior and interior vestibule doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. F. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware. 1. At all exterior and vestibule pairs of doors, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. G. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes. • ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0705A 08411 -8 i i H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. • 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" ' for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A421A44, Class 1, 0.018 mm or thicker. Color: Medium or Dark Bronze. ' PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. ' 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION • A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. , 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. ' 6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. ' 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing ' members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Set continuous sill members, thresholds and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"and to produce weathertight installation. • ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0705A 08411 -9 ' E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp • or rack. ' F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." G. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. ' 1. All Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weathertight closure. 2. Field-Installed Hardware: Install surface-mounted hardware according to hardware manufacturers'written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. H. Install-insulation materials as.specified_in Division 7 Section-'Building-Insulation," ' I. Install-perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation. J. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 ' inch over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch. 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch. • 3.3 ADJUSTING ' A. Entrances: Adjust operating hardware for, smooth operation according to hardware manufacturers'written instructions. ' 1. For doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from the latch measured to the leading door edge. END OF SECTION 08411 • ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0705A 08411 - 10 SECTION 08520-ALUMINUM WINDOWS • PART 1 -GENERAL , 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes fixed and operable aluminum-framed windows for exterior locations. B. Related Sections include the following: , 1. Division 08 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts"for coordinating finish among aluminum fenestration units. ' 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Performance class designations according to AAMANVDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: 1. HC: Heavy Commercial. B. Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: • 1. Design pressure number in pounds force per square foot(pascals) used to determine the , structural test pressure and water test pressure. C. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure. ' D. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size). Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to ' comply with requirements for performance class. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ' A. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, , and that are of minimum test size indicated below: 1. Size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for gateway performance for both gateway performance and optional performance grade. 2. Size indicated on Drawings. B. Structural Performance: Provide aluminum windows capable of withstanding the effects of the , following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test: • ALUMINUM WINDOWS 0705A 08520- 1 1 ' 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind • speed indicated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof ' heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a: Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. ' b. Importance Factor: 1.15. C. Exposure Category: B. C. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal ' movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by__preyenting__buc_kling, opening.of_joints, overstressing_of_components,.-failure-of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering ' calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100.deg C). material surfaces. ' 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of aluminum window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, installation details, etc. • 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication and assembly of aluminum windows and used to determine the following: R ' . a. Structural test pressures and design pressures from wind loads indicated. b. Deflection limitations of glass framing systems. ' C. Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. ' 1. Main Framing Member: 6-inch-sections of extrusions with factory-applied color finish. D.. Field quality-control test reports. ' E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last four years by a qualified testing agency for each type, class, grade, and size of aluminum window. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted. F. Maintenance Data: For [operable window sash] [operating hardware] [weather stripping] [window system operators] [and] finishes to include in maintenance manuals. ' G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. • 1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 0705A 08520- 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. ' B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by ' inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations. C. ...Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aluminum windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies ' as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. E. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMANVDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American 1 Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors," for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, ' accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. ' 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Field Measurements: Verify aluminum window openings by field measurements before . fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying ' the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening ' dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 WARRANTY ' A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty ' period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: ' a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. ' C. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of metals, other materials, and metal finishes beyond normal weathering. ' e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: • 1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 0705A 08520 - 3 1 a. Window: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. • b. Pre-Glazing: 10 years from date of Manufacturer. C. Metal Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers that may offer__products.--that may be incorporated.-into the Work include, but are not -limited to; the following: ' 1. " EFCO Corporation. 2. Kawneer; an Alcoa Company. 3. TRACO. ' 4. Winco Window Company. 2.2 MATERIALS A. _ Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy P Y and temper recommended b aluminum window manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi. ultimate tensile strength, not less than 16,000-psi minimum yield strength, and not less than 1 0.062-inch thickness at any location for the main frame and sash members. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials • warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. ' 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts. ' 2. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. ' C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength ' to withstand design pressure indicated. E. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for ' permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action and for complete concealment when aluminum window is closed. 1. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying ' with AAMANVDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, F. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702. • 1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 0705A 08520-4 G. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated windows, provide window manufacturer's ' standard, permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating type recommended by sealant • manufacturer for joint size and movement. ' 2.3 WINDOW A. Window Type: Fixed and Projected awning as indicated on Drawings. t B. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide aluminum windows of performance ' indicated that comply with AAMANVDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS . 1. Performance Class and Grade: HC 40. C. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal ' performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 45. 2.4 GLAZING , A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed aluminum window units. ' B. Glass: Bronze tinted, insulating-glass units, argon gas filled, with low-E coating pyrolytic on second surface or sputtered on second or third surface, complying with Division 08 Section ' "Glazing." C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal. t • 2.5 HARDWARE , A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock aluminum windows, ' and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. B. Four-or Six-Bar Friction Hinges: Comply with AAMA 904. ' 1. Locking mechanism and handles for manual operation. 2. Friction Shoes: Provide friction shoes of nylon or other nonabrasive, nonstaining, , noncorrosive, durable material. C. Projected Awning Windows: Provide the following operating hardware: ' 1. Operator: Lever operator located on jamb at sill. 2. Hinge: Concealed four- or six-bar friction hinge located on each jamb near top rail; two per ventilator. ' 3. Limit Device: Concealed friction adjustor, adjustable stay bar or support arms with adjustable, limited, hold-open limit device; located on jamb of each ventilator. • ALUMINUM WINDOWS 0705A 08520- 5 ' 1 ' 2.6 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on inside of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. ' 1. Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens: Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for Windows,"Architectural C-24 class. B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1.00.4. Fabricate frames with-mitered- or coped--joints or-- corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. ' 1. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated. 2. Finish: Match aluminum window members. 1 C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration; in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. ' D. Aluminum Wire Fabric: 18-by-16 mesh of 0.011-inch-diameter, coated aluminum wire. 1. Wire-Fabric Finish: Natural bright. E. Wickets: Provide sliding wickets, framed and trimmed for a tight fit and for durability during ' handling. ' 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. ' B. Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. C. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate aluminum windows with an integral, concealed, ' low-conductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side; in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact. . ' 1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than three years and has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation and to show adequate strength and security of glass retention. D. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator. E. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. F. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with ' anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 0705A 08520-6 1 G. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and ' dimensions indicated but not less than 0.062-inch- thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope corners, and weld and dress smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to match window units. Provide subframes capable of withstanding design loads of window units. ' H. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" ' and with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. I. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 08 Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. , 2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL , A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, ' temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are ' acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are , acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum ' Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Class II, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A32/A34 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, ' integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. 1. Color: Medium or Dark bronze. , PART 3- EXECUTION , 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and ' operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation. 1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction ' debris. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 0705A 08520- 7 ' .1 ' 2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at • joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches of opening. ' 3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION ' A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories,_and_other components. ' B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. ' C. Set sill members in bed of.sealant or with gaskets, as indicated,for weathertight construction. D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture ' migrating within windows to the exterior. E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic. action at points of contact with other materials. 1 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. ' C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior I ' concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 08520 1 • ALUMINUM WINDOWS 0705A 08520-8 I i SECTION 08710- DOOR HARDWARE , PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract; including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY , A. This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware for the following: ' a. Swinging doors. 2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. ' B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section. , 1. Cylinders for locks on aluminum entrance doors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. , B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing • fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating ' complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule at ' the end of Part 3. 2. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. , b. Manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. ' d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. ' g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 3. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible , date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include • Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. ' DOOR HARDWARE 0705A 08710 - 1 ' 1 ' C. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to • unique door designations. ' D. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. ' E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material -design,-and-extent-to-that-indicated-for-this-Project and whose work-has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. ' B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and ' keying. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: ' 1. General: Comply with regulatory requirements for all hardware, including making recommended modification to Architect to comply, if necessary. 2. Comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act ' ADA, as follows: • a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or ' twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. ' 3. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. ' Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Door Closers: Not more than 30 lbf to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open door to minimum required width. ' c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. E. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having ' jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. • 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING DOOR HARDWARE 0705A 08710-2 A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to ' Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. , C. Deliver keys directly to Owner. 1.6 COORDINATION , A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop , Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.7 WARRANTY ' A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other ' rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace ' components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: , 1. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. 2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. C. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise ' indicated. • D. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. , 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and ' maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE , A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and ' the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Verify 'that all hardware in the Door Hardware Schedule complies with the minimum requirements of this Section; if not, adjust accordingly. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products ' equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive ' qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the • end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1 DOOR HARDWARE 0705A 08710 -3 1 ' 1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum • requirements.. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. ' 2.2 HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Hinges: a. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI). b. --Hager-Companies(HAG).* C. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB). ' d. McKinney Products Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (MCK). e. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (SCH). B. Standards: Comply With the following: 1. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1. 2. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7. 3. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: BHMA Al 56.17. C. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: ' 1. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. D. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely(both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. E. Hinge Weight: Provide not less than the following: 1. Entrance Doors: Heavy-weight hinges. 2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges. 3. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges, unless noted otherwise. F. Hinge Base Metal: Provide not less than the following: 1. Exterior and High Humidity Area Hinges: Stainless steel,with stainless-steel pin. 2. Interior Hinges: Steel, with steel pin as a minimum, unless noted otherwise. 3. Hinges for Fire Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin as a minimum. ' G. Hinge Options: Comply with the following minimums and as indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule: 1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a ' groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following applications: a. Outswinging exterior doors. 2. Corners: Square. ' H. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. ' 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. ' DOOR HARDWARE 0705A 08710-4 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors, wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface • of hinges. , 2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products equal to the ' following: 1. Mechanical Locks and Latches: ' a. Schlage Lock Company; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(SCH).* B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 2. Exit Locks: BHMA A156.5. ' C. Bored Locks: BHMA Grade 1; Series 4000. D. Lock Trim: Comply with the following: 1. Lever: Cast. E. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire , door requirements, and as follows: 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw. , 2. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw. • F. Backset: 2-3/4 inches. , 2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: , 1. Cylinders: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. B. Standards: Comply with the following: ' 1. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5. 2. Key Control System: BHMA A156.5. , C. Cylinder Grade: BHMA Grade 1. D. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless ' steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: 1. Number of Pins: Six. 2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight-or clover-type cam. 3. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. ' 4. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. E. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the • following: ' DOOR HARDWARE 0705A 08710-5 , ' 1. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only • the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. ' F. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of ' construction keys without cylinder removal. G. Keying System: Provide a keying system complying with the following requirements: ' 1. Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key and a master key. H. Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys complying with the following: ' 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: ' a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner. 2. Quantity: Provide the following: ' a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. ' 2.5 STRIKES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering ' products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: • B. Standards: Comply with the following: . ' 1. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 2. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5. 3. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. ' C. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set: ' 2.6 CLOSERS ' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Surface-Mounted Closers: ' a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(LCN).* B. Standards: Comply with the following: t1. Closers: BHMA A156.4. ' C. Surface Closers: BHMA Grade 1. • D. Certified Products: Provide door closers listed in BHMA's"Directory of Certified Door Closers.' ' DOOR HARDWARE 0705A 08710-6 E. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written ' recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions • and requirements for opening force. ' 2.7 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering ' products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Metal Protective Trim Units: a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). , b. Hager Companies (HAG). C. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). d. Ives: H. B. Ives(IVS). e. NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTQ). f. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM). g. Triangle Brass Manufacturing'Company, Inc. (TBM). , B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.6. C. Materials: Fabricate protection plates from not less than the following: , 1. Stainless Steel: 0.050 inch thick; beveled top and 2 sides, except as noted otherwise at , addition to existing building. D. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine or self-tapping screws. ' E. Furnish protection plates sized 1-1/2 inches less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side, by height specified in Door Hardware Schedule, but in no case less than 8 inches. 2.8 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering ' products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). ' 2. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(GJ)." 3. Hager Companies(HAG). , 4. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). 5. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS). 6. NT Quality'Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTQ). 7. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM). , 8. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. (TBM). B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Al 56.16. 2. Mechanical Door Holders: BHMA Al 56.16. 3. Combination Overhead Holders and Stops: BHMA A156.8. 4. Door Silencers: BHMA A156.16. C. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Grade 1. • DOOR HARDWARE 0705A 08710-7 , ' D. Mechanical Door Holders: BHMA Grade 1. . E. Combination Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA Grade 1. ' F. Silencers for Wood Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum 5/8 by 3/4 inch; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. ' G. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. ' 2.9 DOOR GASKETING A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP). 2: Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM). 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). ' B. Standard: Comply with BHMA Al 56.22. ' C. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, gasketing on_ interior doors where indicated or required. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. ' 1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles,forming seal when doors are closed. 3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is 1 closed. D. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for ' smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283. E. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke- ' control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors. - F. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings ' indicated, based on testing according to UL 10B or NFPA 252. G. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. H. Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702. 2.10 THRESHOLDS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering ' products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP). • 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM).` 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc..(RE). ' DOOR HARDWARE 0705A 08710 -8 B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.21. ' 2.11 FABRICATION • A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's ' name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method ' indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a-quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. , C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to ' commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications: a. Mortise hinges to doors. ' b. Strike plates to frames. C. Closers to doors and frames. 2. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications, unless door blocking is ' provided: 40 a. Surface hinges to doors. ' b. Closers to doors and frames. C. Surface-mounted exit devices. 3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors. ' 4. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 2.12 FINISHES A. Standard: Comply with BHMA Al 56.18. B. BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the ' following: 1. BHMA 626: Satin chromium plated over nickel, over brass or bronze base metal. 2. BHMA 627: Satin aluminum, clear coated, over aluminum base metal. 3. BHMA 628: Satin aluminum, clear anodized, over aluminum base metal. , 4. BHMA 630: Satin stainless steel, over stainless-steel base metal. 5. BHMA 718: Satin aluminum, uncoated; aluminum base metal. PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION • DOOR HARDWARE 0705A 08710-9 ' A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and • other conditions affecting performance. ' B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 series. 1.- Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107. ' B. -Wood-Doors: Comply-with DHI A1-15--W series. ' 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated' in following applicable ' publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." ' 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface- ' mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. (� 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment ' substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. ' C. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." ' 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to ' operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. . 1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely ' from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch; measured to ' the leading edge of the door. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ' A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. • B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. ' DOOR HARDWARE 0705A 08710 - 10 C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage ' or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, ' and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. 3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE GROUP NO. 1 (Exterior Doors) Doors 119B, 120A, 120C, 121A, 122A ' 1 Lockset D80PD x Rho x US26D Schlage ' 1 %2 pr. Hinges 13131191 —4 1/2 x 412-US32D Hager 1 Closer 4110 H-CUSH x AL LCN 1 Kickplate 8"x 341/2"x 0.050 ga. x US32D , 1 Threshold 2005AV x 40" Pemko 1 set Weatherstripping 297AV Pemko , 1 Door Sweep 315AV Pemko 1 Drip 346C x 40" Pemko , GROUP NO. 2 Doors 121 B 1 Passage D10S x Rho x US26D Schlage ' 1 %z pr. Hinges BB1191 —4 %2 x 4 1/2- US32D Hager ' 1 Closer 4110 H-CUSH x AL LCN 1 Kickplate 8"x 34 1/2'x 0.050 ga. x US32D 1 Threshold 2005AV x 40" Pemko ' 1 set Weatherstripping 297AV Pemko 1 Door Sweep 315AV Pemko , GROUP NO. 3 Door 115A, 111 A, 110A , 1 Passage D10S x Rho x US26D Schlage 1 %2 pr. Hinges BB1279 -4 1/z x 4 1/2- US26D Hager ' 1 Stop 50C x US26D G.J. 1 set Silencers ' GROUP NO. 4 Door 101A Cylinders to match aluminum door hardware Schlage ' DOOR HARDWARE 0705A 08710- 11 I\ GROUP NO. 5 Pr. Doors 201 B • 1 Passage D1 OS x Rho x US26D Schlage 1 Trim D170 x Rho x US26D Schlage 3 pr. Hinges BB1279—4 '/z x 4%x US26D Hager ' 1 set Flushbolts F136W-DP2 x US26D G.J. 2 Stops 60C x US26D G.J. ' 1 set Silencers GROUP NO. 6 ' Doors 108A, 107A, 108B 1 Passage D10S x Rho x US26D Schlage ' 1 '/z pr. Hinges BB1279—4 '/Z x 4 '/- US26D Hager 1 Closer 4041&4111 x AL LCN 1 Kickplate 8"x 34 '/2"x 0.050 ga. X US32D 1 Stop 50C x US26D G.J. 1 set Silencers ' GROUP NO. 7 (Office Doors) Doors 102A, 103A, 104A, 105A, 106A, 113A '! 1 Lockset D53PD x Rho x US26D Schlage ' 1 % pr. Hinges BB1279—4 '/z x.4 '/z- US26D Hager 1 Stop 60C x US26D G.J. 1 set Silencers ' GROUP NO. 8 (Stairway Door) Door 201A ' 1 Lockset D70PD x Rho x US26D Schlage 1 '/ pr. Hinges 1361191 —4 '/2 x 4 '/2- US32D Hager ' 1 Closer P4040 x AL LCN 1 Kickplate 8"x 34 '/z" x 0.050 ga. X US32D 1 Stop 50C x US26D G.J. 1 set Silencers 1 GROUP NO. 9 Not Applicable. • ' DOOR HARDWARE 0705A 08710- 12 GROUP NO. 10 , Doors 109A, 1098 1 Privacy D40S x Rho x US26D Schlage • 1 pr. Hinges BB1279—4 '/z x 4 1/2-US26D Hager 1 pr. Closers 4041 &4111 x AL LCN ' 1 set Silencers 1 Stop 60C x US26D G.J. GROUP NO. 11 (General Office Doors) ' Doors 112A, 119A, 119C 1 Pull 111 x 70B x US32D Rockwood t 1 Pushplate 8" x 16"x 0.062 ga. x US32D Rockwood 1 %z pr. Hinges BB1199—4 %x 4'/Z- US32D Hager ' 1 Closer 4041 &4111 —Cush x AL LCN 1 Kickplate 8"x 34 '/2" x 0.062 ga. US32D Rockwood ' 1 Stop 50C x US26D G.J. 1 Threshold 2005AV x 40" Pemko 1 set Weatherstripping 297AV Pemko ' li GROUP NO. 12 Doors 114A, 116A ' 1 Pull 111 k 70B x US32D Rockwood ' 1 Pushplate 8" x 16" x 0.062 ga. x US32D Rockwood 1 %pr. Hinges BB1199—4 '/z x 4 '/z- US32D Hager 1 Closer 4041 &4111 —Cush x AL LCN ' 1 Kickplate 8"x 341/2'x 0.062 ga. US32D Rockwood 1 Stop 50C x US26D G.J. ' GROUP NO. 13 Doors 118A 1 Pull 111 x 70B x US32D Rockwood ' 1 Pushplate 8"x 16"x 0.062 ga. x US32D Rockwood ' 1 '/2 pr. Hinges BB1199—4 1h x 4 '/2- US32D Hager 1 Closer 4111 —Cush x AL LCN 1 Kickplate 8" x 34 1/2' x 0.062 ga. US32D Rockwood 1 1 Threshold 2005AV x 40" Pemko 1 set Weatherstripping 297AV Pemko ' END OF SECTION 08710 • 1 DOOR HARDWARE 0705A 08710- 13 , SECTION 08800-GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this ' Section: 1. Windows. ' 2. Doors. 3. Glazed entrances. 4. Interior borrowed lites. 5. Storefront framing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced • glazing publications. ' B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. I ' C. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects ' include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. D. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that-,are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for ' maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. ' E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written ' instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS • A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind ' and impact loads (where applicable)without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable GLAZING 0705A 08800 - 1 to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or ' gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in • construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in ' strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: ' a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated on structural drawings. C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the t following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface I temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. ' B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- square Samples for glass and of 12-inch- long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material ' representative in color of the adjoining framing system. • 1. Each color of tinted float glass. ' 2. Insulating glass for each designation indicated. 3. For each color of exposed glazing sealant indicated. 4. Wire glass. 5. Tempered glass, each thickness required. ' C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. ' D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, ' design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Clear Glass: Obtain clear float glass from one primary-glass , manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Tinted Glass: Obtain tinted, heat-absorbing, and light-reducing float ' glass from one primary-glass manufacturer for each tint color indicated. • GLAZING 0705A 08800-2 D. Source Limitations for Insulating Glass: Obtain insulating-glass units from one manufacturer • using the same type of glass and other components for each type of unit indicated. ' E. Source Limitations for Tempered Glass: Obtain tempered-glass units from one. manufacturer using the same type of glass and other components for each type of unit indicated. ' F. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period. ' G. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and-inspecting-agency__acceptable-to.authorities having jurisdiction; for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. ' H. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1. 1 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ' I. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1 J. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following inspecting and ' testing agency: • 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council. ' 17 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING t A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. ' 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. ' 1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. 1.9 WARRANTY ' A.- General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in • addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. GLAZING 0705A 08800-3 B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Coated-Glass Products: Written warranty, made out to 1 Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping • point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. ' 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner ' and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for laminated- glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner and , signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to I Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS ' A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select). 2.2 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS A. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing , select). ti n: Interior aluminum entrance doors; ' 1. Location: interior aluminum storefront entrance o , systems; interior hollow metal windows. 2. Thickness: '/ inch. , 3. Color: Clear. 2.3 WIRED GLASS ' A. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q8(glazing); 6.4 mm thick; of form and mesh pattern indicated below: , 1. Polished Wired Glass: Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), and as follows: a. Mesh m1 (diamond). ' b. Location: Windows in fire rated doors. • C. Thickness: % inch. d. Color: Clear. , GLAZING 0705A 08800-4 2.4 INSULATING GLASS • A. Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a ' dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in the Insulating-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass .where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Provide Kind FT(fully tempered)where safety glass is indicated. ' a. Location: Exterior aluminum entrance doors; exterior aluminum storefront entrance systems; exterior aluminum storefront framing. b. Unit Thickness: 1 inch. ' c. - Color: Bronze Tint. B. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows: ' 1. Manufacturer's standard sealants. C. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction complying. ' with the following requirements: 1. Aluminum with mill or clear-anodized finish. 2. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction. 2.5 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS • A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as ' demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. ' B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 for each liquid-applied, chemically curing sealant. ' 2.6 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: ' 1. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous • pressure. GLAZING 0705A 08800 -5 B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with • AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. ' 2.7 GLAZING GASKETS A. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black. ' 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A.- General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. ' B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. , D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. ' E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). , • 2.9 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS ' A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with , system performance requirements. PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 PREPARATION , A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.2 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. ' B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, • minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. ' GLAZING 0705A 08800-6 i ' C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass • from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair ' performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of ' compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. ' Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant . width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. ' H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. ' I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. i3.3 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush ' with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to ' make them fit opening. C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to ' jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. ' F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. • Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. GLAZING 0705A 08800- 7 3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. t B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of ' openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.5 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated. , 3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. ' B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass ' manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at 1 frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, ' including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 ' • GLAZING 0705A 08800-8 1 ' SECTION 09250 -GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary tConditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. B. Related Sections include the following: i ' 1. - Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry"for wood stud framing that supports gypsum board. 2. Division 7 Section 'Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in ' assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting"for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS • A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. ' B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory ' indicated. ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an ' independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction ' identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. t1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from . ' weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. GYPSUM BOARD 0705A 09250- 1 1 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board • manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. t B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold ' damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, ' discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2.1 PANELS, GENERAL A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area ' and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD ' A. General: Complying with ASTM C 361C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type ' of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. • 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, ' the following: a. American Gypsum Co. ' b. G-P Gypsum. C. National Gypsum Company. d. USG Corporation. ' B. Type X: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. ' 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled)for prefilling. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES ' A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. , 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. ' b. Bullnose bead. • C. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. GYPSUM BOARD 0705A 09250 -2 ' d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. • e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control)joint. ' g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. ' 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. ' B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. ' 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, ' use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. r , a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. • E 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS I ' A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. ' B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. ' C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from ' 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." E. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." • GYPSUM BOARD 0705A 09250- 3 PART 3- EXECUTION ' • 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. ' B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL , A. Comply with ASTM C 840. ' B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. ' C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. ' D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not ' make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. • E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. ' F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ' ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. ' 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor1roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4-to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural , abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and ' abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported)edges of stud flanges first. ' I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both , faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking • paths around or through assemblies, including sealing-partitions above acoustical ceilings. GYPSUM BOARD 0705A 09250-4 1 ' 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD • A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: Vertical and horizontal surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. B. Single-Layer Application: ' 1. On ceilings, a PP I Y gypsum panels before. wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated.or.required_by_fire-resistance-rated-assembly,-and minimize end-joints. ' a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on . . walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to ' framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance- rated assembly. ' 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers .and face layers • vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger ' joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically(parallel to framing) or horizontally(perpendicular to framing)with vertical ' joints offset.at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum ' board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same ' fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings and according to ' ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. • C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: GYPSUM BOARD 0705A 09250 -5 1 1 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. ' 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. • 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 4. U-Bead: Use where indicated. t D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ' A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, ' fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. t C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. ' D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. ' 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. ' B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, ' discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. ' END OF SECTION 09250 1 1 GYPSUM BOARD 0705A 09250-6 1 ' SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS ' PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ceilings consisting of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. ' B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of ceiling assembly indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. ' 1. 6-inch-square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color. 2. Set of 12-inch-. long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each color and system type required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. ' B. Source Limitations for Suspension System: Obtain each suspension system from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. ' 1. Obtain both acoustical ceiling panels and suspension system from the same manufacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-response tests were performed by UL, ITS/Warnock Hersey, or another independent testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that performs testing and follow-up services. ' 2. Surface-burning characteristics of acoustical panels comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0705A 09511 - 1 I� I 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected ' against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized ' moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed ' and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. ' 1.7 COORDINATION ' A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC ' equipment,fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS ' A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. ' 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be , incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated for each designation in the Acoustical Panel Ceiling Schedule at the end of Part 3. ' 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated ' that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. ' B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each • product type. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0705A 09511 - 2 ' 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing • ASTM E 1264 pattern designations and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range ' of products that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal ' suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. ' B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc Coated Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire. D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. E. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. F. Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, • manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required ' to fit penetration exactly. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting performance of ' acoustical panel ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections. • ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0705A 09511 -3 B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths ' at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and • comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per , manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636. , B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. ' 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in ' form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a , minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate; and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. ' 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten • hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or drilled-in anchors that extend through forms into concrete. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. ' 7. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. ' C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing ' wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and , where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of ' 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one i another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system ' runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. • ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0705A 09511 -4 ' SECTION 09653- RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples-for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or.more than 90 deg F. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS tA. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. I , 3. 48 hours after installation. • B. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. I I RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 0705A 09653- 1 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: ' a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. • 2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of t suspension system runners and moldings. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 4. Paint cut panel edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended. in writing for this_purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. , 3.4 CLEANING ' A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be ' successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. 3.5 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING SCHEDULE 1 A. Water Felted, Mineral Acoustical Panel—(Al): 1. Products: Equal to the following: , a. Armstrong—Fissured#756 2. Pattern: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 pattern designation as indicated below. ' a. Type III, Form 2, Pattern CD. • 3. Color: White. 4. Light Reflectance Coefficient: Not less than LR 0.81. 5. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.55. , 6. Ceiling Attenuation Class: CAC 30. 7. Edge Detail: Square. 8. Thickness: 5/8 inch. ' 9. Size: 24 inches x 24 inches and/or as indicated on drawings. B. Suspension System for Acoustical Panel Ceiling Systems—(Al): 1. Products: Equal to the following: , a. Armstrong Prelude ML. 2. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 635M, G01 (Z001) Coatig designation, with prefinished 15/16 inch wide metal caps on flanges. , 3. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 4. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped)type. 5. Face Design: Flush face. 6. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum sheet as standard with manufacturer. 7. Cap Finish: White baked polyester paint. END OF SECTION 09511 • ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0705A 09511 -5 1 ' 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS • A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective ' covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each ' type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE (R2) ' A. Resilient Base: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers ' offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ' a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Johnsonite. C. Roppe Corporation, USA. ' d. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division. B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. ' 1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, • thermoplastic). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). .; ' 3. Style: Cove (base with toe). C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. ' D. Height: 4 inches. E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. ' F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed. ' H. Finish: As selected by Owner/Architect from manufacturer's full range. I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Owner/Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY ' A. Resilient Molding Accessory: ' 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, • the following: ' a. Johnsonite. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 0705A 09653-2 1 t b. Roppe Corporation, USA. ' C. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division. • B. Description: Carpet edge for glue-down applications; Reducer strip for resilient floor covering; ' Joiner for the and carpet; Transition strips. C. Material: Rubber. ' D. Profile and Dimensions: As required. E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Owner/Architect from manufacturer's full range. ' 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS ' A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. ' B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in ' other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign • deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. ' B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of , resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. t C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. , 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. D. Clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. ' 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION ' A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. • RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 0705A 09653-3 1 ' B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and • other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. ' C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. ' D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry..surfaces_or.other.similar...irregular-substrates,-fill -voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. ' G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. H. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening)at be ' 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION ' A. Comply with'manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. ' B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. ' 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ' A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. ' C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. ' D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 0705A 09653-4 SECTION 09910 - PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL , 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. , 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material , is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish ' is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of all exposed to view gypsum board walls and ceilings, wood & hollow metal doors, hollow metal door frames, exposed bare and covered pipes ' and ducts, hangers, exposed steel and iron supports in all paint finished rooms, miscellaneous metal/steel items such as guard rails, handrails & bollards, all exterior building exposed prime painted steel items (steel lintels, bollards, door jambs, etc.) and ' any other noted or prime painted only items. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. ' 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Plastic laminated architectural woodwork. ' b. Acoustical wall panels. C. Plastic toilet enclosures. d. Elevator entrance doors and frames. ' e. Elevator equipment. f. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. g. Light fixtures. , 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. ' b. Furred areas. C. Ceiling plenums. ' d. Utility tunnels. e. Pipe spaces. f. Duct shafts. • PAINTING 0705A 09910 - 1 ' g. Elevator shafts. • 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: ' a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. C. Chromium plate. d. Copper and copper alloys. e. Bronze and brass. ' 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. ' b. Linkages. C. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. ' 5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating,.or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section Cement Concrete Paving"for traffic-marking paint. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications"for shop priming ferrous metal. 3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames"for factory priming steel doors and frames. 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies"for surface preparation of gypsum board. 1.3 DEFINITIONS • A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85 degree meter. ' 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a.gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter. ' 4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. ' 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by ' manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. ' B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat material indicated. • 1. After color selection, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. PAINTING 0705A 09910-2 C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate ' actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. • 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and , primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each ' Sample for location and application. 3. Submit one (1) Sample on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only: 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings 1 similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING ' A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers ' bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. ' 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). • 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. ' B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum 9 Y ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of , foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. ' 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding ' air are between 45 and 95 deg F. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog,-or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or ' at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. • PAINTING 0705A 09910-3 t1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are • enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an -additional.5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. as appropriate, of each material and color applied. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following ' manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Benjamin Moore &Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). • 3. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams). ' 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are ' compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's.product identification will not be acceptable. ' C. Colors: As selected by Owner/Architect from manufacturer's full range. ' 2.3 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY BLOCK FILLERS A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: Factory-formulated high-performance latex block fillers. ' 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler No. 285: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.1 mils(0.206 mm). ' 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-7 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 6.0 to 12.5 mils (0.152 to 0.318 mm). • 3. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Interior/Exterior Block Filler B25W25: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.0 mils (0.203 mm). PAINTING 0705A 09910-4 2.4 EXTERIOR PRIMERS ' A. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior • application. ' 1. Benjamin Moore; IronClad Latex Low-Lustre Metal & Wood Enamel No. 363: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). ' 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 3. Sherwin-Williams; Galvite HS Paint B50WZ3: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). ' 2.5 INTERIOR PRIMERS A. Interior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex interior ' primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Regal FirstCoat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody No. 216: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). , 3. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Masonry Primer B28W300: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). B. Interior Gypsum Board and Plaster Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Regal FirstCoat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody No. 216: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). • 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). , 3. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). C. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic-Enamel and Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes: Factory- ' formulated alkyd-or acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody No. 217: Applied at a dry film , thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-855 SpeedHide Latex Enamel Undercoater: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). ' 3. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Classic Interior Primer B28W101 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). D. Interior.Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal ' primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; IronClad Alkyd Low Lustre Medal and Wood Enamel No. 163: Applied ' at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-858 Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 3. Sherwin-Williams; Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZ1: Applied at a ' dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). • PAINTING 0705A 09910-5 2.6 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Factory-formulated full-gloss alkyd enamel for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Impervo Enamel No. 133: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less ' than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm). 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-814 Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Gloss-Oil Interior/Exterior Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 3. Sherwin-Williams; Industrial Enamel B54 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not ' less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). ' 2.7 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel. ' 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Regal AquaVelvet No. 319: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 89-Line Manor Hall Interior Eggshell Wall and Trim: Applied at a dry ' film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 3. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Interior Latex Satin Wall Paint A87 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). B. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex enamel for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Regal AquaGlo No. 333 Premium Interior Finishes Latex Semi-Gloss: ' Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). • 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo-Lustre Semi-Gloss Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils (0.028 mm). ' 3. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel A88 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). ' C. Interior Semigloss Alkyd Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss alkyd enamel for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Satin Impervo Alkyd Low Lustre Enamel No. 235: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 27 Line Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and Trim Semi-Gloss Oil: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 3. Sherwin-Williams; Classic 99 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel A-40 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm). ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION i , A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with i requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. �r PAINTING 0705A 09910 -6 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions t within a particular area. • 3. Remove decals, stamps or manufacturer's marking that will show through painted or stained areas. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before ' surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using , workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances ' that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. ' 2. Remove markings or stamps in a manner that will not alter the adherence or appearance • of paint or stain. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's ' written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. , 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. ' If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. ' b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, ' fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. • PAINTING 0705A 09910- 7 b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. ' C. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; .remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. ' a. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint--manufacturer, and-touch up with same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. ' 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and ' techniques best suited for.substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. ' 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. ' 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. ' B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. PAINTING 0705A 09910-8 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application , method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky ' under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators ' according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate ' size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by ' manufacturer for material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film ' thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items f exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: ' 1. Uninsulated metal piping. 2. Uninsulated plastic piping. ' 3. Pipe hangers and supports. 4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. ' 6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket material. 7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 8. Access panels. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Switchgear. , 2. Panelboards. 3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 4. All exposed conduit. 5. Access panels. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete ' coverage with pores filled. • PAINTING 0705A 09910 -9 ' I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by • manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or ' unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, ' opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. ' K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, ' orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. ' L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. ' 3.4 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded ' paint materials from Project site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered ' paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished • surfaces. t3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades; whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. ' Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide 'Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. ' 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. '. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE ' A. EPS-1 - Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior metal surfaces: 1. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a appropriate metal primer. ' a. Primer: Exterior metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semi-gloss alkyd enamel. ' 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE • PAINTING 0705A 09910- 10 1 A. IPS-1 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete ' masonry: • 1. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler. ' a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semi-gloss alkyd enamel. ' B. IPS-2 - Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: ' 1. IPS-3 - Low-Luster and Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. ' b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster and semi-gloss acrylic enamel. C. IPS-3- Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: ' 1. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. ' b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel. END OF SECTION 09910 ' • 1 PAINTING 0705A 09910- 11 ' SECTION 10155-TOILET COMPARTMENTS • PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes solid-polymer units as follows: ' 1. Toilet Enclosures: Overhead braced and Floor anchored. 2. Urinal Screens: Wall hung. ' B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for blocking. . 2. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, and ' similar accessories. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS • A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material t descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. ' C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. D. Samples for Verification: Of each type of color and finish required for units, prepared on 6-inch square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE I ' A. Comply with requirements in CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations.of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying ' Y 9 the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating toilet compartments without • field measurements. Coordinate wall, floor, ceilings, and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 0705A 10155- 1 !1 PART 2- PRODUCTS , • 2.1 SOLID-POLYMER UNITS ' A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ' 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. Ampco. 3. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. ' 4. Comtec Industries. B. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern ' throughout thickness of material. 1. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Owner/ Architect ' from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns. I C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. ' D. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, stainless steel. ' E. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning. ' • 2.2 ACCESSORIES ' A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Stainless steel. ' B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with ' antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. ' Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION ' A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling ' mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. • TOILET COMPARTMENTS 0705A 10155-2 1 ' B. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet • compartments and 36-inch wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. ' 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. ' 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard recessed latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. ' 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to_prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be.accessible to people with disabilities. ' PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, ' level, and plumb.. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. ' 1. Maximum Clearances: • a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch. 2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. ' a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. ' B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when ' doors are in closed position. C. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches into structural floor, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb, ' and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position. ' D. Wall-Hung Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact. • TOILET COMPARTMENTS 0705A 10155- 3 3.2 ADJUSTING ' A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open ' approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 10155 1 1 • 11 1 • TOILET COMPARTMENTS 0705A 10155-4 t SECTION 10520- FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire-protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection cabinets. ' 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. B. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." ' C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ' D. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of ASTM,E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. • 'I FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 0705A 10520 - 1 1.5 COORDINATION ' A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers • indicated are accommodated. , 1.6 WARRANTY , A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. ' 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. ' b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS , 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to , product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers ' offering products t h at m ay be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. ' 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. ' B. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, ' Class 1 (clear). 2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ' A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Ansul Incorporated. , 2. JL Industries, Inc. 3. Kidde Fyrnetics. 4. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. ' 5. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. i B. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. ' 1. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 0705A 10520 -2 ' 2. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. • 3. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B. C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container FE-1: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. Note- Contractor responsible for code compliance for fire extinguisher quantities, locations and Mounting characteristics. 2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET A. Available Manufacturers: ' 1. JL Industries, Inc. 2. Kidde Fyrnetics. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 4. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. C. Cabinet Construction: Rated per adjacent wall construction. ' D. Cabinet Material: Enameled-steel sheet. 1. Shelf:- Same metal and finish as cabinet. ' E. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of • trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge(backbend). 1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth. ' F. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet. G. Door Material: Steel sheet. H. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame. I. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear). ' J. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. ' 1. Provide projecting door pull and friction latch. 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, or concealed hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. ' K. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. • FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 0705A 10520-3 L. Finishes: , 1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: • a. Exterior of cabinet, door, and trim, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. b. Interior of cabinet and door. ' 2. Steel: Baked enamel. a. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. ' 2.5 FABRICATION ' A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim,frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. , 1. Weld points and grind smooth. 2. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch- thick, cold- rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- thick, fire-barrier material. ' a. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials ' indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 ' inch thick. • 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground ' smooth. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for ' recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. , C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are ' acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to , minimize contrast. FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 0705A 10520-4 ' 2.7 STEEL FINISHES • A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants ' that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods. B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's ' standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. ' PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed ' cabinets will be installed. B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. ' 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of • cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights. indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below. 1 1. Fire-Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet. 2. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets. 2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 1 ' A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection specialties are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. ' B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking • devices operate properly. FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 0705A 10520- 5 C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as , recommended by manufacturer. • D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory- , finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire- protection cabinet manufacturer. E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond i successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 10520 • r r • t FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 0705A 10520-6 SECTION 10801 -TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES • ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: ' 1. Washroom accessories(mirrors, grab bars, tissue dispensers, paper towel dispensers). 2. Underlavatory guards. i1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.. Include the following: i1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work ' and substrate preparation. • 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. C. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. i 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect.. 1.5 COORDINATION ' A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. ' B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent • delaying the Work. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 0705A 10801 - 1 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace • mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship , within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: (15) years from date of Substantial Completion. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless ' otherwise indicated. B. Brass: ASTM B 19 flat products; ASTM B 16, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with t finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings. C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359- inch minimum nominal thickness. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating. E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. ' F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper- and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). , H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. ' 2.2 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. A&J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. ' 4. Bradley Corporation. B. Toilet Tissue(Roll) Dispenser: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick: B-273 ' 2. Description: Double-roll dispenser. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. ' 4. Operation: Eccentric-shaped, molded-plastic spindle revolves one-half revolution per dispensing operation for controlled delivery; core cannot be removed until roll is empty. • 5. Capacity: Designed for 6-inch-diameter tissue rolls. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 0705A 10801 -2 ' 6. Material and Finish: Satin-finish aluminum bracket with plastic spindle. . C. Grab Bar: ' 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, model B-6806. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. ' 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (18 gauge)thick. a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish. ' 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 5. Configuration and Length:.As.indicated on Drawings. D. Paper Towel(Folded)Dispenser: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, model B-262. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. ' 3. Minimum Capacity: 400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Lockset: Tumbler type. ' 6. Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front. E. Mirror Unit: ' 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, model B-290 1836. 2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle. 1 a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth. • 3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. ' a. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices ' requiring a special tool to remove. 4. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering ' products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject t to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: ' 1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. i 2. TCI Products. 3. Truebro, Inc. ' C. Underlavatory Guard: • 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Truebro, model Lavguard2. 1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 0705A 10801 -3 I� 1 i 2. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that prevent ' direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing • coverings. 3. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white. ' 2.4 FABRICATION ' A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. ' B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate t to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. ' • B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. ' C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 10801 ' 1 1 • TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 0705A 10801 -4 1 SECTION 13125- METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes metal building systems that consist of integrated sets of mutually dependent components including structural framing for main building & canopy, roof ' panels, wall panels, soffit panels, interior wall liner panels, gutters, downspouts, roof & wall insulation and all other required trim and accessories; all off which are to be provided by the Contractor. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete foundations,'slabs, and anchor- ' bolt installation. 2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation"for insulation installed in metal roof and wall panel assemblies. ' 3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames." 4. Division 8 Section "Sectional Overhead Doors." 5. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Windows." ' 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Bay: Dimension between main frames measured normal to frame (at centerline of frame) for interior bays, and dimension from centerline of first interior main frame measured normal to end wall (outside face of end-wall girt)for end bays. B. Building Length: Dimension of the building measured perpendicular to main framing from end wall to end wall (outside face of girt to outside face of girt). Ij C. Building Width: Dimension of the building measured parallel to main framing from sidewall to sidewall(outside face of girt to outside face of girt). D. Clear Span: Distance between supports of beams, girders, or trusses (measured from lowest level of connecting area of a column and a rafter frame or knee). E. Eave Height: Vertical dimension from finished floor to eave (the line along the sidewall formed ' by intersection of the planes of the roof and wall). F. Terminology Standard: Refer to MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual" for definitions of terms for metal building system construction not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125- 1 1 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' A. General: Provide a complete, integrated set of metal building system manufacturer's standard • mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a metal building system capable of ' withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building interior. Include primary and secondary framing, metal roof panels, metal wall panels, and all other accessories complying with ' requirements indicated. 1. Provide metal building system of size and with spacings, slopes, and spans indicated. B. Primary Frame Type: ' 1. Rigid Clear Span: Solid-member, structural-framing system without interior columns. ' C. End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard, for buildings not required to be expandable, consisting of primary frame, capable of supporting one-half of a bay design load, and end-wall columns or load-bearing end-wall and corner columns, and rafters. ' D. Secondary Frame Type: Manufacturer's standard purlins and joists and flush-framed, partially inset-framed or exterior-framed (bypass)girts. 1 E. Eave Height: 18 feet. F. Bay Spacing: 32 feet. ' G. Roof Slope: 1 inch per 12 inches (1:12) minimum. H. Roof System: Manufacturer's standard vertical-rib, standing-seam, trapezoidal-rib standing- ' seam or lap-seam metal roof panels with insulation. I. Exterior Wall System: Manufacturer's standard field-assembled, insulated metal wall panels. ' 1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ' A. Structural Performance: Provide metal building systems capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: ' 1. Engineer metal building systems according to procedures in MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual." 2. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. ' 3. Live Loads: Include vertical loads induced by the building occupancy indicated on Drawings. Include loads induced by maintenance workers, materials, and equipment for roof live loads. ' a. Building Occupancy: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Roof Snow Loads: Include vertical loads induced by the weight of snow, as shown on , drawings or as determined by 50-year, mean-recurrence-interval ground snow load at Project site or minimum 25 psf; whichever is the greater of the three. Allow for unbalanced and drift loads. ' 5. Wind Loads: Include horizontal loads induced by a basic wind speed as shown on drawings or corresponding to a 50-year, mean-recurrence interval at Project site or • minimum 90 mph; whichever is the greater of the three. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125- 2 ' 6. Collateral Loads: Include additional dead loads other than the weight of metal building • system for permanent items such as sprinklers, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and ceilings; but not less than 10 psf. ' 7. Load Combinations: Design metal building systems to withstand the most critical effects of load factors and load combinations as shown on the drawings, required by MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual," ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and ' Other Structures," and International Building Code—IBC 2003. 8. Deflection Limits: Engineer assemblies to withstand design loads with deflections no greater than the following: ' a. Purlins and Rafters: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. b. Girts:_ Horizontal deflection of 1/240:of_the_span. C. Metal Roof Panels: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. d. Metal Wall Panels: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the span. ' 9. Design secondary framing system to accommodate deflection of primary building structure and construction tolerances, and to maintain clearances at openings. 10. Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592. B. Seismic Performance: Design and engineer metal building systems capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to design loads shown on drawings and ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads." C. Thermal Movements: Provide metal panel systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change(range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface • temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. . 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. D. Thermal Performance: Provide insulated metal panel assemblies with the following maximum U-factors and minimum R-values for opaque elements when tested according to ASTM C 1363 or ASTM C 518: ' 1. Metal Roof Panel Assemblies: a. R-Value: 24 minimum. ' 2. Metal Wall Panel Assemblies: a. R-Value: 19 minimum. E. Air Infiltration for Metal Roof Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 ' cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) of roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at negative test-pressure difference of 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft.(75 Pa). F. Air Infiltration for Metal Wall Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) of wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at static-air- pressure difference of 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). ' G. Water Penetration for Metal Roof Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at test-pressure difference of 2.86 Ibf/sq. ft. (137 Pa). METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125-3 1 H. Water Penetration for Metal Wall Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ' ASTM E 331 at a minimum differential pressure of 25 percent of inward-acting, wind-load • design pressure of not less than 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. (300 Pa) and not more than 12 Ibf/sq. ft. (575 ' Pa). I. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for Class 90. ' 1.6 SUBMITTALS , A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of the following metal building system components: ' 1. Structural-framing system. 2. Metal roof panels. 3. Metal wall panels and interior metal liner panels. ' 4. Insulation and vapor retarders. 5. Flashing and trim. 6. Accessories. , B. Shop Drawings: For the following metal building system components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. ' 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. ' 2. Anchor-Bolt Plans: Submit anchor-bolt plans before foundation work begins. Include • location, diameter, and projection of anchor bolts required to attach metal building to foundation. Indicate column reactions at each location. ' 3. Structural-Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of primary and secondary framing; include provisions for openings. Indicate welds and bolted connections, distinguishing between shop and field applications. Include transverse cross-sections. 4. Metal Roof and Wall Panel Layout Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels including methods of support. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factory- , and field-assembled work; show locations of exposed fasteners. 5. Accessory Drawings: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1- 1/2 inches per 12 inches (1:8): ' a. Flashing and trim. b. Gutters. C. Downspouts. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below. ' 1. Metal Roof and Wall Panels: Nominal 12 inches. Include fasteners, closures, and other exposed panel accessories. t 2. Flashing and Trim: Nominal 12 inches. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Vapor Retarders: Nominal 6-inch-square Samples. • METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125-4 ' ' 4. Accessories: Nominal 12-inch- long Samples for each type of accessory. • D. Product Certificates: For each type of metal building system, signed by product manufacturer. 1. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following: a. Name and location of Project. b. Order number. c. Name of manufacturer. ' d. Name of Contractor. e. Building-dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope. f. Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI standards for ' cold-rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard. g. Governing building code and year of edition. h. Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof snow load, deflection, wind loads/speeds and exposure, seismic design category or effective peak velocity-related acceleration/peak acceleration, and auxiliary loads (cranes). i. Load Combinations: Indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously with concentrated loads, according to governing building code. j. Building-Use Category: Indicate category of building use and its effect on load importance factors. k. AISC Certification for Category MB: Include statement that metal building system and components were designed and produced in an AISC-Certified Facility by an AISC-Certified Manufacturer. E. Erector Certificate: Signed by manufacturer certifying that erector complies with requirements. ' F. Manufacturer Certificate: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products comply with • requirements. ' G. Material Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements: ' 1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 4. Shop primers. ' 5. Nonshrink grout. H. Field quality-control test reports. ' I. Maintenance Data: For metal panel finishes to include in maintenance manuals. J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who has specialized in erecting and installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer and member of MBMA. • METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125-5 1. AISC Certification for Category MB: An AISC-Certified Manufacturer that designs and ' produces metal building systems and components in an AISC-Certified Facility. • 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. ' C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. ' D. Source Limitations: Obtain primary metal building system components, including structural framing and metal panel assemblies, through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of metal ' building system and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." ' 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect/Owner, except with their approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect/Owner for review. ' F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code- -Steel,"and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." ' G. Structural Steel: Comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design, Plastic Design," or AISC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings,"for design requirements and allowable stresses. ' H. Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members," or AISI's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Steel ' Structural Members,"for design requirements and allowable stresses. • I. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide field-insulated metal panels having thermal insulation and vapor-retarder-facing materials with the following surface-burning characteristics as ' determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less, unless otherwise indicated. ' 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less, unless otherwise indicated. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or ' deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and ' surface damage. C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness and with positive slope for drainage ' of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. - • METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125-6 ' 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS • A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when weather conditions permit metal ' panels to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: 1. Established Dimensions for Foundations: Comply with established dimensions on approved anchor-bolt plans, establishing foundation dimensions and proceeding with fabricating structural framing without field measurements. Coordinate anchor-bolt installation to ensure that---actual anchorage dimensions correspond to -established dimensions. 2. Established Dimensions for Metal Panels: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work; either establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal panels without field measurements, or allow for field trimming metal panels. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual building dimensions, locations of structural members, and openings correspond to established dimensions. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-bolt inserts into foundation walls and footings. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are ' specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." B. Coordinate metal panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of supports and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. • 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration ' of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: ' a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. C. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Weathertightness Warranty for Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam, metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period. ' 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. • METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125-7 PART 2- PRODUCTS ' • 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers that may offer products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the ' following: 1. Behlen Mfg. Co. 2. Butler Manufacturing Company. , 3. Ceco Building Systems; Division of Robertson-Ceco Corporation. 4. Metallic Metal Building Company; Division of NCI Building Systems, LLP. 5. Star Building Systems; Division of Robertson-Ceco Corporation. ' 6. Steelox Systems Inc. 7. VP Buildings, Inc.; a United Dominion Company. 2.2 STRUCTURAL-FRAMING MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ' ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55(345 or 380). B. Channels, Angles, M-Shapes, and S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380). ' C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380). ' D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B or C, structural tubing. • E. Structural-Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A 1011/A 1011 M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 30 ' through 55 (205 through 380), or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70 (310 through 480); or cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 25 through 80 (170 through 550), or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through ' 70 (310 through 480). F. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through , 80 (230 through 550) or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 50 through 80 (340 through 550); with G60(Z180)coating designation; mill phosphatized. G. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the ' hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80 (230 through 550) or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), ' Grades 50 through 80 (340 through 550); with G90 (Z275) coating designation. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50 or 80 (340 or 550); with Class AZ50 (AZM150)coating. , H. Joist Girders: Manufactured according to "Standard Specifications for Joist Girders," in SJI's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables, and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders," ' with steel-angle, top- and bottom-chord members; with end- and top-chord arrangements as indicated and required for primary framing. • METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125-8 1 I. Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property • Class 4.6), carbon-steel, hex-head bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) carbon-steel hex nuts; and ASTM F 844 plain (flat) steel washers. ' J. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ' ASTM F 436(ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Tension-Control, High_Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex-head steel structural bolts with splined ends. ' K. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) ' hardened carbon-steel washers, plain. L. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345) or ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6). ' 1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel. ' 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel. M. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade A(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), straight. ' 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) [heavy]hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel. N. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345) or ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6). 1.. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. ' O. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide. 2.3 MATERIALS FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the ' hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80, with G90 coating designation.- ' 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Structural Steel(SS), Grade 50 or 80; with Class AZ50 coating designation. 3. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 4. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating, as specified or indicated on Drawings: a. High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat • containing not less than- 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125-9 ,� i Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with , AAMA 2604/AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions, except as modified below: 1) Humidity Resistance: 1000 hours. b. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light- ' colored backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. 2.4 THERMAL INSULATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS ' A. Metal Building Insulation: ASTM C 991, Type li, glass-fiber-blanket insulation; 0.5-lb/cu. ft. ' density; 2-inch-wide, continuous, vapor-tight edge tabs; and with a flame-spread index of 25 or less. B. Mineral-Fiber-Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, type indicated below; consisting of fibers ' manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Type I (blankets without membrane covering), passing ASTM E 136 for combustion ' characteristics. 2. Type II (blankets with nonreflective membrane covering), Category 1 (membrane is a vapor retarder), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less). ' 3. Type III (blankets with reflective membrane covering), Category 1 (membrane is a vapor retarder), Class A(membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less). C. Vapor-Retarder Facing: ASTM C 1136, with permeance not greater than 0.02 perm when • i tested according to ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method. 1. Composition: White metallized-polypropylene film facing, fiberglass scrim reinforcement, , and kraft-paper backing or Aluminum foil facing, elastomeric barrier coating, fiberglass scrim reinforcement, and kraft-paper backing; wher concealed to view. 2. Composition: White polypropylene or vinyl film facing, fiberglass scrim reinforcement, ' and metallized-polyester film backing, where exposed to view. D. Retainer Strips: 0.019-inch-thick, formed, galvanized steel or PVC retainer clips colored to ' match insulation facing. E. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and ' other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of materials being fastened by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. ' 1. Fasteners for Metal Roof Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head carbon-steel screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zinc-aluminum-alloy head and EPDM , or neoprene sealing washer. 2. Fasteners for Metal Wall Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head • carbon-steel screws, with nylon or polypropylene washer. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125- 10 ' 3. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer • head. 4. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets. B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, ' sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. C. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. D. Metal Panel Sealants: ' 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape of manufacturer's standard size. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; one-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone- rubber sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended by metal building system manufacturer. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL ' A. General: Design components and field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly. ' • 1. Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals. 2. Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of proper size, shape, and location. Members shall be free of cracks, tears, and ruptures. B. Tolerances: Comply with MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual": Chapter IV, Section 9, ' "Fabrication and Erection Tolerances." C. Metal Panels: Fabricate and finish metal panels at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. ' 1. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of metal panel. 2.7 STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. General: ' 1. Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut,form; punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly. 1 a. Make shop connections by welding or by using high-strength bolts. • METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125- 11 b. Join flanges to webs of built-up members by a continuous submerged arc-welding , process. • C. Brace compression flange of primary framing with steel angles or cold-formed structural tubing between frame web and purlin or girt web, so flange compressive strength is within allowable limits for any combination of loadings. d. Weld clips to frames for attaching secondary framing members. e. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop ' prime primary structural members with specified primer after fabrication. 2. Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section by roll-forming or break-forming, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates , required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing. a. Make shop connections by welding or by using non-high-strength bolts. b. Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC- SP 2. Shop prime uncoated secondary structural members with specified primer after fabrication. ' B. Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard structural primary framing system, designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse and ' lean-to frames; rafter, rake, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, end-wall, and corner columns; and wind bracing. 1. General: Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. ' Factory drill for field-bolted assembly. Provide frame span and spacing indicated. 2. Rigid Clear-Span Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up ' steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Interior columns are not permitted. • 3. Exterior Column Type: Uniform depth or Tapered. 4. Rafter Type: Uniform depth or Tapered. C. End-Wall Framing (Base Bid): Manufacturer's standard primary end-wall framing fabricated 1 for field-bolted assembly to comply with the following: 1. End-Wall and Corner Columns: [-shaped sections fabricated from structural-steel ' shapes; shop-welded, built-up steel plates; or C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; with minimum thickness of 0.0598 inch. ' 2. End-Wall Rafters: C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; with minimum thickness of 0.0598 inch; or I-shaped sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. D. End-Wall Framing (Alternate Bid): Manufacturer's standard structural primary framing system, designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse and lean-to frames; rafter, rake, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, ' end-wall, and corner columns; and wind bracing. 1. General: Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for field-bolted assembly. Provide frame span and spacing indicated. ' 2. Rigid Clear-Span Frames: [-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Interior end wall columns are not permitted. ' 3. Exterior Column Type: Uniform depth or Tapered. 4. Rafter Type: Uniform depth or Tapered. • i METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125- 12 l' ' E. Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard secondary framing members, including purlin.s, • girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural members. Fabricate framing from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet ' or roll-formed, metallic-coated steel. sheet prepainted with coil coating, unless otherwise indicated, to comply with the following: 1. Purlins: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch- thick steel sheet,built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; minimum 2-1/2-inch-wide flanges. a. Depth: As required to comply with system performance requirements. ' 2. Purlins: Steel.joists of_.depths required. 3. Girts: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch- thick steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes. Form ends of Z-sections with stiffening lips angled 40 to 50 degrees to flange and with minimum 2-1/2-inch-wide flanges. a. Depth: 8 inches to 9 inches or as required to comply with system performance ' requirements. 4. Eave Struts: Unequal-flange, C-shaped sections; fabricated from 0.0598-inch- thick steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; to provide adequate backup for metal panels. 5. Flange Bracing: Minimum 2-by-2-by-1/8-inch structural-steel angles or 1-inch diameter, cold-formed structural tubing to stiffen primary frame flanges. 6. Sag Bracing: Minimum 1-by-1-by-1/8-inch structural-steel angles. 7. Base or Sill Angles: Minimum 3-by-2-by-0.0598-inch zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. 8. Purlin and Girt Clips: Minimum 0.0598-inch- thick, steel sheet. Provide galvanized clips i • where clips are connected to galvanized framing members. 9. Secondary End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch-thick.. ' 10. Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch- thick, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or structural-steel shapes. Frame head and jamb of door openings, and head,jamb, and sill of other openings. 11. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet; designed to withstand required loads. i I , F. Canopy Framing: Manufacturer's standard structural-framing system, designed to withstand required loads, fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Provide frames with attachment plates and splice members, factory drilled for field-bolted assembly. i G. Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing as follows: 1. Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50; or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50; minimum 1/2-inch- diameter steel; threaded full length or threaded a minimum of 6 inches at each end. 2. Cable: ASTM A 475, 1/4-inch- diameter, extra-high-strength grade, Class B zinc-coated, ' 7-strand steel; with threaded end anchors. 3. Angles: Fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing, of size required to withstand design loads. ' 4. Rigid Portal Frames: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads. • 5. Fixed-Base Columns: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural- , steel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125- 13 6. Diaphragm Action of Metal Panels: Design metal building to resist wind forces through ' diaphragm action of metal panels. • 7. Bracing: Provide wind bracing using any method specified above, at manufacturer's option. H. Bolts: Provide plain finish bolts for structural-framing components that are primed or finish painted. Provide zinc-plated or hot-dipped galvanized bolts for structural-framing components that are galvanized. I. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply specified primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Prime primary, secondary, and end-wall structural-framing members to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil. a. Prime secondary steel framing formed from uncoated steel sheet to a minimum dry ' film thickness of 0.5 mil on each side. 2.8 METAL ROOF PANELS A. Trapezoidal-Rib, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels (Alternate Bid): Formed with raised trapezoidal ribs at panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels. 1. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) or Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.0209 inch minimum thick. ' a. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer. b. Color: White to match other buildings in City Complex unless selected otherwise ' by Architect/Owner from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2. Clips: Manufacturer's standard, floating type to accommodate thermal movement; fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel, aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel or ' stainless-steel sheet. 3. Joint Type: Mechanically seamed, folded as standard with manufacturer. 4. Panel Coverage: 24 inches. 5. Uplift Rating: UL 90. , 6. Design/Manufacturer: Equal to Butler Manufacturing MR-24 Roof System. B. Tapered-Rib-Profile, Lap-Seam Metal Roof Panels (Base Bid): Formed with raised, ' trapezoidal major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between major ribs; designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. 1. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.0179 inch minimum thick. a. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer. , b. Color: White to match other buildings in City Complex unless selected otherwise by Architect/Owner from manufacturer's full range of colors. ' 2. Major-Rib Spacing: 12 inches o.c. 3. Panel Coverage: 36 inches. • METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125- 14 ' 2.9 FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL WALL PANELS A. Tapered-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with raised, trapezoidal ' major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between major ribs; designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. ' 1. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) or Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.0179 inch minimum thick. ' a. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer. b. Color: Off-White to-..-..match .other .buildings in City Complex unless selected otherwise by Architect/Owner from manufacturer's full range of colors. ' 2. Major-Rib Spacing: 12 inches o.c. 3. Panel Coverage: 36 inches. ' B. Reverse-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with recessed, trapezoidal major valleys and intermediate stiffening valleys symmetrically spaced between major valleys; designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically ' attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. 1. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) or Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.0179 inch minimum thick. ' a. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer. b. Color: Off-White to match other buildings in City Complex unless selected ' otherwise by Architect/Owner from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2. Major-Rib Spacing: 12 inches o.c. 3. Panel Coverage: 36 inches. C. Tapered-Rib-Profile, Interior Metal Liner Panels: Formed with raised, trapezoidal major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced or flat pan between major ribs; designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. 1. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) or Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.0159 inch minimum thick. a. Interior Finish: Fluoropolymer or Siliconized polyester. b. Color: Off-White or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. I ' 2. Spacing:Major-Rib S � p g 6 inches to 12 inches o.c. 3. Panel Coverage: 36 inches. � 1i 2.10 METAL SOFFIT PANELS 11 A. General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to ' supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. B. Metal Soffit Panels: Match profile and material of metal wall panels. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125- 15 1 I. Finish: Match finish and color of metal roof panels, unless selected otherwise. ' . i 2.11 ACCESSORIES ' A. General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by ' manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded ' back to form hems. B. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same material as metal roof panels. ' 2. Clips: Manufacturer's standard, formed from steel or stainless-steel sheet, designed to withstand negative-load requirements. 3. Cleats: Manufacturer's standard, mechanically seamed cleats formed from steel or stainless-steel sheet or nylon-coated aluminum sheet. ' 4. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 5. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or ' closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. ' 6. Thermal Spacer Blocks: Where metal panels attach directly to purlins, provide thermal spacer blocks of thickness required to provide 1 inch standoff; fabricated from extruded polystyrene. C. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel ' assembly including copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless , otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes,fabricated of same material as metal wail panels. ' 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or ' premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. D. Flashing and Trim: Formed from minimum 0.0159-inch- thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or , aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match adjacent metal panels. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125- 16 ' 1 ' 1. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished • appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. ' 2. Opening Trim: Minimum 0.0159-inch-thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Trim head and jamb of door openings, and head,jamb, and sill of other openings. E. Gutters: Formed from minimum 0.0159-inch- thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum- zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match roof fascia and rake trim. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special ' pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long sections, sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 1. Gutter Supports: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters; spaced 36 inches O.C. 2. Strainers: Bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball type at outlets. F. Downspouts: Formed from 0.0159-inch- thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match metal wall panels. Fabricate in minimum 10-foot-long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. ' 1. Mounting Straps: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters; spaced maximum 10 feet o.c. ' 2. Location: Provide at 32 feet o.c. along all eaves around building, unless approved otherwise. ' G. Snow Guards: Prefabricated, non-corrosive units designed to be installed without penetrating • roof panel, with predrilled holes and clamps or hooks for anchoring. 1. Location: Provide along all eaves around building. 2. Retain one type of snow guard from two subparagraphs and associated subparagraphs below. Because each snow-guard product is unique, insert manufacturer's proprietary requirements. ' 3. Plastic-Type Guard: Polycarbonate, designed for attachment to roof surface using silicone or polyurethane sealant or adhesive tape, as recommended by manufacturer. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: . 1) Polar Blox, Inc.; Polar Blox. 2) Sno-Gem, Inc.; SNO-GEM. ' 3) Snojax, Inc.; SNOJAX. 4. Metal-Type Guard: Consisting of aluminum or stainless-steel rods or bars held in place by supports clamped to vertical ribs of standing-seam roof. ' a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,,provide one of the following: 1) LMCurbs; S-5! SnoFence. 2) Riddell &Company, Inc.; Snobar. 3) Snow Management Systems;Vermont.Snowguard. H. Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base. 1 • METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125- 17 i 2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL ' A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for • recommendations for applying and designating finishes. t B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations ' in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. ' 2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified testing and inspecting agency to ' perform the following tests and inspections and to submit reports. B. Special Inspector: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following tests t and inspections and to submit reports. Special Inspector will verify that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and will review the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. ' 1. Special inspections will not be required if fabrication is performed by a manufacturer registered and approved by authorities having jurisdiction to perform such Work without ' special inspection. a. After fabrication, submit certificate of compliance with copy to authorities having jurisdiction certifying that Work was performed according to Contract requirements. t C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections shall be[tested and] inspected according ' to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 2. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections shall be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at ' inspector's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. ' b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. C. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. ' d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the ' Contract Documents. PART 3- EXECUTION , 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Erector present, for compliance with • requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125- 18 ' 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Erector, listing conditions detrimental • to performance of work. B. Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments to receive structural framing, with Erector present, for compliance with requirements and metal building ' system manufacturer's tolerances. C. Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition. B. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural framing secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural framing, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. ' 3.3 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection instructions and erection drawings. ' B. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building • system manufacturer's professional engineer. C. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection. D. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing ' materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. ' Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. E. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean ' bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will=be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure will be completed and in service. F. Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double- METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125- 19 nutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line ' elevation. Moist cure grout for not less than seven days after placement. • 1. Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to RCSC's ' "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. a. Joint Type: Snug tightened or pretensioned. G. Secondary Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Fasten secondary framing to primary framing using clips with field connections using non-high-strength ' bolts. 1. Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae. ' 2. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows. 3. Locate canopy framing as indicated. 4. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows, louvers, ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls. ' H. Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings. 1. Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag. ' 2. Locate interior end-bay bracing only where indicated. I. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to ' carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing. J. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC's "Code of ' Standard Practice for Steel Buildings Bridges." 9 9 • 3.4 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL ' A. Examination: Examine primary and secondary framing to verify that structural panel support t members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by manufacturer. 1. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify ' actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before metal panel installation. B. General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with ' provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings ' as small as possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel finishes. a. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved in writing by ' manufacturer. 2. Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports, unless otherwise indicated. ' 3. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar • elements. Fasten with self-tapping screws. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125-20 ' 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Locate metal panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports with end laps in alignment. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. ' 6. Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material. C. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or metal panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 1. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so-prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply metal panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. E. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for Weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and. sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal panel manufacturer. 1. Seal metal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal t side joints where recommended by metal panel manufacturer. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." w3.5 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION ' A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge, unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. 1. Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds. 2. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves and rakes. Fasten with self-tapping screws. ' B. Field-Assembled, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at. location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.. ' 1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. ' 3. Snap Joint:. Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging factory-applied sealant. 4. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged. 5. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners._ 6. Provide metal closures at peaks, rake edges, rake walls and each side of ridge and hip caps. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125-21 C. Field-Assembled, Lap-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with ' exposed fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. 1. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather ' side of metal roof panels. 2. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal roof panels and between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. ' 3. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end laps and on side laps of nesting-type metal panels; on side laps of ribbed or fluted metal panels; and elsewhere as needed to make metal panels weatherproof to driving rains. 4. At metal panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with butyl-rubber ' sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates. D. Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self- ' tapping screws. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings. E. Metal Roof Panel Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panels within installed ' tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.6 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION ' A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. ' Install panels perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. ' 1. Unless otherwise indicated, begin metal panel installation at corners with center of rib lined up with line of framing. 2. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels. , 3. When two rows of metal panels are required, lap panels 4 inches minimum. 4. When building height requires two rows of metal panels at gable ends, align lap of gable panels over metal wall panels at eave height. ' 5. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. 6. Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. ' 7. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 8. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds. 9. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and , concrete, and elsewhere as indicated, or if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing. 10. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. 11. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls. ' B. Field-Assembled, Metal Wall Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach metal wall panels to supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer. ' 1. Field-Insulated Assemblies: Install thermal insulation as specified. Install metal liner panels over insulation on interior side of girts at locations indicated. Fasten with exposed fasteners as recommended by manufacturer. , • METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125-22 ' C. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal wall panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nonaccumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch • offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.7 METAL SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION ' A. Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing. B. Flash and seal metal soffit panels with weather closures where panels meet walls and at ' perimeter of all openings. 3.8 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS A. General: Install insulation concurrently with metal wall panel installation, in thickness indicated to cover entire wall, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. 2. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. 3. Install factory-laminated, vapor-retarder-faced blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths with both sets of facing tabs sealed to provide a complete vapor retarder. ' 4. Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths. Install vapor retarder over insulation with both sets of facing tabs sealed to provide a complete vapor retarder. ' B. Blanket Roof Insulation: Comply with the following installation method: • 1. Over-Purlin-with-Spacer-Block Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing members. Install layer of filler insulation over first layer to fill space formed by metal roof panel standoffs. Hold in place ' by panels fastened to standoffs. 2. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place. 3. Thermal Spacer Blocks: Where metal roof panels attach directly to purlins, install thermal spacer blocks. C. Blanket Wall Insulation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top ' flange of secondary framing members. Hold in place by metal wall panels fastened to secondary framing. 1. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place. ' 3.9 DOOR AND FRAME INSTALLATION A. General: Install doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components. Seal perimeter of each door frame with elastomeric sealant used for metal wall panels. B. Personnel Doors and Frames: Install doors and frames according to ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with DHI Al 15.1G. Fit non-fire-rated doors accurately in their respective • frames, with the following.clearances: METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125-23 i 1. Between Doors and Frames at Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch. ' 2. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch. 3. At Door Sills with Threshold: 3/8 inch. 3.10 WINDOW INSTALLATION A. General: install windows plumb, rigid, properly aligned, without warp or rack of frames or sash, ' and securely fastened in place according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components. Seal perimeter of each•window frame with elastomeric sealant used for metal wall panels. ' 1. Separate dissimilar materials from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified in "Dissimilar ' Materials" Paragraph in Appendix B in AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. B. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture ' migrating within windows to the exterior. 3.11 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION ' A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and ' provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, ' copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, • and similar items. 2. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar ' items. 3. Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying ' rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation ' instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in , waterproof and weather-resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). • METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125-24 ' C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to • eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 4 feet o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal ' expansion. D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. 1-. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. ' 2. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated. E. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to panel as recommended by manufacturer. 1 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following tests and inspections and to submit reports. ' B. Tests and Inspections: 1. High-Strength, Field-Bolted Connections: Connections shall be tested and inspected ' during installation according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints .Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 2. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, field-welded connections shall be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at • inspector's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 1 b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. C. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. ' d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. C. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.13 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ' A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. ' B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. ' C. Touchup Painting: After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted structural framing, bearing plates, and accessories. ' 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." • METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125-25 1 1 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. ' D. Metal Panels: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal • panels are installed. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as , recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. 1. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful ' repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 13125 ' 1 1 • 1 1 • 1 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 0705A 13125-26 1 ' CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 SECTION 15050-BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. ' 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Sleeves. 4. Escutcheons. 5. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. ' 6. Concrete bases. 7. Supports and anchorages. ' 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces,crawlspaces,and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished toccupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. ' E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient ' temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." ' B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. ' C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and • BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050- 1 1 1 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 , connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with ' requirements. PART 2-PRODUCTS ' 2.1 PIPE,TUBE,AND FITTINGS ' A. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS ' A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASMEB16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. ' B. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer,unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ' ASTM B 813. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8,BCuP Series or BAgl,unless otherwise indicated. ' E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12. F. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. ' 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138. ' 2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder- t joint,plain,or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid,pressure, and temperature. ' C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig ' minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic , lining;threaded ends;and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic ' lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. • BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-2 ' CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 • 2.4 SLEEVES A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,Type E,Grade B, Schedule 40,galvanized,plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to-ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain tends and integral waterstop,unless otherwise indicated. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include ' clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. ' E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785,Schedule 40. ' G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.5 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely • covers opening. ' B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish. C. One-Piece,Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. i ' 1. Finish: Rough brass. D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. ' I. Finish: Rough brass. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS-COMMON REQUIREMENTS ' A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. ' B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. • ' BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-3 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 ' C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right • angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated ' otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. ' E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. ' G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. ' I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings,and floors. ' L. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. , M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between ' pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. • 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. ' 2. Install cast-iron"wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten ' bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. N. Underground,Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal ' pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for I-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements ' required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten ' bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. O. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and , floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials. P. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. , • BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-4 ' ' CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 • Q. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in ' requirements. 3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION ' A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. ' B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. ' D. Soldered Joints: Apply 1 ASTM B 813, water-flushable .flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," ' using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" ' Chapter,using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME 131.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal ' threading is specified. • 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. ' G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS 1310.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance"Article. ' H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. ' 1. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent ' cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. ' 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785,PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. ' 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix. ' J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. • ' BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-5 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 ' K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. • L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. ' 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according , to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS ' A. Make connections according to the following,unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to.each piece of equipment. ..2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. , „:" • .3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping ' materials of dissimilar metals. 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION-COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. • B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and , components in exposed interior spaces,unless otherwise indicated. C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of , components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. ' 3.5 CONCRETE BASES , A. Concrete Bases: Provide equipment pads for exterior condenser units either precast or cast in place. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Use 3000-psi,28-day compressive-strength concrete. ' 3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and ' elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. • BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-6 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 • B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. ' 3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor ' mechanical materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view t or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. - C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. END OF SECTION 15050 1 • 1 �' BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 7 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 ' SECTION 16050-BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ' PART1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: ' 1. Raceways. 2. Building wire and connectors. ' 3. Supporting devices for electrical components. 4. Electrical identification. 5. Utility company electricity-metering components. ' 6. Concrete equipment bases. 7. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 1.2 SUBMITTALS , A. Product Data: For utility company electricity-metering components. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Electrical Components,Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for ' intended use. • B. Devices for Utility Company Electricity Metering: Comply with utility company published standards. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings for electrical supports, raceways, and ' cable with general construction work. B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient ' flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment that requires positioning before closing in the building. C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies. , 1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for service entrances and electricity-metering ' components. D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors ' and Frames." • BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050- 1 ' ' CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 • E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate ' installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS . ' A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing; ANSI C80.3, zinc-coated steel, with set-screw or compression fittings. ' B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit;zinc-coated steel. C. IMC. Intermediate metal conduit;ANSI C80.6,zinc-coated steel,with threaded fittings. D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit; zinc-coated steel with sunlight-resistant and mineral-oil-resistant plastic jacket. E. RMC: Rigid.metal conduit;galvanized rigid steel;ANSI C80.1. F. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit;NEMA TC 2,Schedule 40 PVC,with NEMA TC3 fittings. ' G. Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for raceway type with which used. 2.2 WIRES,CABLES,AND CONNECTIONS A. Conductors,No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper. s B. Conductors,Larger Than No. 10 AWG: Stranded copper. C. Insulation: Thermoplastic, rated 600 V, 75 deg C minimum, Type THW, THHN-THWN, or USE depending on application.. ' D. Cable:Type MC with ground wire. E. Wire Connectors and Splices: Units of size,ampacity rating, material,type,and class suitable for service indicated. 2.3 SUPPORTING DEVICES iA. Material: Cold-formed steel,with corrosion-resistant coating. B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel. II! ' C. Slotted-Steel Channel: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- diameter slotted ` holes at a maximum of 2 inches o.c., in webs. Strength rating to suit structural loading. D. Nonmetallic Slotted Channel and Angle: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches-o.c., in at least ' one surface: Strength rating to suit structural loading. • ' BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-2 I' I, CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 E. Slotted Channel Fittings and Accessories: Recommended by the manufacturer for use with the • type and size of channel with which used. , 1. Materials: Same as channels and angles,except metal items may be stainless steel. F. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps,threaded C- , clamps with retainers,ceiling trapeze hangers,wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click- type hangers. ' G. Pipe Sleeves. ASTM A 53,Type E,Grade A,Schedule 40,galvanized steel,plain ends. H. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded ' body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish. ' 1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve typbt J. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. ' K. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel. 2.4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION , A. Identification Device Colors: Use those prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications. ' B. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, • not less than I inch wide by 3 mils thick. ' C. Tape Markers for Conductors: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. ' D. Color-Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme. E. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape , compounded for permanent direct-burial service,and with the following features: 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 3. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line. F. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic , laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16-inch minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8-inch minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white background. ' G. Warning and Caution Signs: Preprinted; comply with 29 CFR 1910.145, Chapter XVII. Colors, legend,and size appropriate to each application. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050- 3 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 t • 1. Interior Units: Aluminum, baked-enamel-finish, punched or drilled for mechanical ' fasteners. 2. Exterior Units: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate with 0.0396-inch, .galvanized-steel backing. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. ' H. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. ' 2.5 EQUIPMENT FOR-UTILI-TY COMPANY'S ELECTRICITY METERING A. Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company for meter sockets. PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION ' A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom. B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components,unless otherwise indicated. C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of ' components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other • installations. D. Right of.Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.2 RACEWAY APPLICATION ' A. Outdoor Installations: 1. Exposed: IMC. ' 2. Concealed: RNC. 3. Underground,Single Run: RNC. 4. Underground,Grouped: RNC. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC. ' 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250,Type 3R or Type 4,unless otherwise indicated. B. Indoor Installations: ' I. Exposed: EMT except in wet or damp locations,use IMC. 2. Concealed in Walls or Ceilings: EMT. 3. In Concrete Slab: RNC or EMT. ' 4. Below Slab on Grade or in Crawlspace: RNC 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC;except in wet or damp locations: LFMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250,Type 1,unless otherwise indicated. ' 3.3 RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION • BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-4 i CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 ' A. Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. ' B. Keep legs of raceway bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel. C. Use RMC elbows where RNC turns out of slab. ' D. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or woven ' polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wires. E. Install telephone and signal system raceways, 2-inch trade size and smaller, in maximum ' lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-deg ree bends or equivalent. Add pull boxes where necessary to accomplish this. F. Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement with a ' maximum of 72-inches flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections. G. Set floor boxes level and trim after installation to fit flush to finished floor surface. ' 3.4 WIRING METHODS FOR POWER,LIGHTING,AND CONTROL CIRCUITS ' A. Application: Use wiring methods specified below to the extent permitted by applicable codes as interpreted by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Exposed Feeders: Insulated single conductors in raceway. • 1 C. Concealed Feeders in Ceilings and walls: Insulated single conductors in raceway or Metal- ' clad cable. D. Concealed Feeders below Floors on Grade: Insulated single conductors in raceway. , E. Exposed Branch Circuits:Insulated single conductors in raceway. F. Concealed Branch Circuits in Ceilings and walls: Insulated single conductors in raceway or ' Metal-clad cable. G. Concealed Branch Circuits in Concrete or below Floors on Grade: Insulated single conductors in raceway. ' H. Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Insulated single conductors in raceway. 1. Remote-Control Signaling and Power-Limited Circuits, Classes 1, 2, and 3: Insulated ' conductors in raceway unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 WIRING INSTALLATION ' A. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. ' 3.6 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION • BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050- 5 ' CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 tA. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, slotted channel system components. B. Dry Locations: Steel materials. ' C. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four with,200-1b minimum design load for each support element. ' 3.7 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-or bracket-type hangers. - ' B. Size supports for multiple raceway or cable runs so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future. C. Support individual horizontal single raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps except use spring-steel fasteners for 1-1/2-inch and smaller single raceways above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports. ' D. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core- drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire- ' ' rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls. E. Secure electrical items and their supports to building structure, using the following methods unless other fastening methods are indicated: • 1. Wood: Wood screws or screw-type nails. f 1. 2. Gypsum Board: Toggle bolts. Seal around sleeves with joint compound, both sides of wall. 3. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow block and expansion bolts on-solid block. Seal around sleeves with mortar,both sides of wall. ' 4. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts. 5. Structural Steel: Welded threaded studs or Threaded studs driven by powder charge and provided with lock washers. ' a. Comply with AWS DLL for field welding. 6. Light Steel Framing: Sheet metal screws. ' 7. Fasteners for Damp, Wet,or Weather-Exposed Locations: Stainless steel. 8. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws. 9. Fasteners: Select so load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its ' proof-test load. 3.8 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. 1 • BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-6 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 ' B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or ' required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project. C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying. D. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit numbers in each cabinet,pull and junction box,and outlet box. Color-coding may be used for ' voltage and phase identification. E. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power ' and communication lines. Locate 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches(400 mm),overall, use a single line marker. ' F. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR 1910.145, Chapter XVII,and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Indoors install engraved plastic- ' laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items. G. Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red background ' with minimum 3/8-inch- (9-mm-) high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding,and other emergency operations. 3.9 ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT ' A. Install utility company metering equipment according to utility company's written ' requirements. Provide grounding and empty conduits as required by utility company. 3.10 FIRESTOPPING ' A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway sleeves and other penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original undisturbed fire-resistance ratings of assemblies.- . Firestopping installation is specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop ' Systems." 3.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING ' A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. B. Repair, refinish and touch up disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent ' undisturbed surfaces. END OF SECTION 16050 ' • BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-7 ' CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 • SECTION 16231—.Electrical Emergency/Standby Power Systems Generator Set Part 1. GENERAL ' 1.1 SCOPE A. Provide complete factory assembled generator set equipment with digital(microprocessor-based)electronic generator set controls,digital governor,and digital voltage regulator. B. Provide factory test,startup by a supplier authorized by the equipment manufacturer(s),and on-site testing of the system.. ' C. The generator set manufacturer shall warrant all equipment provided under this section,whether or not is manufactured by the generator set manufacturer, so that there is one source for warranty and product service. Technicians specifically trained and certified by the manufacturer to support the product and employed by the generator set supplier shall service the generator sets. 1.1 Codes and Standards ' A. The generator set installation and on-site testing shall conform to the requirements of the following codes and standards,as applicable. The generator set shall include necessary features to meet the requirements of these standards. 1. CSA 282, 1989 Emergency Electrical Power Supply for Buildings 2. IEEE446—Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications ' 3. NFPA37— • 4. NFPA70—National Electrical Code. Equipment shall be suitable for use in systems in compliance to Article 700, 701,and 702. 5. NFPA99—Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities 6. NFPA 110—Emergency and Standby Power Systems. The generator set shall meet all requirements for ' Level I systems. Level 1 prototype tests required by this standard shall have been performed on a complete and functional unit,component level type tests will not substitute for this requirement. B. The generator set and supplied accessories shall meet the requirements of the following standards: 1. NEMA MG1. Alternator shall comply with the requirements of the current version this standard as they apply to AC alternators. 2. UL 142—Sub-base Tanks 3. UL 1236—Battery Chargers 4. UL2200.The generator set shall be listed to UL2200 or submit to an independent third party certification process to verify compliance as installed.. C. The control system for the generator set shall comply with the following requirements. 1. CSA C22.2,No. 1.4—M91 Industrial Control Equipment. 2. EN50082-2,Electromagnetic Compatibility—Generic Immunity Requirements,Part 2: Industrial. 3. EN55011,Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Industrial, ' Scientific and Medical Equipment. • 4. FCC Part 15, Subpart B. ' 5. IEC8528 part 4. Control Systems for Generator Sets ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS GENERATOR SET 1623 1-1 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 , 6. IEC Std 801.2, 801.3,and 801.5 for susceptibility,conducted,and radiated electromagnetic emissions. 7. UL508. The entire control system of the generator set shall be UL508 listed and labeled. • 8. UL1236—Battery Chargers. ' D. The generator set manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality Standard and shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in design/development,production,installation,and ' service, in accordance with ISO 9001. 1.1 Acceptable Manufacturers Equipment specifications for this project are based on a model 125DGDK generator set manufactured by ' Cummins Power Generation with microprocessor-based controls. Equipment by other suppliers that meets the requirement of this specification is acceptable,if submitted and approved prior to bid date. Proposals substituting equipment must include a line by line compliance statement based on this specification. ' Proposal submitted using alternate equipment shall include pricing for the specified Cummins equipment with an add or deduct for the substituted equipment. Part 2. PRODUCTS ' 2.1 Generator set A. Ratings ' 1. The generator set shall operate at 1800 rpm and at a voltage of: 120/208Volts AC,Three phase,4-wire, 60 hertz. 2. The generator set shall be rated at 118 kW, 137 kVA at 0.87 PF,based on site conditions of:Altitude 500 ' ft.,ambient temperatures up to 125 degrees F. 3. The generator set rating shall be based on emergency/standby service. B. Performance ' 1. Voltage regulation shall be plus or minus 0.5 percent for any constant load between no load and rated • load. Random voltage variation with any steady load from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or ' minus 0.5 percent. 2. Frequency regulation shall be isochronous from steady state no load to steady state rated load. Random frequency variation with any steady load from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.5%. ' 3. The diesel engine-generator set shall accept a single step load of 100%nameplate kW and power factor, less applicable derating factors,with the engine-generator set at operating temperature. 4. The alternator shall produce a clean AC voltage waveform,with not more than 5%total harmonic , distortion at full linear load,when measured from line to neutral,and with not more than 3% in any single harmonic,and no 3`d order harmonics or their multiples. Telephone influence factor shall be less than 40. 5. The generator set shall be certified by the engine manufacturer to be suitable for use at the installed ' location and rating,and shall meet all applicable exhaust emission requirements at the time of commissioning. C. Construction 1. The engine-generator set shall be mounted on a heavy-duty steel base to maintain alignment between ' components. The base shall incorporate a battery tray with hold-down clamps within the rails. 2. All switches, lamps,and meters in the control system shall be oil-tight and dust-tight.All active control components shall be installed within a UL/NEMA 3R enclosure. There shall be no exposed points in the ' control (with the door open)that operate in excess of 50 volts. D. Connections • ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS GENERATOR SET 16231-2 ' CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 1. The generator set load connections shall be composed of silver or tin plated copper bus bars,drilled to • accept mechanical or compression terminations of the number and type as shown on the drawings. Sufficient lug space shall be provided for use with cables of the number and size as shown on the ' drawings. 2. Power connections to auxiliary devices shall be made at the devices,with required protection located at a wall-mounted common distribution panel. 3. Generator set control interfaces to other system components shall be made on a permanently labeled terminal block assembly.Labels describing connection point functions shall be provided. ' 2.1 Engine and Engine Equipment SPECIFY DISPLA CEMENTAND NUMBER OF ENGINE CYLINDERS FROM DATA ON GENERATOR ' SET SPECIFICATIONSHEET The engine shall be diesel,4 cycle,radiator and fan cooled. Minimum displacement shall be 359 cubic inches,with 6 cylinders.The horsepower rating of the engine at its minimum tolerance level shall be sufficient to drive the alternator and all connected accessories. Two cycle engines are not acceptable. Engine accessories and features shall include: A. An electronic governor system shall-provide automatic isochronous frequency regulation. The governing system dynamic capabilities shall be controlled as a function of engine coolant temperature to provide fast, stable operation at varying engine operating temperature conditions.The control system shall actively control the fuel rate and excitation as appropriate to the state of the generator set. Fuel rate shall be regulated as a function of starting,accelerating to start disconnect speed,accelerating to rated speed. The governing system shall include a programmable warm up at idle and cool down at idle function. While operating in idle state,the control system shall disable the alternator excitation system. B. Skid-mounted radiator and cooling system rated for full load operation in 122 degrees F(50 degrees C) • ambient as measured at the alternator air inlet. Radiator fan shall be suitable for use in a system with 0.5 in HZO restriction.Radiator shall be sized based on a core temperature that is 20F higher than the rated operation temperature,or prototype tested to verify cooling performance of the engine/radiator/fan joperation in a controlled environment. Radiator shall be provided with a duct adapter flange. The equipment manufacturer shall fill the cooling system with a 50/50-ethylene glycol/water mixture prior to shipping. Rotating parts shall be guarded against accidental contact. ' C. Electric starter(s)capable of three complete cranking cycles without overheating. D. Positive displacement, mechanical,full pressure, lubrication oil pump. E. Full flow lubrication oil filters with replaceable spin-on canister elements and dipstick oil level indicator. F. An engine driven,mechanical,positive displacement fuel pump.Fuel filter with replaceable spin-on canister element. Fuel cooler,suitable for operation of the generator set at full rated load in the ambient I ' temperature specified shall be provided if required for operation due to the design of the engine and the installation. G. Replaceable dry element air cleaner with restriction indicator. I ' H. Flexible supply and return fuel lines. I. Engine mounted battery charging alternator,40-ampere minimum,and solid-state voltage regulator. I ' J. Coolant heater 1. Engine mounted,thermostatically controlled,coolant heater(s)for each engine.Heater voltage shall be as ' shown on the project drawings.The coolant heater shall be UL499 listed and labeled. 2. The coolant heater shall be installed on the engine with silicone hose connections. Steel tubing shall be • used for connections into the engine coolant system wherever the length of pipe run exceeds 12 inches. The coolant heater installation shall be specifically designed to provide proper venting of the system. The I ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS GENERATOR SET 1623 1-3) i'' CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 ' coolant heaters shall provisions to isolate the heater for replacement of the heater element without draining the coolant from the generator set. The quick disconnect/automatic sealing couplers shall allow • the heater element to be replaced without draining the engine cooling system or significant coolant loss. ' 3. The coolant heater shall be provided with a DC thermostat,installed at the engine thermostat housing. An AC power connection box shall be provided for a single AC power connection to the coolant heater system. ' 4. The coolant heater(s)shall be sized as recommended by the engine manufacturer to warm the engine to a minimum of 104F(40C)in a 40F(4C)ambient,in compliance with NFPA110 requirements,or the temperature required for starting and load pickup requirements of this specification. K. Provide vibration isolators,spring/pad type,quantity as recommended by the generator set manufacturer. Isolators shall include seismic restraints if required by site location. L. Starting and Control Batteries shall be calcium/lead antimony type,24 volt DC,sized as recommended by ' the engine manufacturer,complete with battery cables and connectors. The batteries shall be capable of a minimum of three complete 15-second cranking cycles at 40F ambient temperature when fully charged. M. Provide exhaust silencer(s)for each engine of size and type as recommended by the generator set ' manufacturer and approved by the engine manufacturer. The mufflers shall be critical grade. Exhaust system shall be installed according to the engine manufacturer's recommendations and applicable codes and standards. ' N. Provide a minimum 12 amp battery charger for each generator set battery bank. Generator sets incorporating two battery banks shall be provided with two chargers connected together and operating in ' parallel,with alarm output(s)connected in parallel. The charger(s)shall include the following capabilities: 1. Chargers shall be UL 1236-BBHH listed and CSA or CUL certified for use in emergency applications. 2. The charger shall be compliant with UL991 requirements for vibration resistance. ' 3. The charger shall comply with the requirements of EN61000-4-5 for voltage surge resistance;EN50082-2 • for immunity;EN61000-4-2 for ESD;EN61000-4-3 for radiated immunity;ANSI/IEEE C62.41 category ' B and IN61000-4-4 for electrically fast transient;EN61000-4-6 for conducted emissions;and FCC Part 15 Class A for radiated emissions. 4. The charger shall be capable of charging a fully discharged battery without damage to the charger. It ' shall be capable of returning a fully discharged battery to fully charged condition within 24 hours. The charger shall be UL-labeled with the maximum battery amp-hour rating that can be recharged within 24 hours. The label shall indicate that the charger is suitable for charging of 200AH batteries per NFPA requirements. ' 5. The charger shall incorporate a 4-state charging algorithm,to provide trickle charge rate to restore fully discharged batteries,a bulk charge rate to provide fastest possible recharge after normal discharge, an absorption state to return the battery to 100 percent of charge,and a float stage to maintain a fully charge ' battery and supply battery loads when the generator set is not operating. In addition,the charger shall include an equalization timer. Charge rates shall be temperature compensated based on the temperature directly sensed at the battery. ' 6. The DC output voltage regulation shall be within plus or minus I%. The DC output ripple current shall not exceed 1 amp at rated output current level. 7. The charger shall include the following features: ' a) two line alphanumeric display with programming keys to allow display of DC output ammeter and voltmeters(5%accuracy or better),display alarm messages,and perform programming; b) LED indicating lamp(s)to indicating normal charging condition(green), equalize charge state ' (amber),and fault condition(red); c) AC input overcurrent, over voltage,and undervoltage protection; • d) DC output overcurrent protection; ' ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS GENERATOR SET 16231-4 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 e) Alarm output relay • f) Corrosion resistant aluminum enclosure ' O. Provide a dual wall sub-base fuel storage tank with a 200 gallons capacity. The tank shall be constructed of corrosion resistant steel and shall be UL listed. The equipment,as installed,shall meet all local and regional requirements for above ground tanks. 2.1 AC Generator ' A. The AC generator shall be;synchronous,four pole,2/3 pitch,revolving field,drip-proof construction, single prelubricated sealed bearing,air cooled by a direct drive centrifugal blower fan,and directly connected to the engine with flexible drive disc. All insulation system components shall meet NEMA MG temperature limits for Class H insulation system and shall be UL1446 listed. Actual temperature rise measured by resistance method at full load shall not exceed 105 degrees. B. The generator shall be capable of delivering rated_output(kVA)at rated frequency and power factor,at any ' voltage not more than 5 percent above or below rated voltage. C. A permanent magnet generator(PMG)shal#tbe included to provide a reliable source of excitation power for optimum motor starting and short circuit performance. The PMG and controls shall be capable of ' sustaining and regulating current supplied to a single phase or three phase fault at approximately 300%of rated current for not more than 10 seconds. D. The subtransient reactance of the alternator shall not exceed 15 percent,based on the standby rating of the generator set. 2.1 Generator set Control.The generator set shall be provided with a microprocessor-based control system that is designed to provide automatic starting,monitoring,and control functions for the generator set. The control system • shall also be designed to allow local monitoring and control of the generator set,and remote monitoring and control as described in this specification. The control shall be mounted on the generator set,or may be mounted in a free-standing panel next to the generator '. set if adequate space and accessibility is available.The control shall be vibration isolated and prototype tested to verify the durability of all components in the system under the vibration conditions encountered. The generator set mounted control shall include the following features and functions: A. Control Switches 1. Mode Select Switch. The mode select switch shall initiate the following control modes. When in the RUN or MANUAL position the generator set shall start,and accelerate to rated speed and voltage as directed by the operator. A separate push-button to initiate starting is acceptable. In the OFF position the i ' generator set shall immediately stop,bypassing all time delays. In the AUTO position the generator set shall be ready to accept a signal from a remote device to start and accelerate to rated speed and voltage. 2. EMERGENCY STOP switch. Switch shall be Red "mushroom-head" push-button. Depressing the emergency stop switch shall cause the generator set to immediately shut down,and be locked out from automatic restarting. 3. RESET switch. The RESET switch shall be used to clear a fault and allow restarting the generator set I' after it has shut down for any fault condition. 4. PANEL LAMP switch. Depressing the panel lamp switch shall cause the entire panel to be lighted with DC control power. The panel lamps shall automatically be switched off 10 minutes after the switch is depressed,or after the switch is depressed a second time. • B. Generator Set AC Output Metering. The generator set shall be provided with a metering set including the following features and functions: ' ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS GENERATOR SET 16231-5 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 ' 1. Digital metering set, 1%accuracy,to indicate generator RMS voltage and current,frequency,output current,output KW,KW-hours,and power factor. Generator output voltage shall be available in • line-to-line and line-to-neutral voltages,and shall display all three-phase voltages(line to neutral or line , to line)simultaneously. 2. Analog voltmeter,ammeter, fi•equency meter,power factor meter,and kilowatt(KW)meter. Voltmeter and ammeter shall display all three phases.Meter scales shall be color coded in the following fashion: green shall indicate normal operating condition,amber shall indicate operation in ranges that indicate , potential failure,and red shall indicate failure impending. Metering accuracy shall be within 1%at rated output.Both analog and digital metering are required. 3. The control system shall monitor the total load on the generator set,and maintain data logs of total ' operating hours at specific load levels ranging from 0 to 110%of rated load, in 10%increments. The control shall display hours of operation at less than 30%load and total hours of operation at more than 90%of rated load. , 4. The control system shall log total number of operating hours,total kWH,and total control on hours,as well as total values since reset. C. Generator Set Alarm and Status Display. 1. The generator set control shall include LED alarm and status indication lamps. The lamps shall be high-intensity LED type. The lamp condition shall-be clearly apparent under bright room lighting conditions. Functions indicated by the lamps shall include: ' • The control shall include five configurable alarm-indicating lamps. The lamps shall be field adjustable for any status,warning,or shutdown function monitored by the genset. They shall also be configurable for color,and control action(status,warning,or shutdown). ' • The control shall include green lamps to indicate that the generator set is running at rated frequency and voltage,and that a remote start signal has been received at the generator set. The running signal shall be based on actual sensed voltage and frequency on the output terminals of the generator set. ' • The control shall include a flashing red lamp to indicate that the control is not in automatic state,and • red common shutdown lamp. • The control shall include an amber common warning indication lamp. 2. The generator set control shall indicate the existence of the warning and shutdown conditions on the , control panel.All conditions indicated below for warning shall be field-configurable for shutdown. Conditions required to be annunciated shall include: ' low oil pressure(warning) low oil pressure(shutdown) oil pressure sender failure(warning) ' low coolant temperature(warning) high coolant temperature(warning) high coolant temperature(shutdown) ' high oil temperature(warning) engine temperature sender failure(warning) low coolant level(warning) fail to crank(shutdown) , fail to star/overcrank(shutdown) overspeed(shutdown) low DC voltage(warning) , high DC voltage(warning) weak battery(warning) low fuel-daytank(warning) high AC voltage(shutdown) ' low AC voltage(shutdown) under frequency(shutdown) • over current(warning) , ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS GENERATOR SET 16231-6 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 over current(shutdown) • short circuit(shutdown) ' ground fault(warning)(optional--when required by code or specified) over load(warning) emergency stop(shutdown) (4)configurable conditions 3. Provisions shall be made for indication of four customer-specified alarm or shutdown conditions. Labeling of the customer-specified alarm or shutdown conditions shall be of the same type and quality as the above-specified conditions. The non-automatic indicating lamp shall be red,and shall flash to indicate that the generator set is not able to automatically respond to a command to start from a remote location. ' D. Engine Status Monitoring. 1. The following information shall be available from a digital status panel on the generator set control engine oil pressure (psi or kPA) engine coolant temperature(degrees F or C) engine oil temperature(degrees F or C) ' engine speed(rpm) number of hours of operation(hours) number of start attempts - , ' battery voltage(DC volts) 2. The control system shall also incorporate a data logging and display provision to allow logging of the last 10 warning or shutdown indications on the generator.set,as well as total time of operation at various ' loads,as a percent of the standby rating of the generator set. E. Engine Control Functions. 1. The control system provided shall include a cycle cranking system,which allows for user selected crank time,rest time,and#of cycles. Initial settings shall be for 3 cranking periods of 15 seconds each,with 15-second rest period between cranking periods. 2. The control system shall include an idle mode control,which allows the engine to run in idle mode in the RUN position only. In this mode,the alternator excitation system shall be disabled. 3. The control system shall include an engine governor control,which functions to provide steady state frequency regulation as noted elsewhere in this specification. The governor control shall include adjustments for gain,damping,and a ramping function to control engine speed and limit exhaust smoke while the unit is starting. ' 4. The control system shall include time delay start(adjustable 0-300 seconds)and time delay stop (adjustable 0-600 seconds)functions. 5. The control system shall include sender failure monitoring logic for speed sensing,oil pressure, and ' engine temperature which is capable of discriminating between failed sender or wiring components,and an actual failure conditions. F. Alternator Control Functions: 1. The generator set shall include a full wave rectified automatic digital voltage regulation system that is matched and prototype tested by the engine manufacturer with the governing system provided. It shall be ' immune from misoperation due to load-induced voltage waveform distortion and provide a pulse width modulated output to the alternator exciter. The voltage regulation system shall be equipped with • three-phase line to neutral RMS sensing and shall control buildup of AC generator voltage to provide a ' linear rise and limit overshoot. The system shall include a torque-matching characteristic,which shall ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS GENERATOR SET 16231-7 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 ' reduce output voltage in proportion to frequency below an adjustable frequency threshold. Torque matching characteristic shall be adjustable for roll-off frequency and rate,and be capable of being curve- matched to the engine torque curve with adjustments in the field.The voltage regulator shall include adjustments for gain,damping,and frequency roll-off. Adjustments shall be broad range,and made via ' digital raise-lower switches,with an alphanumeric LED readout to indicate setting level. Rotary potentiometers for system adjustments are not acceptable. 2. A microprocessor-based protection device shall be provided to individually monitor all phases of the output current of the generator set and initiate an alarm(over current warning)when load current exceeds 110%of the rated current of the generator set on any phase for more than 60 seconds. The device shall shut down and lock out the generator set when output current level approaches the thermal damage point of the alternator(over current shutdown).The protective functions provided shall be in compliance to the requirements of NFPA70 article 445. 3. A microprocessor-based protection device shall be provided to monitor all phases of the output current , for short circuit conditions.The control/protection system shall monitor the current level and voltage.The controls shall shut down and lock out the generator set when output current level approaches the thermal damage point of the alternator(short circuit shutdown).The protective functions provided shall be in ' compliance to the requirements of NFPA70 article 445. 4. Controls shall be provided to monitor the KW load on the generator set,and initiate an alarm condition (over load)when total load on the generator set exceeds the generator set rating for in excess of 5 1 seconds. Controls shall include a load shed control,to operate a set of dry contacts(for use in shedding customer load devices)when the generator set is overloaded. 5. A microprocessor-based AC over/under voltage monitoring system that responds only to true RMS ' voltage conditions shall be provided. The system shall initiate shutdown of the generator set when alternator output voltage exceeds 110%of the operator-set voltage level for more than 10 seconds,or with no intentional delay when voltage exceeds 130%. Under voltage shutdown shall occur when the output ' voltage of the alternator is less than 85%for more than 10 seconds. The system shall monitor individual phases and be connected line to neutral on 3-phase 4-wire generator sets,and for systems that are solidly grounded. 6. When required by National Electrical Code or indicated on project drawings, the control System shall ' include a ground fault monitoring relay. The relay shall be adjustable from.3 -1200 amps,and include adjustable time delay of 0-10.0 seconds. The relay shall be for indication only,and not trip or shut down the generator set. Note bonding and grounding requirements for the generator set, and provide relay that will function correctly in system as installed. 7. The generator set control shall include a 120VAC-control heater. ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS GENERATOR SET 16231-8 ' CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 G. Other Control Functions • 1. The generator set shall be provided with a network communication module to allow LonMark compliant ' communication with the generator set control by remote devices. The control shall communicate all engine and alternator data,and allow starting and stopping of the generator set via the network in both test and emergency modes. 2. A battery monitoring system shall be provided which initiates alarms when the DC control and starting voltage is less than 25VDC or more than 32 VDC. During engine cranking(starter engaged),the low voltage limit shall be disabled,and DC voltage shall be monitored as load is applied to the battery,to detect impending battery failure or deteriorated battery condition. H. Control Interfaces for Remote Monitoring: 1. The control system shall provide four programmable output relays. These relay outputs shall be ' configurable for any alarm,shutdown, or status condition monitored by the control.The relays shall be configured to indicate:(1)generator set operating at rated voltage and frequency,(2)common warning, (3)common shutdown,(4)load shed command. ' 2. A fused 10 amp switched 24VDC power supply circuit shall be provided for customer use. DC power shall be available from this circuit whenever the generator set is running. 3. A fused 10 amp 24VDC power supply circuit shall be provided for customer use. DC power shall be ' available from this circuit at all times from the engine starting/control batteries. 4. The control shall be provided with a direct serial communication link for the LonWorks communication network interface as described elsewhere in this specification and shown on the drawings. ' 2.1 Other equipment to be provided with the generator set r , A. Provide and install a 20-light LED type remote alarm annunciator with horn, in a location that can be • conveniently monitored by facility personnel. The remote annunciator shall provide all the audible and visual alarms called for by NFPA Standard 1 10 for level 1 systems for the local generator control panel. ' Spare lamps shall be provided to allow future addition of other alarm and status functions to.the annunciator. Provisions for labeling of the annunciator in a fashion consistent with the specified functions shall be provided. Alarm silence and lamp test switch(es)shall be provided. LED lamps shall be ' replaceable, and indicating lamp color shall be capable of changes needed for specific application requirements. Alarm horn shall be switchable for all annunciation points. Alarm horn(when switched on) shall sound for first fault,and all subsequent faults, regardless of whether first fault has been cleared, in compliance with NFPA110 3-5.6.2. The interconnecting wiring between the annunciator and other system components shall be monitored and failure of the interconnection between components shall be displayed on the annunciator panel. B. The annunciator shall include the following alarm labels, audible annunciation features, and lamp colors: Condition Lamp Color Audible Alarm ' Normal Power(to Loads) Green No Genset Supplying Load Amber No Genset Running Green No ' Not in Auto Red(Flashing) Yes High Battery Voltage Red Yes Low Battery Voltage Red Yes Charger AC Failure Red Yes ' Fail to Start Red Yes Low Engine Temperature Amber Yes • Pre-High Engine Temperature Amber Yes High Engine Temperature Red Yes ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS GENERATOR SET 16231-9 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 Pre-Low Oil Pressure Amber Yes Low Oil Pressure Red Yes • Overspeed Red Yes Low Coolant Level Amber Yes Low Fuel Level Amber Yes Network OK Green Yes (4)Spares Configurable Configurable Low battery voltage lamp shall also be lighted for low cranking voltage or weak battery alarm. C. The generator set shall be provided with a mounted main line circuit breaker, sized to carry the rated output current of the generator set. The circuit breaker shall incorporate an electronic trip unit that operates to , protect the alternator under all overcurrent conditions,or a thermal-magnetic trip with other overcurrent protection devices that positively protect the alternator under overcurrent conditions. The supplier shall submit time overcurrent characteristic curves and thermal damage curve for the alternator,demonstrating the effectiveness of the protection provided. ' D. Outdoor Weather-Protective Enclosure 1. The generator set shall be provided with an outdoor enclosure,with the entire package listed under ' UL2200. The package shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code for all wiring materials and component spacing. The total assembly of generator set,enclosure,and sub-base fuel tank shall be designed to be lifted into place using spreader bars. Housing shall provide ample airflow for ' generator set operation at rated load in an ambient temperature of 100F. The housing shall have hinged access doors as required to maintain easy access for all operating and service functions. All doors shall be lockable,and include retainers to hold the door open during service. Enclosure roof shall be cambered ' to prevent rainwater accumulation. Openings shall be screened to limit access of rodents into the • enclosure. All electrical power and control interconnections shall be made within the perimeter of the enclosure. 2. All sheet metal shall be primed for corrosion protection and finish painted with the manufacturers ' standard color using a two step electrocoating paint process,or equal meeting the performance requirements specified below. All surfaces of all metal parts shall be primed and painted. The painting process shall result in a coating that meets the following requirements: ' Primer thickness,0.5-2.0 mils. Top coat thickness,0.8-1.2 mils. Gloss,per ASTM D523-89, 80%plus or minus 5%. Gloss retention after one year shall exceed ' 50%. Crosshatch adhesion, per ASTM D3359-93, 4B-5B. Impact resistance,per ASTM D2794-93, 120-160 inch-pounds. Salt Spray,per ASTM B 117-90, 1000+hours. Humidity,per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+hours. ' Water Soak,per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+hours. • ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS GENERATOR SET 1623 1-10 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 3. Painting of hoses,clamps,wiring harnesses,and other non-metallic service parts shall not be acceptable. • Fasteners used shall be corrosion resistant,and designed to minimize marring of the painted surface when removed for normal installation or service work. ' 4. Enclosure shall be constructed of minimum 12 gauge steel for framework and 14 gauge steel for panels. All hardware and hinges shall be stainless steel. ' 5. A factory-mounted exhaust silencer shall be installed inside the enclosure. The exhaust shall exit the enclosure through a rain collar and terminate with a rain cap. Exhaust connections to the generator set shall be through seamless flexible connections. 6. The enclosure shall include the following maintenance provisions: • Flexible coolant and lubricating oil drain lines,that extend to the exterior of the enclosure,with internal drain valves • External radiator fill provision. 7. Provide motorized louvers to minimize air flow through,the enclosure when generator set is not operating. t Louvers shall include provisions to prevent accumulation of ice or snow that might prevent operation. 8. Inlet ducts shall include rain hoods. ' 9. The generator set shall be provided with a sound-attenuated housing which allows the generator set to operate at full rated load in an ambient temperature of up to 100F. The enclosure shall reduce the sound level of the generator set while operating at full rated load to a maximum of 85 dBA at any location 7 meters from the generator set in a free field environment. 10. The enclosure shall be insulated with non-hydroscopic materials. E. Provide a sub-base fuel tank for the generator set,sized to allow for full load operation of the generator set ' for 12 hours. The sub-base fuel tank shall be UL142 listed and labeled. Installation shall be in compliance • to NFPA37. The fuel tank shall be a double-walled,steel construction and include the following features: 1. Emergency tank and basin vents. 2. Mechanical level gauge. 3. Fuel supply and return lines,connected to generator set with flexible fuel lines as recommended by the ' engine manufacturer and in compliance to UL2200 and NFPA 37 requirements. 4. Leak detection provisions,wired to the generator set control for local and remote alarm indication. 5. High and low level float switches to indicate fuel level. Wire switches to generator control for local and remote indication of fuel level 6. Basin drain. ' 7. Integral lifting provisions. • ' ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS GENERATOR SET 16231-11 1 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 ' Part 3. OPERATION 3.1 Sequence of Operation • A. Generator set shall start on receipt of a start signal from remote equipment. The start signal shall be via ' hardwired connection to the generator set control and a redundant signal over the required network connection. ' B. The generator set shall complete a time delay start period as programmed into the control. C. The generator set control shall initiate the starting sequence for the generator set. The starting sequence shall include the following functions: ' D. The control system shall verify that the engine is rotating when the starter is signaled to operate. If the engine does not rotate after two attempts,the control system shall shut down and lock out the generator set, and indicate"fail to crank"shutdown. ' E. The engine shall fire and accelerate as quickly as practical to start disconnect speed. If the engine does not start, it shall complete a cycle cranking process as described elsewhere in this specification. If the engine has not started by the completion of the cycle cranking sequence, it shall be shut down and locked out,and ' the control system shall indicate"fail to start". F. The engine shall accelerate to rated speed and the alternator to rated voltage.Excitation shall be disabled ' until the engine has exceeded programmed idle speed, and regulated to prevent over voltage conditions and oscillation as the engine accelerates and the alternator builds to rated voltage. G. On reaching rated speed and voltage,the generator set shall operate as dictated by the control system in ' isochronous state. H. When all start signals have been removed from the generator set, it shall complete a time delay stop sequence. The duration of the time delay stop period shall be adjustable by the operator. , I. On completion of the time delay stop period,the generator set control shall switch off the excitation system • and shall shut down. J. Any start signal received after the time stop sequence has begun shall immediately terminate the stopping ' sequence and return the generator set to isochronous operation. Part 4. OTHER REQUIREMENTS ' 4.1 Submittals. A. Within 10 days after award of contract,provide six sets of the following information for review: , • Manufacturer's product literature and performance data,sufficient to verify compliance to specification requirements. .*.. ' • A paragraph by paragraph specification compliance statement,describing the differences between the specified and the proposed equipment. • Manufacturer's certification of prototype testing. ' • Manufacturer's published warranty documents. • Shop drawings showing plan and elevation views with certified overall dimensions, as well as wiring interconnection details. • Interconnection wiring diagrams showing all external connections required;with field wiring terminals , marked in a consistent point-to-point manner. • Manufacturer's installation instructions. • ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS GENERATOR SET 16231-12 ' ' CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 4.1 Factory Testing. • A. The generator set manufacturer shall perform a complete operational test on the generator set prior to ' shipping from the factory. A certified test report shall be provided.Equipment supplied shall be fully tested at the factory for function and performance. B. Factory testing may be witnessed by the owner and consulting engineer. Costs for travel expenses will be the responsibility of the owner and consulting engineer. Supplier is responsible to provide two weeks notice for testing. C. Generator set factory tests on the equipment shall be performed at rated load and rated power factor. ' Generator sets that have not been factory tested at rated power factor will not be acceptable. Tests shall include: run at full load,maximum power,voltage regulation,transient and steady-state governing,single step load pickup,and function of safety shutdowns. ' 4.1 Installation A. Equipment shall be installed by the contractor in accordance with final submittals and contract documents. ' Installation shall comply with applicable state and local codes as required by the authority having jurisdiction. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and instructions included in the listing or labeling of UL listed products. ' ... B. Installation of equipment shall include furnishing and installing all interconnecting wiring between all major equipment provided for the on-site power system. The contractor shall also perform interconnecting wiring between equipment sections(when required),under the supervision of the equipment supplier. ! ' C. Equipment shall be installed on concrete housekeeping pads. Equipment shall be permanently fastened to the pad in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and seismic requirements of the site. D. Equipment shall be initially started and operated by representatives of the manufacturer. E. All equipment shall be physically inspected for damage. Scratches and other installation damage shall be repaired prior to final system testing. Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all dirt and • construction debris prior to initial operation and final testing of the system. 4.1 On-Site Acceptance Test: A. The complete installation shall be tested for compliance with the specification following completion of all ' site work. Testing shall be conducted by representatives of the manufacturer,with required fuel supplied by Contractor. The Engineer shall be notified in advance and shall have the option to witness the tests. B. Installation acceptance tests to be conducted on-site shall include a"cold start"test,a two hour full load ' test,and a one step rated load pickup test in accordance with NFPA 110. Provide a resistive load bank and make temporary connections for full load test,if necessary. C. Perform a power failure test on the entire installed system. This test shall be conducted by opening the ' power supply from the utility service,and observing proper operation of the system for at least 2 hours. Coordinate timing and obtain approval for start of test with site personnel. ' 4.1 Training A. The equipment supplier shall provide training for the facility operating personnel covering operation and maintenance of the equipment provided. The training program.shall be not less than 4 hours in duration ' and the class size shall be limited to 5 persons. Training date shall be coordinated with the facility owner. 4.1 Service and support ' A. The manufacturer of the generator set shall maintain service parts inventory at a central location which is accessible to the service location 24 hours per day,365 days per year. • ' ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS GENERATOR SET 16231-13 1 1 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 ' B. The generator set shall be serviced by a local service organization that is trained and factory certified in generator set service. The supplier shall maintain an inventory of critical replacement parts at the local • service organization,and in service vehicles. The service organization shall be on call 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. ' C. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records of each generator set provided for at least 20 years. ' 4.1 Warranty A. The generator set and associated equipment shall be warranted for a period of not less than 5 years from the ' date of commissioning against defects in materials and workmanship. B. The warranty shall be comprehensive. No deductibles shall be allowed for travel time,service hours,repair parts cost,etc. ' 1 1 1 1 ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS GENERATOR SET 16231-14 ' 1 ' CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 • SECTION 16415—ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS TRANSFER SWITCH ' Part 1. GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE ' A. Provide complete factory assembled power transfer equipment with electronic microprocessor-based controls designed for fully automatic operation and including: surge voltage isolation,voltage sensors on all phases of the normal source and one phase of the emergency source,positive mechanical and electrical ' interlocking,and mechanically held contacts for both sources. B. The generator set manufacturer shall warrant transfer switches to provide a single source of responsibility for all the products provided. Technicians specifically trained to support the product and employed by the ' generator set supplier shall service the transfer switches. Technicians shall have passed qualification examinations on the product, and be certified by the manufacturer as capable of effectively servicing the equipment provided. ' 1.1 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The automatic transfer switch shall conform to the requirements of the following codes and standards: 1. UL 1008. The transfer switch shall be UL listed and labeled. ' 2. CSA C22.2,No. 14—M91 Industrial Control Equipment. 3. CSA 282,Emergency Electrical Power Supply for Buildings ' 4. IEEE Standard C62.41 and C62.45. • 5. NFPA70—National Electrical Code. Equipment shall be suitable for use in systems in compliance to Article 700, 701,and 702. • 6. NFPA99—Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities . 7. NFPA 110—Emergency and Standby Power Systems. The transfer switch shall meet all requirements for ' Level 1 systems. 8. IEEE446—Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 9. NEMA ICS 10-1993 —AC Automatic Transfer Switches. B. The transfer switch manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality Standard and shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in design/development,production, installation, and service, in accordance with ISO 9001. 1.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES ' Equipment specifications for this project are based on a model OTEC 400A 4 Pole transfer switch manufactured by Cummins Power Generation. Equipment by other suppliers that meets the requirements of this specification is acceptable, if submitted and approved prior to bid date. Proposals substituting ' equipment must include a line by line compliance statement based on this specification.Proposal submitted using alternate equipment shall include pricing for the specified Cummins equipment with a add or deduct for the substituted equipment. ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS TRANSFER SWITCH 16415- 1 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 ' Part 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 POWER TRANSFER SWITCH • A. Ratings ' 1. Refer to the project drawings for specifications on the sizes and types of transfer switch equipment, withstand and closing ratings,number of poles,voltage and ampere ratings,enclosure type,and , accessories. 2. Main contacts shall be rated for the operation voltage as installed. 3. Transfer switches shall be rated to carry 100 percent of rated current continuously in the enclosure ' supplied, in ambient temperatures of-30 to+60 degrees C,relative humidity up to 95% (non-condensing),and altitudes up to 10,000 feet(3000M). 4. Transfer switch equipment shall have withstand and closing ratings(WCR)in RMS symmetrical amperes ' greater than the available fault currents shown on the drawings. The transfer switch and its upstream protection shall be coordinated. The transfer switch shall be third party listed and labeled for use with the specific protective device(s)installed in the application. , B. Construction 1. Transfer switches shall be double-throw,electrically and mechanically interlocked, and mechanically held in the source 1 and source 2 positions. , 2. Transfer switch internal wiring shall be composed of pre-manufactured harnesses that are permanently marked for source and destination. Harnesses shall be connected to the control system by means of locking disconnect plug(s),to allow the control system to be easily disconnected and serviced without ' disconnecting power from the transfer switch mechanism. 3. Transfer switch shall be provided with flame retardant transparent covers to allow viewing of switch ' contact operation but prevent direct contact with line voltage components. • 4. Transfer switches shall be 3-pole or 4-pole as shown on the drawings. 3-Pole equipment shall be provided with a neutral bus and lugs. The neutral bus shall be sized to carry 100%of the current ' designated on the switch rating. 4-Pole equipment shall include a neutral contact mechanism that is sized and designed exactly like the phase contacts,and connected on a common operating bar so that the neutral and phase contacts all operate at the same time. 5. Enclosures shall be UL tested and NEMA 1 type.rated. The enclosure shall provide NEC wire bend space ' when both sources and the load are all connected from either the top or bottom of the transfer switch. The cabinet door shall be key-locking. C. Connections t 1. Field control connections shall be made on terminal blocks that are clearly and permanently labeled. 2. Transfer switch shall be provided with AL/CU mechanical lugs sized to accept the full output rating of ' the transfer switch. 2.1 Transfer Switch Control A. Solid-state under voltage sensors shall simultaneously monitor both sources.Pick-up and drop-out settings t shall be adjustable. B. Automatic controls shall signal the engine-generator set to start upon signal from normal source sensor. ' Solid-state time delay start, adjustable from 0 to 10 seconds(factory set at 2 seconds)shall avoid nuisance start-ups. Battery voltage starting contacts shall be silver alloy,dry type contacts,factory wired to a field wiring terminal block. ' C. The switch shall transfer when the emergency source reaches the set point. Provide a solid-state time delay on transfer,adjustable from 2 to 120 seconds, factory set at 3 seconds. • ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS TRANSFER SWITCH 16415 -2 ' CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 D. The switch shall retransfer the load to the normal source after a time delay retransfer,adjustable from 6 seconds to 30 minutes,factory set at 5 minutes. Retransfer time delay shall be immediately bypassed if the emergency power source fails. ' E. Controls shall signal the engine-generator set to stop aftefA time delay,adjustable from 2 to 10 minutes, and factory set at 5 minutes,beginning on return to the normal source. F. The control system shall include field adjustable provisions to control the speed of operation of the transfer switch power contacts. In addition,the control shall include a field-configurable in-phase monitor function that causes the transfer to be initiated only when the sources are in phase. When in phase transfer is enabled and transfer does not occur within 120 seconds,the control shall automatically transfer the load using delayed transfer. G. Provide a field-configurable exercisor clock with provisions for operating the generator set for a test period at 7, 14,21,or 28-day intervals in either with-load or without-load configuration. Operation time of the t generator set shall be field configurable. Exercisor clock functions that require setting the test time by pressing an exercise button at the desired time of exercise(only)shall not be acceptable. H. Power for the transfer switch operation shall be derived from the source to which the load is being ' transferred. I. Supply power failed indication shall be displayed on the ATS control panel. ' J. Provide a configurable pre-and/or post-transfer signal prior to automatic operation of the transfer switch. 2.1 Front Panel Devices: Provide control switches mounted on cabinet front for: A. Test- Simulates normal power loss to control for testing of generator set. Controls shall provide for a test with or without load transfer. B. Override-Momentary position to override retransfer time delay and cause.immediate return to normal source, if available. r C. Provide LED-type switch position and source available indicator lamps on the front of the transfer switch cabinet. 2.1 Control Interface A. The transfer switch will provide an isolated relay contact for starting of a generator set. The relay shall be normally held open,and close to start the generator set. B. Provide dry contacts to indicate the following conditions: load connected to source 1 source 2 connected to load. 2.1 Enclosure A. The cabinet door shall be key-locking. B. Transfer switch equipment shall be provided in a NEMA 1 or better enclosure and located as indicated on drawings. ' C. The cabinet shall provide code-required wire bend space at point of entry as shown on the drawings. Manual operating handles shall be accessible to authorized personnel only by opening the key-locking cabinet door. ' ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS TRANSFER SWITCH 16415 -3 CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 ' Part 3. OPERATION r 3.1 Open Transition Sequence of Operation ' A. Transfer switch normally connects an energized utility power source(source 1)to loads and a generator set (source 2)to the loads when normal source fails. The normal position of the transfer switch is source 1 ' (connected to the utility),and no start signal is supplied to the genset. B. Generator Set Exercise(Test)With Load Mode.The control system shall be configurable to test the generator set under load. In this mode,the transfer switch shall control the generator set in the following sequence: ' 1. Transfer switch control shall initiate the exercise sequence at a time indicated in the exercise timer program,or when manually initiated by the operator test . ' 2. When the control systems senses the generator set at rated voltage and frequency,it shall operate to connect the loads to the generator set by opening the normal source contacts,and closing the alternate source contacts a predetermined time period later. The timing sequence for the contact operation shall be ' programmable in the controller. 3. The generator set shall operate connected to the load for the duration of the exercise period. If the generator set fails during this period,the transfer switch shall automatically reconnect the generator set to ' the normal service. 4. On completion of the exercise period,the transfer switch control shall operate to connect the loads to the normal source by opening the alternate source contacts,and closing the normal source contacts a ' predetermined time period later. The timing sequence for the contact operation shall be programmable in the controller. 5. The transfer switch shall operate the generator set unloaded for a cool down period,and then remove the ' start signal from the generator set. If the normal power fails at any time when the generator set is • running,the transfer switch shall immediately connect the system loads to the generator set. C. Generator Set Exercise(Test)Without Load Mode.The control system shall be configurable to test the ' generator set without transfer switch load connected. In this mode,the transfer switch shall control the generator set in the following sequence: 1. Transfer switch control shall initiate the exercise sequence at a time indicated in the exercise timer ' program,or when manually initiated by the operator. 2. The control system shall operate the generator set unloaded for the duration of the exercise period. 3. At the completion of the exercise period,the transfer switch control shall remove the start signal from the ' generator set. If the normal power fails at any time when the generator set is running,the transfer switch shall immediately connect the system loads to the generator set. Part 4. OTHER REQUIREMENTS ' 4.1 Factory Testing. The transfer switch supplier shall perform a complete operational test on the transfer switch prior to shipping from the factory. A certified test report shall be available on request. Test process shall include ' calibration of voltage sensors. 4.1 Service and support A. The manufacturer of the transfer switch shall maintain service parts inventory at a central location which is , accessible to the service location 24 hours per day,365 days per year. B. The transfer switch shall be serviced by a local service organization that is trained and factory certified in both generator set and transfer switch service. The supplier shall maintain an inventory of critical , replacement parts at the local service organization,and in service vehicles. The service organization shall be on call 24 hours per day,365 days per year. ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS TRANSFER SWITCH 16415 -4 ' ' CITY OF JEFFERSON—STREET MAINTENANCE BUILDING 05/07 C. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records of each transfer switch provided for at least 20 years. ' END OF SECTION 16415 1 1 • • ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS TRANSFER SWITCH 16415 -5 i iADDENDUM NO. 1 PROJECT NO. 41005 STREET DEPARTMENT MAINTENANCE FACILITY MAY 31, 2007 i The bidder will acknowledge receipt of this Addendum and his acceptance of its conditions by isigning this Addendum and including it with his bid. BIDDER: Nerslues Construction Co. , Inc. BY: V ' TITTLE: President L. The bid opening date for this project is herby changed. The bid opening will be • TUESDAY, JUNE 12, 2007 at 1:30 P.M. 2. The contract time for this project is hereby changed. The contract time will be Two Hundred Seventy(270) Calendar Days. ' 3. Questions for this project will be allowed until Thursday, June 7, 2007 at 12:00 P.M. CITY OF JEFFERSON,MISSOURI i PATRICK E. SULLIVAN.) P.E. DIRCTOR OF COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT i i f ADDENDUM NO.2 PROJECT NO.41005 ' STREET DEPARTMENT MAINTENANCE FACILITY June 8,2007 1 The bidder will acknowledge receipt of this Addendum and his acceptance of its conditions by signing this Addendum and including it with his bid. BIDDER: Verslues Construction Co. , Inc. 1 1 TITTLE: President ! See Attached • 1 CITY OF JEFFERSON,MISSOURI PATRICK E. SULLIVAN,P.E. DIRCTOR OF COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT i 1 1 1 _ • 1 1 ' ADDENDUM NO.2 PROJECT NO. 41005 ' STREET DEPARTMENT MAINTENANCE FACILITY June 8, 2007 1. GENERAL PROJECT CLARIFICATIONS/ADDITIONS: The only concrete masonry unit (CMU) walls are around Mud Room 118 (full room height) and ' Wash Bay 121 (10 ft. high). The Contractor shall have the option of extending the reinforced CMU wall to bottom of roof at Wash Bay, in lieu of adding structural steel framing with metal liner panels on both sides, above 10 ft. CMU wall. ' Provide full batt thermal insulation with vapor barrier in wood frame walls around Office Area, at building exterior & adjacent to Garage Areas and between floor joists above ceiling at entire Mezzanine floor area. Also provide full batt thermal/sound insulation in all wood frame walls around Men's & Women's Restrooms, Sign Shop, and Office Mezzanine. Metal Building System thermal insulation shall include minimum R-value of 19 at roof and 13 at walls. Steel pipe bollards at all overhead garage doors shall be 6-inch diameter (sch. 40) x 7 ft. length, set in 18" x 42" deep concrete base, with 48" exposure. Contractor shall also provide four (4) additional bollards around mechanical/electrical equipment, at location directed by Owner/Architect. All concrete floor areas and 6" high concrete curb in Garages, Wash Bay & Mud Room shall have both a floor hardener and floor sealer equal to the following: ' 1) Floor Hardener/Sealer: Consolideck LS, Prosoco, Inc. • 2) Floor Sealer/Water Repellent: SL100 Wtaer Repellent, Prosoco, Inc. ' 2. ALTERNATES NO. 1 6 and 7; CLARIFICATION: ' Concrete paving under Alternate No. 1 shall assume full area and length of building wing as shown on drawings and not be reduced under Alternates No's. 6 & 7 (reducing building wing length). t 3. SECTION 04810—UNIT MASONRY 1.2 SUMMARY REVISE as follows: Face brick shall be Utility size to match adjacent buildings. Contractor ' shall include a brick allowance of $1,300.00 per thousand for utility brick, to be selected/approved by Owner/Architect. ' 4. SECTION 08361 —SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 2.2 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES ADD: Tracks for all doors shall be manufacturer's standard heavy duty three-inch (3") wide track. 2.6 DOOR ASSEMBLY ' REVISE: E. Track Configuration: Standard-lift track(3"wide). Verify head clearances. REVISE: L. Door Finish (Exterior& Interior): • 1. Surface Preparation: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so ' surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants a. Pre-treat zinc-coated steel, after cleaning, with a conversion coating of type suited • to organic coating applied over it. 2. Baked-Enamel Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. ' a. Color and gloss as selected by Owner/Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. ADD: M. Door Size: ' 1. Doors shall be 14 feet high x widths as shown on drawings. 5. SECTION 13125—METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS ' 1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS CHANGE Para. A.4. Roof Snow Load; as follows: minimum 20 psf(in lieu of 25 psf). CHANGE Para. D. Thermal Performance; as follows' 1. Metal Roof Panel Assemblies: ' a. Total Insulation R-Value: 19 minimum,with vapor barrier at inside face. 2. Metal Wall Panel Assemblies: a. Insulation R-Value: 13 minimum. Provide with vapor barrier at inside face in Garage Areas and Mezzanine. 2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL ' DELETE Para. A. Testing Agency ... • CHANGE Para. B. as follows: B. Special Inspector: Contractor shall include the costs in their bid to engage a qualified ' engineer Special Inspector to perform the following tests and inspections and to submit reports, according to the 2003 International Building Code(1704.2). Special Inspector shall verify that fabricator/manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control ' procedures and will review the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 1.Exception: Special Inspections are not required if fabrication is performed on the ' premises of a Fabricator/Manufacturer registered and approved by a special inspection agency, having jurisdiction to perform such Work without special inspection, according to 2003 International Building Code Section 1704.2.2 Fabricator approval. a. After fabrication, submit certificate of compliance with copy to authorities having ' jurisdiction certifying that Work was performed according to Contract requirements. ' 6. DRAWING SHEET A101; REVISE; STRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA, as follows: 1. ROOF STRUCTURE DEAD LOAD BY MBC 2. COLLATERAL LOAD 10 psf 3. ROOF LIVE LOAD FLAT OR LESS THAN 4:12 30 psf(UNREDUCED) • 4. SNOW LOAD ' SNOW EXPOSURE FACTOR, Ce= 1.0 ' IMPORTANCE FACTOR, 1 = 1.0 • GROUND SNOW LOAD, Pg=20psf ' Pf design=20 psf 5. WIND LOADING-ANALYTICAL PROCEDURE BASIC WIND SPEED(3 sec.GUST),V=90mph ' EXPOSURE CATEGORY B IMPORTANCE FACTOR, 1 = 1.0 INTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENT,GCpi=+/-0.55 ' 6. SEISMIC LOADING-EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE PROCEDURE SEISMIC USE GROUP 1 SITE CLASS D SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY C ' 7. FOUNDATION BEARING CAPACITIES-ASSUMED(PER OWNER) ALLOWABLE SOIL BEARING: 2,000psf SPREAD AND CONTINUOUS FOOTINGS 7. DRAWING SHEET A102; ADD the following: Refer to Plumbing documents for furnishing and coordination of floor grate at Mud Room 118 ' floor area. 8. DRAWING SHEET A301; REVISE as follows: Typical Trench Drain Detail shall have a clear inside concrete width of 12-inches. Refer to Plumbing documents for the furnishing and coordinating the cast iron floor grates with 17" width frame. ' 9. ELECTRICAL: 1. Add one 50A 2p breaker and 3 wire#6 circuiting for range in break room. Circuit to panel PP3- 28,30. 1 10. MECHANICAL: ' 1. The following manufactures shall be added as approved manufactures(any product substitutions shall be submitted to engineer for approval): a.Nailor Industries b.Twin City Fan ' c.Louvers& Dampers d.Superior Radiant Products ' 11. PLUMBING: PART 2- Plumbing contractor shall provide an additional 1/2" cold & hot water line on the west wall of mud room 118. Each side of the mud room shall have a close couple wall faucet with male hose thread outlet(Woodford 22-cc or equivalent). Provide with a five foot length of vinyl hose for washing boots. Install the appropriate backing in the wall to provide adequate support. Coordinate with maintenance facility staff on the final placement and mounted height. PART 3-Add the following drinking fountain to the plumbing device schedule DF-1 (Halsey Taylor HTV8BLEE-Q). 12. PLUMBING CLARIFICATIONS: 1. Plumbing contractor should account for 2 ADA water closets(WC-1), 1 standard water closet (WC-2), 2 urinals(UR-1), 4 countertop lavatory's, 1 mop sink(MS-1), 1 service sink(SS-1), 1 ' drinking fountain (DF-1), and 1 kitchen sink(S-1). ' 2. Plumbing contractor shall coordinate with general contractor on providing a cast-in-place trench • drain in the bay areas.Trench shall be a minimum 12"wide with a 17"frame and grate cover as specified.The trench drain frame cross bracing shall be remove once the frame and grate system has been permanently set, thus the grate must be a four corner tie down style. 3. Plumbing contractor shall coordinate with general contractor on providing a level grate for the Mud Room floor. Boot washing and general cleanup will be done in this room and on this grate. ' Grate shall provide free flow of debris to the central floor drain. Central floor drain shall be a four inch (4")floor drain with no trap. This floor drain shall have no grate other than the one described above. Coordinate floor grate type and style with Jeff City Director of Community Development, ' Pat Sullivan. 4. Plumbing contractor shall coordinate with general contractor in the construction of the cast-in- place wash bay waste-pit described in note 18 of sheet P102. Plumbing contractor shall coordinate with the general contractor on providing a 16,000 pound-rated cover grate. Coordinate ' grate type and style with Jeff City Director of Community Development, Pat Sullivan. • 1 1 • OF / rt4 lZ� u f 0 O ; City of Jefferson John Landwehr Mayor iDepartment of Community Development Patrick E.Sullivan, P.E.; Director ' 320 East McCarty Street Phone: (573)634-6410 Jefferson City, Missouri 65101 25 Fax: (573) 634-6562 June 7, 2007 ' Subject: Street Department Maintenance Facility Project No. 41005 Pre-bid Conference Notes ' A pre-bid conference was held in the small conference room of City Hall on Tuesday, May 29, 2007 for the above noted project. Those attending the meeting are as listed below: NAME REPRESENTING PHONE Brett Dudenhoeffer J.C. Industries 573-636-2711 Don Kebperin Verslues Const. 573-395-4323 ' Carl Stokes Stokes Electric 573-636-2167 Mike Croclur Wavco Const. 573-893-4880 Larry Brandhorst The Architects Alliance 573-636-5000 Pat Sullivan, P.E. City of Jefferson 573-634-6410 Britt E. Smith, P.E. City of Jefferson 573-634-6410 • The meeting proceeded with a general discussion of the planned project and an overview of the specifications. This memorandum summarizes the proceedings of that meeting and the questions received at the meeting. In addition, this memo contains any questions received by telephone, etc. after the meeting and prior to the closure of the questions period. Below are the items that were specifically discussed. GENERAL COMMENTS: 1 NOTEABLE DATES: Bid Opening — Tuesday, June 5, 2007, 1:30pm (Change to Tuesday, ' June 12, 2007, 1:30 pm by Addendum No. 1) Questions Cut Off— Friday, June 1, 2007 12:00pm (Change to Thursday, ' June 7, 2007 12:00 pm by Addendum No. 1) Anticipated Notice to Proceed — Mid July 2007 CONTRACT TIME: 240 working days (Change to 270 Calendar Days by Addendum No. 1) ' City of °I ef erson �r COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT ...�� "building a better communit " 9 _.. Y.. F:\CITY-PROJECTS\41005-Street Dept Hyde Park Maintenance Facility\Correspondenc;e,Pre hid Notes.doc i LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: $300.00 per calendar day. • WAGE ODER: 14 PLAN REVIEW: A general review of the plans was conducted by City Staff and the Architect. QUESTION/ANSWER :(Received at the prebid meeting and those received by telephone etc. prior to 12:00 PM Thursday June 7, 2007) ' QUESTION: What soil testing is the contractor required to complete? ANSWER: As the owner is conduction the site preparation the general compaction testing will be conducted by the owner prior to the contract. The owner reserves the right to re-test any ' area during construction. Any additional cost to correct unsuitable condition found would be negotiated. ' QUESTION: What concrete testing requirements are there? ANSWER: Concrete testing shall be conducted by a qualified testing firm approved by the owner and retained.by the Contractor. The testing requirements are stated on pages 03300-13 ' thru 03300-14 of the specifications. • QUESTION: What steel testing requirements are there? ANSWER: Steel test requirement are outlined in section 13125 Metal Building Systems and will be ' modified by Addendum 2. QUESTION: Are Engineer sealed foundation drawing required to be supplied by the Contractor? ANSWER: Yes. See section 03300 for additional information. QUESTION: Given metal building delivery times 240 days does not seem to be enough. Will the City increase the number of days on the project? ANSWER: Addendum No. 1 increase the days on the project by 30 calendar days. QUESTION: Building suppliers are having difficulty meeting the timeline for bidding the building. Will the City consider allowing more time to bid the project? ANSWER: Addendum No. 1 moved the bid opening back one week as well as the increase the question and answer period. ' cityw—o Alto $0 of e r s o n Q •" COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 119 "building a better community" FACITY-PROJECTSt41005-Street Dept Hyde Park Maintenance FacilitylCorrespondenceTre-bid Notes.doc; E , • Additional question were asked of the Architect. These issues are address in Addendum No. 2. Sincerely, Britt E. Smith, P.E. Director of Streets and Parking C: Plan Holders Meeting Attendees Project File Writer's File I I City"of ' lost Its of erson �q,' .v ' COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT W _ "bui(ding_a better community„ FICITY-PROJECTS141005-Street Dept Hyde Park Maintenance Facility\CorrespondenceTre-bid Notes.doc I�' FINANCE DEPARTMENT PURCHASING DIVISION SUBJECT: Bid No. 2341 - Street Division Maintenance Facility, Project No. 41005 Community Development, Opened June 12, 2007 BIDS RECEIVED: Base Bid/Alternate 2 & 5 Verslues Construction, Jefferson City, MO $1,351,748.00 GBH Builders, Jefferson City, MO $1,355,800.00 Barry Construction, California, MO $1,550,889.00 J.C. Industries,Inc., Jefferson City,MO $1,583,000.00 Wisch&Vaughan Const., Jefferson City, MO $1,615,000.00 Curtiss-Manes-Schulte,Inc., Eldon, MO $1,619,613.00 FISCAL NOTE: 3502-9900-7350-6064 3502-9900-7350-6069 • Street Division Building City Facilities FY2006-07 $ 985,000.00 FY2006-07 $ 550,000.00 Expended 17,047.50 Expended .-0- Encumbered 5,952.50 Encumbered -0- Bid 2341 962,000.00 Bid 2341 389,748.00 Balance $ -0- Balance $ 160,252.00 PAST PERFORMANCE: The City does not have a record of past performance with this vendor; however, staff believes the vendor will complete the work as specified and bid. RECOMMENDATION: Staff recommends award of the base bid and alternates 2 and 5 to Verslues Construction of Jefferson City, Missouri in the amount of$1,351,748.00. ATTACHMENTS - SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION Signatur • Purchas g)Went Comm ity Deve ment Director